You are on page 1of 414

WinCC V4

Manual Part 2/3

C79000-G8276-C107-01

Edition August 1997

WinCC, SIMATIC, SINEC, STEP are Siemens registered trademarks. All other product and system names in this manual are (registered) trademarks of their respective owners and must be treated accordingly.

(The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.)

(We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.)

© Siemens AG 1994 - 1997 All rights reserved C79000-G8276-C107-01 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

Technical data subject to change

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

08.97

Graphics Designer

Table of Contents / Graphics Designer
1 2 Functionality .............................................................................. Structure ....................................................................................
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.4 2.4.1 2.5 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 2.6.8 2.7 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.9 2.10 Color Palette ............................................................................... Assigning a Standard Color......................................................... Assigning a User-Defined Color................................................... Object Palette ............................................................................. Drawing an Object....................................................................... Selecting an Object ..................................................................... Changing Object Properties......................................................... Moving an Object with the Mouse................................................ Sizing an Object with the Mouse.................................................. Changing the Start Angle/End Angle with the Mouse................... Style Palette................................................................................ Changing the Line Style .............................................................. Changing the Line Weight ........................................................... Changing the Line End Styles...................................................... Changing the Fill Pattern............................................................. Alignment Palette........................................................................ Aligning Objects .......................................................................... Zoom Palette............................................................................... Menu Bar .................................................................................... File Menu .................................................................................... Edit Menu.................................................................................... View Menu .................................................................................. Insert........................................................................................... Align............................................................................................ Options Menu.............................................................................. Window Menu ............................................................................. Help Menu................................................................................... Standard Toolbar ........................................................................ Font Palette ................................................................................ Changing the Font....................................................................... Changing the Font Size............................................................... Changing the Font Color ............................................................. Changing the Line Color.............................................................. Status Bar ................................................................................... Layer Bar ....................................................................................

1-1 2-1
2-2 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-17 2-18 2-21 2-26 2-30 2-30 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-38 2-38

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

i

Graphics Designer

08.97

2.11 2.11.1 2.11.2 2.11.3 2.11.4 2.11.5 2.11.6 2.11.7 2.11.7.1 2.11.7.2 2.11.7.3

Object Properties ........................................................................ Display Object Properties............................................................ Pin .............................................................................................. Pipettes for Transferring Object Properties.................................. Object List................................................................................... "Properties" Tab.......................................................................... "Event" Tab................................................................................. Setting Dynamics with a Direct Connection.................................. Constants as Source of a Direct Connection................................ Object Properties as Source of Direct Connections ..................... Tags as Source of Direct Connections.........................................

2-39 2-39 2-39 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-50 2-52 2-55 2-56 2-57

3

Configuring Actions ..................................................................
3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.1.1 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.2.1 3.2.1.2.2 3.2.1.2.3 3.2.1.2.4 3.2.1.2.5 3.2.1.2.6 3.2.1.2.7 3.2.1.3 3.2.1.4 3.2.2 Introduction ................................................................................. Linking Actions with Graphic Objects........................................... Making Object Properties Dynamic.............................................. Setting Dynamics Using the Dynamics Dialog.............................. Adding Dynamics with the Dynamic-Wizard................................. System Functions........................................................................ Miscellaneous Functions ............................................................. Standard Dynamics..................................................................... Import Functions ......................................................................... Picture Functions ........................................................................ User Archive Functions ............................................................... Example of a configured Dynamic ............................................... Setting Dynamics with a C Action................................................ Setting Dynamics with a Tag Value ............................................. Reacting to Events ......................................................................

3-1
3-1 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-21 3-32 3-35

4

Appendix ....................................................................................
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.1.13 4.1.14 Object types and their properties................................................. Line Properties............................................................................ Polygon Properties...................................................................... Polyline Properties ...................................................................... Ellipse Properties ........................................................................ Circle Properties.......................................................................... Ellipse Segment Properties ......................................................... Pie Segment Properties............................................................... Ellipse Arc Properties.................................................................. Circular Arc Properties ................................................................ Rectangle Properties................................................................... Rounded Rectangle Properties.................................................... Static Text Properties.................................................................. Application Window Properties.................................................... Picture Window Properties ..........................................................

4-1
4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-14 4-15

ii

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

4.1.15 4.1.16 4.1.17 4.1.18 4.1.19 4.1.20 4.1.21 4.1.22 4.1.23 4.1.24 4.1.25 4.1.26 4.1.27 4.1.28 4.2 4.3 4.4

OLE Control Properties ............................................................... OLE Object Properties ................................................................ I/O Field Properties ..................................................................... Bar Properties ............................................................................. Graphic Object (External Format) Properties............................... Status Display Properties ............................................................ Text List Properties ..................................................................... Button Properties ........................................................................ Check Box Properties.................................................................. Option Group Properties.............................................................. Round Button Properties ............................................................. Slider Properties.......................................................................... Group Properties......................................................................... Picture Properties........................................................................ Attributes in Alphabetical Order................................................... Output formats for I/O-Fields ....................................................... Assignments for Text Lists ..........................................................

4-16 4-17 4-18 4-20 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-27 4-29 4-31 4-33 4-35 4-37 4-38 4-39 4-72 4-76

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

iii

Graphics Designer

08.97

iv

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

Preface
Purpose of the Manual This manual introduces you to the functions of each software component and their operation in a reference manual format. You can find the information you need quickly by using the table of contents or the index. Naturally, the information is also available to you in the on-line help in either a context-sensitive fashion or in the on-line help contents.

Total Overview and Configuration Example

The "Getting Started" manual, which is part of the WinCC package, contains a total overview of WinCC and a configuration example in which the most significant functions of the individual components are followed through in a practical application.

Additional Support

If you have technical questions, please address them to your Siemens contact partner, located in the businesses responsible for your location. You can find the addresses in the attachment entitled Siemens Worldwide, in "S7-300 Automation System Structure in an S7-300," in catalogs, and on CompuServe (go.autforum). In addition, you may call our Hotline at 011-49-911-895-7000 (Fax 7001). You can find additional information on the Internet under the address www.aut.siemens.de/coros/html_00/coros.htm.

Information about SIMATIC products

Up to date information about SIMATIC products can be obtained: * from the Internet under http://www.aut.siemens.de/ * via fax# 08765-93 02 77 95 00 In addition, the SIMATIC Customer Support provides current information and downloads that can be beneficial for the utilization of SIMATIC products: * from the Internet under http://www.aut.siemens.de/support/html_00/index.shtml * via the SIMATIC Customer Support Mailbox under phone# +49 (911) 895-7100 * To address the mailbox, use a modem with up to V.34 (28.8 kBaud), which parameters must be set as follows: 8, N, 1, ANSI, or dial up through ISDN (x.75, 64 kBit). The SIMATIC Customer Support can be reached by phone under the number +49 (911) 895-7000 and by fax under the number +49 (911) 895-7002. Inquiries can also be made via Internet mail or mail addressed to the above mailbox.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

v

Graphics Designer

08.97

vi

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

It offers the following features: • Easy to use. simple interface with tool and graphic palettes • Streamlined configuration with integrated object and icon libraries • Open interfaces for importing graphics and supporting the OLE 2.0 interface • Configurable dynamic behavior of picture objects with support from an assistant (Dynamic Wizard) • Links to additional functions by means of powerful script configuration • Links to graphic objects that you can create yourself • 32-bit application. capable of running under Windows 95 and Windows NT WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 1-1 .08.97 Graphics Designer 1 Functionality Graphics Designer is used to create process pictures.

Graphics Designer 08.97 1-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

08.97

Graphics Designer

2 Structure
Graphics Designer contains the following items:

• Palettes for creating and editing graphic objects:
Color Palette Object Palette Style Palette Alignment Palette Zoom Palette Font Palette Menu Bar Standard Palette Status Bar Layer Bar Object Properties

• Palettes and bars for operating the Graphics Designer:

• A dialog window for setting and changing object properties:

Tips & Tricks

When you start Graphics Designer, the "Tips & Tricks" window appears.

Click on the "Help" button to see notes about configuration. Note: If you deselect the "Show tips at startup" check box, the system will not display the window any longer. You cannot undo this selection.

Context Sensitive Help

By switching the context sensitive help on, you receive help text about palettes, menu commands, and buttons. It also assists you in finding additional information in on-line help .

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

2-1

Graphics Designer

08.97

• How to Get Information About the Palettes, Menu Commands, and Buttons:
1. In the Graphics Designer toolbar, click on the "Help" A question mark appears on the mouse pointer. 2. Click on the palette, menu command, or button about which you want information. button.

Changing the Palette In order to have a better overview of the entries in the palettes, especially those in the object and style palettes, you can change the size of the palettes. Size

• How to Change the Size of the Palettes:
1. Click on the palette border, hold down the left mouse button, and drag the palette into the workspace. 2. Drag the palette to the desired size as you do with other Windows objects. 3. While holding down the left mouse button, move the palette to wherever you want it on the screen.

2.1 Color Palette
Through the color palette, you can assign one of the 16 standard colors, a basic color, or a color you define yourself to the selected objects by using the mouse. For example, a mouse click within the color palette changes any of the following colors:

• The fill color for area objects (for example, rectangles) • The line color for line objects (for example, polylines) • The background color for text objects
Note: The color palette can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu.

2.1.1 Assigning a Standard Color
• How to Assign a Standard Color to an Object:
1. Click on the object. 2. Click on one of the 16 standard colors in the color palette.

2-2

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

2.1.2 Assigning a User-Defined Color
• How to Assign a User-Defined Color to an Object:
1. Click on the object. 2. Click on the icon in the color palette.

3. Click on the color you want in the "Basic Colors" or the user-defined colors. or Click on the "Define Color >>" button to create another color combination.

2.2 Object Palette
Using the object palette, select an object which will be created in the first visible layer of the graphics workspace. Layer 0 is assigned to this purpose in Graphics Designer. The objects available are arranged by the following subject areas:

• Standard Objects which include polygon, ellipse, and rectangle • Smart Objects which include OLE control, OLE object, bar, and I/O field • Windows Objects which include Button and Check Box
Notes: You can also access the object palette using only the keyboard by pressing "Alt + O" and then using the arrow keys. You can place the object palette anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a border. The object palette can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

2-3

Graphics Designer

08.97

Standard Objects Line Polygon Polyline Ellipse Circle Ellipse Segment Pie Segment Ellipse Arc Circular Arc Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Graphic Objects are used primarily to draw system pictures. The look of the objects can by changed at run time by making them dynamic (for example, by linking them to the process). Static Text Static Text is implemented to represent text. Static means that the text is within a text object (no dynamic reference). You can change the look, location, and contents of the text box during run time. If a static text is to extend for multiple lines, a line return can be inserted via the key combinations <Shift Return> or <Ctrl m>.

Smart Objects Application Window Application Windows are objects managed by the message system (Alarm Logging), the archive system (Tag Logging), the report system (Print Jobs), and also by applications (Global Scripts). In Graphics Designer, the outside properties (position, size, and other attributes) are configured and transferred to the application at run time. The application opens the application window and manages it for display and operation.

2-4

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

Picture Window Picture Windows are objects that accept pictures created with the Graphics Designer. They are configured according to position, size, and their other dynamic properties. For example, one important property is a reference to the picture (picture name) to be displayed in the picture window. By changing the "Picture Name" attribute dynamically at run time, the contents of the window can be changed dynamically. OLE Control Use an OLE Control to implement Windows elements (like a button or a selection box). An OLE control has attributes which are displayed in the "Object Properties" window "Event" tab and can be edited there. OLE Object Graphics Designer offers the opportunity to insert OLE Objects in a graphic. In the CONFIGURATION mode, you can edit a few objects with the appropriate OLE application by double clicking; others are activated by double clicking. After you have made changes to a linked OLE object in an attached object box, you must update the link manually in order to display the changes. You cannot edit in the RUNTIME mode. I/O Field You can use the I/O Field as an input field, an output field, or a combined I/O field. The binary, hexadecimal, decimal, or string data formats are possible. You can also specify limit values, hidden input, or acceptance on full. Bar The Bar is assigned to the Smart Objects group. Its properties (attributes) influence its appearance and functionality. It displays values graphically relative to a high and a low limit, either as a purely graphic overview or as a combined representation of the values with a scale that you can define. Graphic Object (External Format) Use the Graphic Object (External Format) to accept a picture that was created in an external graphic format into a Graphics Designer picture.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

2-5

Graphics Designer

08.97

Status Display Use the Status Display to display any number of different states of an object. You can make the display dynamic by connecting it to a tag whose value corresponds to the status. You can assign any number from 0 to 2 32 -1 (bit combination). The states can accommodate gaps (1, 2, 5, 6, etc.). It is possible to have states without assigned pictures, which can, if necessary, be removed with the “Clear List” command.

Text List Use the text list to assign text to values. It can be used as an input list (text input --> value output), output list (value input --> text output), or combined text list. The decimal, binary, or bit data formats are possible. The "decimal" list type displays the text assigned to the output value. When you enter a text, the assigned value is transferred as an input value to the data manager. If a value range is assigned to the text, the bottom range limit is transferred. This also applies to "top open" value ranges (for example, >=100). With "bottom open" value ranges (for example, <=0), the top range limit is transferred. The "binary" list type displays a text that is assigned to a bit of the output value if that bit is set. In this case, only one bit may be set in the output value (one text is displayed). The text assigned to that bit number is output. If more than one bit is set in the output value, the text "***" is output. When you enter a text, the data manager receives the input value of the value in which exactly that bit is set whose number corresponds to the text entered. The "bit" list type displays a text that relates to the status of a defined bit in the output value. Exactly two texts can be configured. One text is configured if the bit is set, and another text if the bit is not set. When you enter a text, the appropriate bit is set or deleted in the available output value and the new value is used as the input value. The relevant bit is determined by a unique property (bit number). When you use a text list object, the configured list of text assignments is opened. In the case of the "decimal" and "binary" list types, the text that corresponds to the current output value is selected. In the case of the "bit" list type, the opposing text to the current status is selected because use of this list type normally serves to "turn" a bit and therefore make further operation unnecessary. The text list object can be connected to the text library via the “Language Switch” attribute. During the configuration, entered text is automatically written to the text library. In the text library, the texts to be displayed can be translated. If you switch data languages, the system will read the corresponding translations from the text library.

2-6

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

3D Bar The 3D Bar is assigned to the smart objects group. Its properties (attributes) influence its appearance and functionality. It displays values graphically relative to a high and low limit. You can configure the type of the 3D display in any way you wish. The 3D Bar is part of the Basic Process Control option package. Group Display The Group Display object provides a hierarchically concentrated display of the current states of certain message types. Although, there is no connection to the message system within WinCC. Use the group display in RUNTIME mode to execute a picture change to the picture in which the error source is displayed. This opportunity for rapid navigation to an error source is a very significant function for the user.

Note: The group display cannot be configured "on line" (in RUNTIME mode) because this can lead to an incorrect display in RUNTIME mode. The Group Display is part of the Basic Process Control option package.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

2-7

Graphics Designer

08.97

Windows Objects Button The Button is used to control process events (like acknowledging messages or warnings). It recognizes two states ("pressed" and "not pressed"). The link to the process is achieved by making the corresponding attributes dynamic. Check-Box The Check Box is used when you need a multiple selection. You can select one or multiple boxes in the check box by clicking on it. A very flexible link to the process can also be achieved here by making the corresponding attributes dynamic. Option Group The Option Group is similar to the check box but only allows a single selection. The process link from the option group can be created at run time by making the attribute dynamic. Round Button The Round Button is implemented like the button for operating process events. However, in contrast to that button, the round button also has a latch down setting for both the "pressed" and "not pressed" states. The process link is achieved by making the appropriate attributes dynamic. Slider The Slider is implemented as a movement regulator for controlling a process (for example, temperature control). The control range lies between the minimum and maximum values. You can establish a link to the process by making the appropriate attributes dynamic.

2-8

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

You can change all of these default settings (see "Changing Object Properties"). or Click on the workspace. 3. By clicking the right mouse button. • How to Draw a Polygon or a Polyline: 1. 5.1 Drawing an Object Before you begin All objects are drawn with the default object properties in the first visible layer of the graphic workspace. After Drawing functions. Now you can create another object or select an object which is already in the workspace and change its properties. you can enter an additional corner point. Select the "Polygon" or "Polyline" icon from the object palette."Settings . 2. Layer 0 is assigned for this purpose in Graphics Designer. 6. Click the left mouse button on the starting point." in the "Options" tab. If you double click on a location on the line. After an object is drawn. Then drag the cursor while pressing the mouse button until the object reaches the desired size. you can correct the part of the object you entered last. In the workspace. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-9 ..2.08. End the polygon or the polyline by double clicking the left mouse button. 3. the object palette automatically changes to the "Select Object" mode. or 1. 2. Select the desired object by using the mouse in the object palette. click the mouse where you want to place the object.97 Graphics Designer 2. • How to Draw an Object: 1. you must double click on the corner while pressing the "Ctrl" key. In order to delete a corner. Activate the object palette with the keystroke combination "Alt + O". The object is then displayed in a system default size. 2. Create the selected object with defaults by hitting the "Enter" key. 4. You can change the defaults using the menu "Options" .. The polygon is closed while the polyline is not. Click the left mouse button on each of the other corner points. Note: If you turn on the "Grid" and the "Snap to Grid" you can align the drawn objects with each other much better. Select the object type using the arrow keys.

attach it to the screen with the Pin 2."Settings . Note: With multiple selection. 3. Click the right mouse button to open the pop-up menu. Setting Object Properties You can set default object properties for each object type. select the corresponding attribute to change the object property.. Select an object type from the object palette. or Hold down the mouse button and drag a frame ("lasso") around the objects you want to select. With the "Surrounding" option." menu to select the "Touching" option under "Object Selection" in the "Options" tab.2.2 Selecting an Object • How to Select an Object: Click on the object with the mouse.2."Properties" menu and . These defaults are used each time a new object is created. all of the attributes of the selected objects are listed in the "Properties" tab. Click on "Properties" to display the object properties. However. • How to Set the Defaults for Object Properties: 1. 2-10 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . all of the objects to be marked must be completely enclosed by the lasso.3 Changing Object Properties • How to Change the Object Properties: 1. 2. 4.. Change the desired object properties in the "Properties" tab in the "Static" column.Graphics Designer 08. In the "Properties" tab. 3. you can mark the objects you want by simply touching them with the lasso. The properties for the corresponding default object are displayed. 2. Open the dialog window with the object properties by means of the button on the standard palette or the "View" . Click on an object with the mouse.97 2. Note: If you used the "Options" . only attribute values that are identical in all of the objects are displayed. • How to Select Multiple Objects (Multiple Selection): Hold down the "Shift" key and click on each object with the mouse.

2. 3. Drag the object to the desired position.6 Changing the Start Angle/End Angle with the Mouse The "Change the Start and End Angle" function relates to the objects "Ellipse Segment.97 Graphics Designer 4. Note: You can change some properties directly. 2. Drag the object to the desired size. The object is then surrounded by a rectangle with 8 handles. the object can only be Note: If the "Snap to Grid" shifted according to the grid setting. by using the style or color palettes."Settings" menu in the "Default Objects" tab." "Ellipse Arc. Click the mouse on the object." WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-11 .2. or background color. like line and border style. Click on an object and hold down the left mouse button.08. Example: 2. Change the size horizontally or vertically with one of the handles in the middle of the border. 2. When you exit Graphics Designer. 2.2. function is enabled. You can change the size of the object diagonally with one of the four corner handles." "Pie Segment." and "Circular Arc. you can save the presettings by means of the "Options" . 2.5 Sizing an Object with the Mouse • How to Change the Size of an Object with the Mouse: 1.4 Moving an Object with the Mouse • How to Move an Object with the Mouse: 1. Click on one of these handles and hold down the left mouse button.

Drag the object to the desired size. 2-12 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . The end points of the curved object are identified by somewhat larger handles. there are different types of styles available. Example: 2. The object is then surrounded by a rectangle with 8 handles. You can also operate the style palette with the keystroke combination "Alt + S" and the arrow keys. Example: You can change the size of the object diagonally with one of the four corner handles. Depending on the object type. 3. The pointer changes to a crosshair with an S (Start Angle) or an E (End Angle) attached. The style palette can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu.97 • How to Change the Start/End Angle of an Object with the Mouse: 1. 2.3 Style Palette Change the look of the selected object using the style palette.Graphics Designer 08. You can place the style palette anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a border. Click on the object with the mouse. For example: • Line/Border Styles • Line/Border Weights • Line End Styles for line objects • Fill Patterns Note: The settings that are currently selected are displayed in a bold typeface. Click on one of the larger handles and hold down the mouse button. Change the size horizontally or vertically with one of the handles in the middle of the border.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-13 . Note: The weight can only be enlarged for the "solid" line/border style." "dot. etc. Click on or Click on the in front of your selection to open it. in the Style Palette. Double click on the or Click on the in front of your selection to open it. Click on an object with the mouse. • How to Change the Line/Border Weight Using the Style Palette: 1. 2.1 Changing the Line Style The look of lines and borders can be altered by changing the line properties. 3.08. dash. Activate the style palette using the keystroke combination "Alt + S. The values provided correspond to a line/border weight measured in pixels.3." and "dash dot dot.3.2 Changing the Line Weight The look of lines and borders can be altered by changing the weight. 3. Click on the weight you want to use from the selection available. You can select the thickness of the lines or borders from the style palette. A line weight of 1 pixel is always displayed for all other line/border styles even if you select a larger line weight. You can select the type of line or border from the style palette. solid. • How to Change the Line/Border Style Using the Style Palette: 1. 3." 2. 2. There are different weights available. Click on the line you want to use from the selection available. Accept the setting by hitting the "Enter" key.97 Graphics Designer 2. Accept the setting by hitting the "Enter" key. 3. 2. Click on an object with the mouse. icon in the style palette. or 1. Activate the style palette using the keystroke combination "Alt + S. Select the line weight you want using the arrow keys." 2. Note: If you select the line/border styles "dash. like dot. Select the line style you want using the arrow keys." "dash dot." a weight of 1 pixel is always displayed regardless of the selected line weight. There are different line styles available. or 1.

Click on the surface object. icon in the style palette. There are different line end styles available. 3. Select the line end style you want using the arrow keys. 3. 2-14 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 3. 2.3 Changing the Line End Styles The look of line ends can be altered by changing the line properties. • How to Change the Line End Styles Using the Style Palette: 1. two-sided. 2. transparent. You can select the type of line end style from the style palette. one-sided. icon in the style palette.3. like solid. striped." 2. Click on the line end style you want to use from the selection available. Note: The "Line End Style" property is not available for borders around surface objects. Select the fill pattern you want using the arrow keys. Activate the style palette using the keystroke combination "Alt + S. Accept the setting by hitting the "Enter" key.97 2. etc. 3. or 1.4 Changing the Fill Pattern The look of the background surfaces of objects can be altered by changing the object properties. like none. Click on the fill pattern you want to use from the selection available.3. Click on the or Click on the in front of your selection to open it.Graphics Designer 08. Activate the style palette using the keystroke combination "Alt + S. or 1." 2. Double click on the or Click on the in front of your selection to open it. Click on a line object with the mouse. You can select the fill pattern from the style palette. Accept the setting by hitting the "Enter" key. 2. and thin or thick arrows. There are different fill patterns available. • How to Change the Fill Pattern Using the Style Palette: 1.

97 Graphics Designer 2.Bottom) Center Objects Horizontally (Menu Arrange . Note: You can place the alignment palette anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a border.Align .08.Align .Space Horizontally) Space Objects Vertically (Menu Arrange .Center Vertically) Space Objects Horizontally (Menu Arrange .Align .Align .Align .4 Alignment Palette With the alignment palette .Same Height) Unify the Width and Height of the Objects (Menu Arrange . • Unify the height and width of multiple objects.Right) Align Objects Top (Menu Arrange .Top) Align Objects Bottom (Menu Arrange .Align .Align .Align .Same Width and Height).Center Horizontally) Center Objects Vertically (Menu Arrange . The alignment palette can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu. you can perform any of the following actions: • Change the absolute location of one or more objects. • Change the location of the selected objects relative to each other. The following alignment functions are available for the selected objects: Align Objects Left (Menu Arrange .Align .Left) Align Objects Right (Menu Arrange .Align .Align .Same Width) Unify the Height of the Objects (Menu Arrange .Space Vertically) Unify the Width of the Objects (Menu Arrange . WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-15 .

While holding down the "Shift" key. is not changed. the object located the furthest out will be used as reference. 2-16 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Note: If you select the objects with the mouse (border). If the objects have been selected via the mouse and the “Shift” key. which object will be used as reference for the alignment. the object selected first will be used as reference for the alignment. the object selected first will be used as reference for the alignment. If the objects have been selected via the mouse and the “Shift” key. the object located the furthest out will be used as reference. which object will be used as reference for the alignment.4. “Top”. the type of selection determines. If the objects have been selected via a selection frame (lasso). The objects are all set to the width and/or height of the object that was selected first. click on the objects you want to unify in your workspace. Note: The type of selection determines. If the objects have been selected via the mouse and the “Shift” key. which object will be used as reference for the alignment. “Right”. they assume the width and/or height of the object which was implemented first in this group. Note: The type of selection determines. If the objects have been selected via a selection frame (lasso). the object located the furthest out will be used as reference. If the objects have been selected via the mouse and the “Shift” key. which object will be used as reference for the alignment. If the objects have been selected via the mouse and the “Shift” key. which object will be used as reference for the alignment. 2. Note: For the functions “Left”.1 Aligning Objects • How to Align Objects: 1. Click on the appropriate icon in the alignment palette. Note: The type of selection determines. the object selected first will be used as reference for the alignment. 2. and “Bottom”.Graphics Designer 08. the object selected first will be used as reference for the alignment. • How to Unify the Width/Height of Objects: 1. Note: The type of selection determines. Click on the corresponding icon in the alignment palette. Select the objects that you want to realign. the object selected first will be used as reference for the alignment. If the objects have been selected via a selection frame (lasso). The line weight. The objects are realigned. If the objects have been selected via a selection frame (lasso). If the objects have been selected via a selection frame (lasso). the object located the furthest out will be used as reference.97 2. however. the object located the furthest out will be used as reference.

2. The zoom palette can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu. or Use one of the buttons to set the zoom factor to the standard sizes 8. or Click above or below the control.5 Zoom Palette The zoom palette lets you use the mouse on the slider or the buttons to set the zoom factor of the active window. 1. You can place the zoom palette anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a border. After you release the mouse button.97 Graphics Designer 2. The current zoom factor is displayed below the slider.6 Menu Bar The menu bar contains all of the menu commands available in Graphics Designer. the picture is displayed at the zoom factor (percentage) shown in the zoom palette. Commands which cannot be activated are shown in gray. 2. The zoom factor is set to the appropriate zoom level according to the position of the mouse. 4. Notes: You can also control the zoom palette using the keystroke combination "Alt + Z" and the arrow keys. • How to Set the Zoom Factor: 1. You can also set Zoom step-by-step using the standard toolbar functions. Holding down the mouse button.08. ½ or ¼. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-17 . drag the slider to the desired zoom factor.

a dialog window opens and requests that you do so.97 2... Load an existing file to the workspace with the "Open ."Save As .. the system opens a copy of the file with write protection. you open the "File" .1 File Menu New. Note: With a "Multi-User System" project type. Save Save the current version of your work with the "Save" command. 2-18 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .. the "Save" function is not possible. Create an empty window with the "New" command. Graphics Designer provides an empty workspace with a default name NewPdlx. When you save. the picture file to be saved may have been opened "write protected. The project-specific files for Graphics Designer (file name extension . Close Remove the opened file from the screen with the "Close" command.6.. or when you want to save a change to the file under the same path and name." command. If the file is a new picture. Use this command when a file is saved for the first time and does not have a permanent name.. you can change the name. The program-specific file name extension . Activate RUNTIME Use the "Activate RUNTIME" command to switch to RUNTIME mode to test the current picture. Note: With a "Multi-User System" project type. The x is incremented every time a new picture is created.PDL) are listed as defaults." dialog. Graphics Designer asks if you want to save the file." the file is saved." the system does not switch to RUNTIME mode. In this case." In this case. You can draw a new picture in this window.PDL is attached to the file name as a default. Note: If you have not saved the picture yet. If you exit the save dialog by means of "Cancel. If you make changes. this file must be saved under another name. If you have not yet saved a change to the file.. For further information about the process of file selection..Graphics Designer 08. Open . You must save the file under another name. see the Windows 95 description or the Windows NT description. If you answer with "Yes. another user may already have the picture file open that you want to open.

Graphics Designer prints out the first set completely before it begins printing the next set... Save All Save the current version of all open work windows under already existing names with the "Save All" command. The dialog box is like the one for the "Save" command. If a window has not been named. Print . This is useful if you want to print a picture on a printer which is not available on your system... Next/Previous View the next/previous page in the print view. the system automatically switches to the "Save As .PDL is attached to the file name as a default. Two Pages View two pages beside each other on the screen. For conventions and procedures about assigning a file name and path.." dialog. Save the current version of your work with the "Save As . see the Windows 95 description or the Windows NT description.08." command. Use this command if you want to change the name or the path of the file.. This gives you a view of the print picture with the following Toolbar: Print Start the printout... One Page Switch from the two page view back to the single page view." Close Exit the print preview and return to the normal editing view of Graphics Designer." command. Print the open picture to the preset printer with the "Print . Zoom In/Zoom Out Zoom the print preview display with "Zoom In"/"Zoom Out. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-19 .97 Graphics Designer Save As ... The program-specific file name extension . Print to File This routes the print output of a picture to a new file in a drive you specify instead of sending the output directly to a printer. Collate Sorts the pages by sets when you are making multiple sets of a picture. Print Preview Use the "Print Preview" command to check the page layout in the print view before you print it out.

" Close Exit the feedback documentation preview.. Print Feedback Documentation ." command by means of the report system in WinCC (Report Designer). The program-specific file name extension . Export the picture which is currently in the configuration window in the "Enhanced Meta File (. Two Pages View two pages beside each other on the screen.WMF)" format... Export . 2-20 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Next/Previous View the next/previous page in the print view. You can change the print layout by means of the Report Designer. Note: When you export a picture created with the Graphics Designer... Note: The feedback documentation is sent to the printer that is set in the Report Designer. Print the current picture and all of the objects contained therein along with their properties with the "Print Feedback Documentation .. Set up the desired printer and its parameters.. These properties are dependent on the capabilities of the printer that is set. One Page Switch from the two page view back to the single page view.EMF is attached to the file name as a default.. you lose all object properties which can be made dynamic that belong to individual objects.97 Printer Setup .Graphics Designer 08. This means that the dialog boxes are quite different depending on the type of printer. Properties Open a dialog box in which you can set printer-specific properties. Feedback Documentation Preview Use the "Feedback Documentation Preview" command to check the page layout of the feedback documentation in the print view before you print it out. This gives you a view of the print picture with the following Toolbar: Print Start the printout.EMF)" or "Windows Meta File (. Zoom In/Zoom Out Zoom the print preview display with "Zoom In"/"Zoom Out.

Duplicate Create a copy of an object directly in the picture. The objects can only be returned to the picture using the "Undo" command.. Exit Exit the Graphics Designer. The picture is stored on the Clipboard until a new "Cut" or "Copy" replaces it.6. Redo Repeats the action that was undone ("Undo") previously.. Cut Remove objects from the picture and place them on the Clipboard.")." dialog. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-21 .2 Edit Menu Undo Take back the last command used in processing the picture (Undo). Copy Create a copy of an object and store it on the Clipboard. Select All Highlight all of the objects in the picture." you open the save dialog (see "Save File" or "Save File As .. Delete Remove all of the highlighted objects from the picture without overwriting the Clipboard. If you have not yet saved changes to open files. 2. The contents of the Clipboard do not change. This area offers you rapid access to the files without having to use the "File" "Open . Graphics Designer asks if you want to save the files.. If you still have a dialog window open in Graphics Designer at that point. Note: You can also exit Graphics Designer implicitly by means of the Control Center. the system releases an appropriate message. You must then exit Graphics Designer explicitly. Paste Copy the contents of the Clipboard and insert them in the picture. Objects duplicated this way are not stored on the Clipboard. If you answer with "Yes.08. The picture is stored on the Clipboard until a new "Cut" or "Copy" replaces it.97 Graphics Designer File List The file list displays the file names of the four most recently edited pictures.

Holding the "Shift" key. Object properties of an object group consisting of a line. Click on "Group" in the "Edit" menu. a circle. and a rectangle: Sample 2-22 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . All of the objects in a group can be selected and edited with one single mouse click. click on all of the objects that you want to group together. All objects except OLE Controls and OLE Objects may be grouped. Edit Group Objects You can change the properties of all of the group elements globally or edit the properties of each individual element using the "Object Properties" window.97 Group Group multiple selected objects together in what is known as a group object.Graphics Designer 08. 2. or Draw a border around the desired objects using the mouse. • How Make a Group of Objects: 1.

I/O objects can also contain a number in the sequence for the Tab order. These are listed according to the sequence in which they were created. Ungroup Ungroup a group of objects so that you can edit each object individually.08. Changing the attributes "Position X" and "Position Y" in the group element does not change the same attributes in the individual elements."Sequence" generally relates to I/O objects. TAB Sequence Influence the sequence in which operable objects are triggered in RUNTIME mode. 2. Notes: The properties of the group consist of the default attributes of the group and the batch of attributes belonging to all of the subobjects."Settings" command. Note: Operable I/O objects can possess a number in the TAB sequence for both the Alpha Cursor and the Tab Order."Tab Order" . Display the object properties (by double clicking on the group). Edit the properties. Each individual object retains this property in relation to the group origin. 3. Open the "Object Type" dialog box with the "Edit" "TAB Sequence" . Select a property of an individual object or a property from the whole group. Each attribute is only listed once. Differentiate between the following: • Alpha Cursor Objects • Tab Order Objects "Alpha Cursor" . "Tab Order" . Highlight the group of objects.97 Graphics Designer • How to Edit Objects within a Group: 1."Sequence" relates to objects which are selected using the "Object Type" data area. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-23 . Changing a group attribute has an effect on all of the subobjects that share the attribute. 4.

Note: If you hold the "Shift" key and click on the object. 3."Sequence" in the "Edit" menu. the number is reset to 1."TAB Sequence" . Note: If you hold the "Shift" key and click on the object. Click on these rectangles sequentially."Tab Order" . The numbers increase correspondingly. 3.Graphics Designer 08. End the input by clicking on an empty space in the workspace. A numbered rectangle appears in the upper left corner of each input/output object. 2-24 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 2."Settings". the number is reset to 1. You can also remove objects from the TAB sequence or reenter objects in the TAB sequence. End the input by clicking on an empty space in the workspace. You can also remove objects from the TAB sequence or reenter objects in the TAB sequence."Tab Order" ."Alpha Cursor" . Click on "TAB Sequence" . Click on "TAB Sequence" ."Sequence" in the "Edit" menu. You can still change numbering later. You can still change numbering later. • How to Set the TAB Sequence of the Tab Order: 1. Click on these rectangles sequentially.97 • How to Set the TAB Sequence of the Alpha Cursor: 1. A numbered rectangle appears in the upper left corner of each object selected by "Edit" . The numbers increase correspondingly. 2.

• How to Delete an Object from a TAB Sequence: 1. 3. 2."Settings . Now click sequentially on the other objects. The number of the object is replaced by an asterisk (*). click on the object types which should be included in the TAB sequence of the Tab Order. In the dialog box."Alpha Cursor" or "TAB Sequence" . 2. click on the object to be deleted from the TAB sequence. Numbers above that one are reassigned to other objects when you click on those objects." The TAB sequence number is inserted in the objects. They are numbered according to the order of their selection. Click on "TAB Sequence" ."Tab Order" in the "Edit" menu. 2."Tab Order" . • How to Change an Existing TAB Sequence: 1.97 Graphics Designer • How to Change the Selection of Object Types for the Tab Order: 1."Tab Order.. In order to renumber only some of the objects. Holding the "Shift" + "Ctrl" keys. click on "TAB Sequence" .. hold the "Ctrl" key and click on the last object which should retain its number. The TAB sequence numbers are inserted in the objects.08. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-25 ."Alpha Cursor" or "TAB Sequence" . The objects with higher numbers are automatically renumbered. In the "Edit" menu." in the "Edit" menu. The first object you click on receives the number 1. you assign the number 1 and thus start a new sequence. Notes: If you click on an object while holding the "Shift" key. Click on "TAB Sequence" .

or click on "Library" in the "View" menu. You can store objects created in Graphics Designer as icons under any name you select in this library.3 View Menu Properties Opens a window where the properties of the selected object or object group are displayed. Holding the "Shift" + "Ctrl" keys. • How to Store a Graphic Object in a Library: 1. The TAB sequence number is inserted in the objects. transfer them to a selected object with the "Properties" . line weight. 2. The library window will open. The pictures can be stored in either a global library (path is provided in the MCP. 2."Alpha Cursor" or "TAB Sequence" . 2.97 • How to Reinsert an Object into the TAB Sequence: 1. click on the object marked with an asterisk (*) that is to be reinserted in the TAB sequence.6.Graphics Designer 08. The asterisk (*) is replaced by the next number in the TAB sequence."Assign" command. and border weight) are assigned."Tab Order" in the "Edit" menu. 2-26 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Only the properties (attributes) which both objects contain (like color. Highlight the object or the group of objects you want to store under a name in the library. You can select from two functions which can also be accessed using the standard toolbar icons: • Copy Properties • Assign Properties Copy Properties Copies the properties from an object (except for the object name and the properties belonging to the "Geometry" area) in order to transfer them to another object. Click on "TAB Sequence" . In the toolbar. Properties Transfer the properties of an object or an object group to another object using the "Properties" menu item under the "Edit" menu. Library Opens the Graphics Designer picture library.INI file) or a project-related library (\LIBRARY in project path). Then you can paste them into other pictures if necessary."Copy" command. Assign Properties After you take properties from one object with the "Properties" . select the button.

Select a folder in which to store the object. 2. The library window will open. The file name is highlighted. 6. • How to Change a Picture Name in the Library: button. Using the right mouse button. select the menu. open the pop-up menu." Toolbars . 3.. Click on the Graphics Designer workspace. 5." 4. You can also change the name of a picture later. The name remains highlighted. Library Toolbar The Library Toolbar contains some of the icons that are in the Windows Explorer Toolbar. select the menu. or click on "Library" in the "View" 1. 3 .). • How to Paste a Graphic Object from a Library: button. Click on the desired object and move it to the Graphics Designer workspace. Select the folder you want to take the object from. Note: Pictures with tag links and actions should not be stored in the "Global Library" since this could lead to errors when they are linked to other projects.08. 2. 4. 2. The object receives the default name Objectx (x = 1. Select whether you want to take the object from the "Global Library" or from the "Project Library. Select whether the object should be stored in the "Global Library" or in the "Project Library. In the toolbar. Input a new name for the picture.. and execute the "Paste" command. open the pop-up menu... Click on the icon for the picture to be changed. move the object to the file list. You can also use the pop-up commands "Copy" and "Paste" as well as the Toolbar icons or the keystroke combination "Ctrl + C" and "Ctrl + V" to move the object. In the toolbar. Turn the palettes and toolbars on and off depending on your need. Assign a picture-related name to the object. The library window will open. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-27 . or click on "Library" in the "View" 1. Using the mouse." 3. and click on the "Copy" command.97 Graphics Designer 3. or Click on the desired object. open the pop-up menu and execute the "Rename" command. plus "Preview. 4.

. However the screen display will show the next evennumbered multiple of that value greater than 10 pixels (in case of a setting of 4 pixels. the screen will display 12). select or deselect palettes and toolbars by clicking on the corresponding check-boxes. all newly drawn objects are automatically aligned with the grid points. you can align your objects to that smaller grid value. If you also switch on the "Snap to Grid" function. A check mark in the control box shows that the palette or toolbar is selected. If you set a smaller value (for example. You can test the effect on the screen display without exiting the dialog box by using the "Apply" button. This hides all palettes and bars. 2. 2-28 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08.. This will turn them on or off. Use the "Restore" button to recreate the last setting of the toolbars that was saved. 4 pixels).. Grid . You can insert a grid into the workspace in order to make your work there more precise. In the “Toolbars” dialog..97 • How to Display/Hide Toolbars: 1. Switch back to the normal view by pressing any given key or any mouse button. Full Screen Enlarge the workspace to the full screen size." in the "View" menu. Note: The minimum grid space displayed on the screen is 10 pixels. Click on "Toolbars .

Notes: Objects are created in the first visible layer of the graphic workspace.97 Graphics Designer Zoom Change the size of the picture shown on the screen. for the layers to WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-29 . you can select a segment of the screen with a lasso and enlarge the segment. The view can be changed according to the following increments: • • • From 20% to 100% in increments of 10% From 100% to 400% in increments of 50% From 400% to 800% in increments of 100%.. With the "Zoom" . • How to Make Layers Active/Inactive: 1. or Use the "All On" button to make all of the layers active.08.. Switch layers to active or inactive. Layers ." in the "View" menu. This displays or hides the objects in those different layers. Click on the layers in the selection list which are to be set to active. or the "1 to 15 Off" button to deactivate layers 1 to 15.. Click on "Layers . An object is assigned to a layer through its object properties. These are then marked with a check mark in the list. This displays the "Settings" dialog box with the "Visible Layers" tab. 2.."Zoom Area" command. Layer 0 is set as the default for this in Graphics Designer. or Click on the numbers in the layer bar be set to visible or invisible. The system does not allow you to switch off all of the layers.

when a text box is mirrored at the vertical middle axis. The properties are appropriately adjusted during a rotation (for example. An object can receive different inputs for different languages. the text orientation changes from "left justify" to "right justify"). Mirror Mirror objects on the horizontal or vertical middle axis of the object.4 Insert Import ... 2-30 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 ..6.6.. an OLE object cannot be rotated). Align Determine the location of objects relative to each other.. Import graphic objects which are stored in different formats.. Use the "Language . The system supports the WMF format (Windows Meta File) and the EMF format (Enhanced Windows Meta File). the text orientation changes from "horizontal" to "vertical"). The functionality corresponds to the alignment palette.5 Align Rotate Rotate objects by 90 degrees each. 2. Only certain object types can be mirrored (for example.Graphics Designer 08. The properties are appropriately adjusted when an object is mirrored (for example. when a text box is rotated by 90 degrees. Only certain object types can be rotated (for example. an OLE object cannot be mirrored)." command to select the language with which the object input is linked.97 Language . Example: 2.

The following functions are available: • Place On Top • Place On Bottom • Move Up One Layer • Move Down One Layer Place On Top Move an object to the foreground within a layer using the "Within the Layer" ."Move Up One Layer" command. Move Down One Layer Move an object one position backward within a layer using the "Within the Layer" . Place On Bottom Move an object to the background within a layer using the "Within the Layer" . Highlight the object you want to move one space forward."Move Down One Layer" command. • How to Move an Object One Space Backward within the Layer: 1."Move Up One Layer" in the "Arrange" menu. 2. • How to Move an Object One Space Forward within the Layer: 1. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-31 ."Place On Top" command.08. Click on "Within the Layer" ."Move Down One Layer" in the "Arrange" menu. Move Up One Layer Move an object one position forward within a layer using the "Within the Layer" . or Hit the "Plus" key. or Hit the "Minus" key.97 Graphics Designer Within the Layer You can influence the location of an object with the "Within the Layer" command. Highlight the object you want to move one space backward. Click on "Within the Layer" ."Place On Bottom" command. 2.

However.. the screen display will show the next evennumbered multiple of that value that is greater than 10 pixels (in case of a setting of 4 pixels." command opens a dialog window with the following tabs: • "Grid" Tab • "Options" Tab • "Visible Layers" Tab • "Default Objects" Tab You can insert a grid into the workspace using the "Display Grid" function in order to make your work there more precise. It makes it easier to configure the objects for the "I/O Field. Note: The system will not allow you to switch off all the layers.. • Decide if the objects must be completely surrounded by the lasso when they are selected or if they only have to be touched.97 2." and "Status Display" objects types. You also receive an appropriate error message in the status bar. the object is represented by an empty object with a line through it in the Graphics Designer. or Press the F5 function key. after an object is created in the object palette." "Button. The "Settings .6 Options Menu Update References Update existing OLE links. • Decide if. You can make the picture layers 0 to 15 visible or invisible in the "Visible "Visible Layers" Tab Layers" tab. • Decide if you want to use the configuration dialog. the object type continues to be highlighted in the object palette or if it is reset. you can align your objects to that smaller grid value. If you also switch on the "Snap to Grid" function. If a link to an OLE object is no longer valid. Note: The minimum grid space displayed on the screen is 10 pixels. Settings ." "Slider. "Options" Tab "Grid" Tab • Decide if you want to save the configuration settings when you exit.Graphics Designer 08. If you set a smaller value (for example. all newly drawn objects are automatically aligned with the grid points. the screen will display 12).. 2-32 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . This command tests all links with OLE objects and updates the contents of the objects. Determine basic program settings using the "Options" tab .." "Bar. • How to Update OLE Links: Click on "Update References" in the "Options" menu.6. 4 pixels).

This action fills up the entire configuration window. Arrange Icons Arrange all of the pictures which are reduced to icons in the workspace in the left lower half of the picture. Cascade Display all of the windows in the workspace by overlapping them in the upper left corner. • Decide if you want to save the presettings when exiting. 2. Tile Horizontally Arrange the workspace so that all open windows are visible and each window has a maximum width. The selected window becomes the current window and is placed in the foreground of the picture. • Use the "Save Now" or "Load Now" button to save or load the presettings of the objects now. The name of the current window is marked with a check mark. This action fills up the entire configuration window.6. Window List Lists all of the windows which are currently open.08. Use the button to search through the available paths and set a different path.7 Window Menu New Window Create a copy of the current picture in another window. The height of the individual windows is determined by the number of windows. Close All Close all of the open windows.97 Graphics Designer "Default Objects" Tab Set the parameters for saving the presettings in the "Default Objects" tab . Any number of windows can be opened. This means you can display different segments of a picture at the same time. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-33 . The width of the individual windows is determined by the number of windows. • Select the file in which the presetttings are to be stored. Tile Vertically Arrange the workspace so that all open windows are visible and each window has a maximum height.

Turn on the context-sensitive Help.97 2.. see the Windows 95 description or the Windows NT description. For the rest of the procedure. For the rest of the procedure. Find . Tutorial Start the tutorial for learning how to use Graphics Designer. Glossary Call up the glossary.6.. see the Windows 95 description or the Windows NT description. For the rest of the procedure. see the Windows 95 description or the Windows NT description.8 Help Menu Contents Access the On-Line Help for Graphics Designer. About Graphics Designer Receive more detailed information about the Graphics Designer program and its platform. see the Windows 95 description or the Windows NT description. Index Request the index for On-Line Help. 2-34 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . For the rest of the procedure.Graphics Designer 08. Using Help Receive information about how to use On-Line Help.

.Print .New) Open File (Menu File .97 Graphics Designer 2.Save) Activate RUNTIME (Menu File .) Snap to Grid (Menu View .Redo) Print File (Menu File .Cut) Copy (Menu Edit ..Undo) Redo (Menu Edit .Place on Bottom) Grid On/Off (Menu View ..Grid .Within the Layer .Place on Top) Place on Bottom within the Layer (Menu Arrange .Activate RUNTIME) Cut (Menu Edit .) WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-35 ..08.Paste) Undo (Menu Edit .Grid .7 Standard Toolbar The standard toolbar contains buttons you can click on with the mouse in order to execute commands which are needed often..Open .) Save File (Menu File . The following buttons are available: New File (Menu File ...Within the Layer ..) Place on Top within the Layer (Menu Arrange .Copy) Paste (Menu Edit . You can place the standard toolbar anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a border.

The toolbar can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu.Library) Turn on Context Sensitive Help (Menu ? .Rotate) Display Object Properties (Menu View .Zoom . Note: You can place the standard toolbar anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a border.Zoom Out) Enlarge Segment (Menu View .Mirror .Zoom In) Reduce View (Menu View .Properties) Assign Static Properties (Menu Edit .Properties) Mirror Object Vertically (Menu Arrange .Vertically) Mirror Object Horizontally (Menu Arrange .97 Enlarge View (Menu View .Graphics Designer 08.Horizontally) Rotate Object (Menu Arrange .Mirror .Find).Properties) Open Library (Menu View . 2-36 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Zoom .Zoom .Area) Copy Static Properties of the Selected Object (Menu Edit .

This The square in the color can be directly assigned to another object by clicking on the icon.8. This color can be directly assigned to another text object by clicking on the icon.8.8 Font Palette Quickly change the font and font color of text objects as well as the line color of standard objects with the font palette. 2.3 Changing the Font Color The square in the icon always takes on the color which was selected last.8. 2.) which is currently active is displayed. Change Font Change Font Size Change Font Color Change Line Color Note: You can place the font toolbar anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a border. The font palette can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu.97 Graphics Designer 2. 2.1 Changing the Font The currently active font is displayed in the box.4 Changing the Line Color The function affects the following colors: • The color of the border in area objects • The line color in line objects icon takes on the color which was selected last.8.08. 2.2 Changing the Font Size The font size in points (pt. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-37 .

Displays the X-Y expansion of the object. Notes: The system does not allow you to switch off all the layers. Displays the language selected for the text input. Displays the keystroke status (for example.97 2. If multiple objects are selected. If there is no object selected.9 Status Bar The status bar provides you with the following information: Displays a brief help text for a selected function. Objects are created in the first visible layer of the graphic workspace. this display does not appear. You can place the layer bar anywhere in the workspace or anchor it to a border. this displays the position of the cursor. they are all displayed. Note: The status bar can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu. If there is no object selected. 2. The layer bar can be turned on or off via the “Toolbars…Toolbars…>procedure” entry from the “View” menu.10 Layer Bar In the layer bar. the Num Lock key is engaged in this case). Layer 0 is the default setting for this in Graphics Designer.Graphics Designer 08. Displays the X-Y position of the object. Displays the name of the selected object. 2-38 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . you can select which of the 16 layers (Layer 0 to Layer 15) are visible.

11.2 Pin The pin gives you the opportunity to affix the "Object Properties" window to a specific location on the screen. Its contents conform to each object selected. The view of the pin changes to ." or Click on the or Open the pop-up menu with the right mouse button and click on "Properties.11 Object Properties The "Object Properties" window displays all of the properties of a selected object. 3. Select the object whose properties you want to view.08.1 Display Object Properties • How to Display Object Properties: Double click on the desired object. Structure The "Object Properties" window consists of the following items: • Pin to fix the window • Pipettes to copy and assign properties • Object List • "Properties" Tab • "Event" Tab You can place the object properties window anywhere in the workspace. an object group. 2." icon on the standard toolbar. The window can be moved to a desired position and remains open even when other objects are being processed. or the defaults for an object type. • How to Affix the Window: 1. Click on the pin . holding down the left mouse button. move the bar to the desired position.97 Graphics Designer 2. 2.11. objects can be made dynamic here by setting the appropriate attributes. or 1. and they can be linked with actions. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-39 . click on "Properties. In the "View" menu. Furthermore. 2. Click on the title bar of the window and. 2. By clicking on the pin again. you can detach the window. These properties can be changed or copied.

11. Click on the right pipette icon . Click on the arrow in the object selection list to open the list. etc. In the object list or in the workspace. Note: Only object properties of matching object characteristics (for example. 2-40 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .4 Object List In the object list. Double click on the object whose properties you want to transfer. The name of the active object is displayed to the left of the selection list. border weights. select the object to which you want to transfer the copied properties. 3. Subject Tree The object properties are arranged in groups in a subject tree in the left half of the "Properties" tab. the corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window.11. Note: Objects that contains at least one dynamic attribute or one configured event are highlighted in a "bold" font in the object list. This opens the "Object Properties" window. 2. 4. 2. 2. 2.5 "Properties" Tab Define the properties of the selected object in the "Properties" tab.11. you can select additional objects in order to process them without closing the "Object Properties" window. • How to Select an Object from the Object List: 1.3 Pipettes for Transferring Object Properties • How to Transfer Object Properties: 1. 5. Click on the desired object.Graphics Designer 08. Click on the left pipette icon . When you select a group from the subject tree. colors. Click on the pin to affix the window.) are transferred.97 2.

palettes. is marked by a yellow lightning bolt..08." If the attribute was made dynamic using a "Dynamic Dialog.) for the static properties of the attribute • Dynamic (D . Attribute Settings The attributes are dependent on the object type and subject you select in the subject tree.... An attribute which is to be made dynamic using a "C Action" that has not been compiled yet. Four settings are assigned to each attribute: • Static (S .. You can learn how to make an attribute dynamic by looking under "Making an Attribute Dynamic." the light bulb is replaced by a green lightning bolt." WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-41 . depending on the type of attribute.) to make the attribute dynamic • Update (U .. If the attribute was made dynamic using a "C Action..) in case the tag which makes the attribute dynamic is addressed indirectly A green light bulb in the "Dynamic" column shows that the attribute is dynamically linked with a "Tag..97 Graphics Designer The following are examples of subjects which are possible depending on the object: • Geometry • Colors • Styles • Flashing • Filling • Font • Limits • Axis • Miscellaneous • Output/Input Note: Subjects that contains at least one dynamic attribute are highlighted in a "bold" font in the subject tree in the "Properties" tab. Attributes You can change the attributes using either value inputs. or pop-up menus. You can make the attributes dynamic by using either a tag or the return value of an action." the light bulb is replaced by a red lightning bolt.) to set the update of the attribute • Indirect (I .

Object: Circle. Select the "Edit" menu item and then select the desired property for the attribute. • How to Change an Attribute by Selecting One of Multiple Options: 1. multiple. Various procedures are described in more detail in the following: • How to Change an Attribute with Switchover: 1. 2. only attribute values that are identical in all of the objects are displayed. Attribute: Background Flash Frequency). Select the desired subject in the subject tree. However. or all objects. Subject: Geometry. This opens the pop-up menu. the new attribute value is displayed regardless of whether the attribute was changed in one. 2. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the property set in the "Static" column (for example. Note: With multiple selection. This opens the input dialog box. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. Object: Static Text. 2. Subject: Font. Confirm the "Edit" menu item to change the property of the attribute. for example. Select the desired subject in the subject tree. all of the attributes of the selected objects are listed in the "Properties" tab. If you change an attribute. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the property set in the "Static" column (for example. Click on one of the options offered. • How to Change the Value of an Attribute: 1. Attribute: Position X). Subject: Flashing. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the value displayed in the "Static" column (for example. Attribute: Text Orientation). or Click the right mouse button on the property which is set in the "Static" column. These properties are set in the defaults and can be changed statically as well as dynamically for each attribute. This opens the pop-up menu.97 Static Attribute You can set certain properties for each attribute. Object: Rectangle. Example: or Click the right mouse button on the property which is set in the "Static" column. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window.Graphics Designer 08. Select the desired subject in the subject tree. The attribute changes. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. 2-42 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Vertical / Horizontal.

• How to Change the Color of an Attribute: 1. This opens the pop-up menu. Object: Static Text. Select the "Edit" menu item which then opens the input dialog box. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. 2. Subject: Colors. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the value displayed in the "Static" column (for example. Attribute: Background Color). they are also displayed in the object properties (for example. Note: If the text input contains control characters. Example: or Click the right mouse button on the text displayed in the "Static" column. \r\n corresponds to CR/LF). 3. Select the "Colors" subject in the subject tree. This opens the pop-up menu. Enter the new text for the attribute. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. 3. This opens the input dialog box. Select the desired subject in the subject tree. Enter the new value for the attribute.97 Graphics Designer Example: or Click the right mouse button on the value displayed in the "Static" column. Object: Ellipse. Subject: Font. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the color displayed in the "Static" column (for example. This opens the color palette. • How to Change the Text of an Attribute: 1. Attribute: Text). WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-43 . 2.08. Select the "Edit" menu item which then opens the input dialog box.

3 Select the new pattern for the attribute. Subject: Styles. 2. Select the "Edit" menu item which then opens the pattern palette." button. This opens the pattern palette. 2-44 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . This opens the pop-up menu. Select the "Styles" subject in the subject tree. This opens the pop-up menu.Graphics Designer 08. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. Select the "Edit" menu item which then opens the color palette. Object: Bar.. or Select another color using the "Other ..97 Example: or Click the right mouse button on the color displayed in the "Static" column. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the pattern displayed in the "Static" column (for example. 3 Select the new color for the attribute. • How to Change the Pattern of an Attribute: 1. Attribute: Fill Pattern). Example: or Click the right mouse button on the pattern displayed in the "Static" column.

In both cases. Object: Line. Note: If you select the line styles/border styles "dash. Example: WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-45 . The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. Attribute: Line Style. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. 2. Attribute: Border Weight). Select the "Edit" menu item which then opens the selection dialog box for lines. Attribute: Border Style). 2." "dot. Select the "Styles" subject in the subject tree. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the line displayed in the "Static" column (for example. this opens the selection dialog box for line weights. Example: or Click the right mouse button on the line style displayed in the "Sta tic" column. or Object: Rounded Rectangle. Subject: Styles. or Object: Rectangle. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the line displayed in the "Static" column (for example. This opens the pop-up menu.08." or "dash dot dot. In both cases. Object: Line. Attribute: Line Weight. this opens the selection dialog box for line style.97 Graphics Designer • How to Change the Line Style/Border Style of an Attribute: 1. Subject: Styles. Select the "Styles" subject in the subject tree." "dash dot." a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected line weight/border weight. Subject: Styles. Subject: Styles. • How to Change the Line Weight/Border Weight of an Attribute: 1. 3 Select the new line style/border style for the attribute.

This opens the selection dialog box for fonts." "dash dot. Select the "Edit" menu item which opens the line end style selection dialog box. This opens the pop-up menu." "dot.97 or Click the right mouse button on the line displayed in the "Static" column. Attribute: Font). 3. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the font displayed in the "Static" column (for example." or "dash dot dot. • How to Change the Line End Style of an Attribute: 1. 2. Note: If you select the line styles/border styles "dash. Select the "Styles" subject in the subject tree. Example: or Click the right mouse button on the line displayed in the "Static" column. or Input the new value directly. Select the "Edit" menu item which opens the line weight selection dialog box. Select the new line end styles (left and right) for the attribute. The attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. This opens the selection dialog box for line end styles. Attribute: Line End Styles). Object: I/O field. 3. • How to Change the Font of an Attribute: 1. 2. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. Select the "Text" subject in the subject tree." a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected line weight/border weight. Select the new line weight/border weight for the attribute using the larger/smaller buttons. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the line displayed in the "Static" column (for example. This opens the pop-up menu.Graphics Designer 08. Subject: Text. Object: Line. 2-46 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Subject: Styles.

Select the "Edit" menu item which opens the font selection dialog box. select the "Picture. In both cases. Subject: Pictures. Select the new font for the attribute. Double click on the name of the corresponding attribute or on the property set in the "Static" column (for example. The corresponding attributes are displayed in the right half of the window. Attributes: Picture Status Off. the selection dialog for picture selection opens. or Object: Status display. or Click the right mouse button on the graphic that is displayed in the "Static" column." "Pictures" or "Status" subject in the subject tree. Object: Round button. Example: WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-47 . 3. • How to Change an Attribute through Picture Selection: 1. This opens the pop-up menu. Attribute: Flash picture). Subject: Status. This opens the pop-up menu.08. 2. Select the "Edit" menu item to open the dialog window for picture selection.97 Graphics Designer Example: or Click the right mouse button on the font displayed in the "Static" column. Depending on the object. 3.

Delete the language entry assigned to the object by selecting a new language. Select the desired graphic for the attribute. This opens the pop-up menu. 2. 3. • How to Delete a Language Entry: 1. Select the "Miscellaneous" subject in the subject tree. Note: To delete an assigned picture. or Click on the "Browse…" button to use the Windows default dialog to find the graphic in another folder. Select the "Edit" menu item which opens the language selection dialog box. Attribute: Configured Languages). This opens the selection dialog box for languages. Example: or Click the right mouse button on the language displayed in the "Static" column. The attributes are displayed in the right half of the window.Graphics Designer 08. use the "Cancel Selection" button. Subject: Miscellaneous.97 4. Object: Static Text. 2-48 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Double click on the "Configured Languages" attribute or on the language displayed in the "Static" column (for example.

Click on the light bulb with the right mouse button and select the "Tag .08. Click on the object."Background Flash Frequency. for example "Flashing" .97 Graphics Designer Making an Attribute You can make an attribute dynamic by linking it with a tag or an action. click on the button and assign parameters to properties of the new tag in the dialog window. The light bulb turns green. Click on the light bulb with the right mouse button and select the "Tag" menu item from the pop-up menu. Select the subject and the corresponding attribute from the "Properties" tab. • How to Link an Object with a New Tag: 1. Open the pop-up menu using the r ight mouse button. 5." 4. select the tag needed from the tag dialog box. 3. 3. for example "Flashing" . Select the "Properties" menu item. 5. Select the subject and the corresponding attribute from the "Properties" tab. 3." menu item from the pop-up menu. After setting the parameters. 2. • How to Link an Object with a New Action: 1. 2. for example "Flashing" . 5. Open the pop-up menu by using the right mouse button. 2. In the dialog. In the tag dialog box." 4." 4. The light bulb turns green. select the tags needed. Click on the light bulb with the right mouse button and select the "Dynamic Dialog" or "C Action" menu item from the pop-up menu. Edit the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box or configure a "C Action" A red lightning bolt (dynamic dialog) or a green lightning bolt (C action) replaces the light bulb.."Background Flash Color On. Open the pop-up menu by using the right mouse button. Select the "Properties" menu item.. 6. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-49 . Select the "Properties" menu item. Dynamic • How to Link an Object with an Existing Tag: 1."Background Flash Color Off. Select the subject and the corresponding attribute from the "Properties" tab. Click on the object. Click on the object.

Subject Tree Object events are divided into groups in the subject tree in the left half of the "Event" tab. You can link each event with a hot key that also triggers the action. you can access different tags dynamically. If you select a group from the subject tree. This string tag contains the name of another tag whose contents trigger the attribute change. You can select the following subjects depending on the object: • Mouse • Keyboard • Miscellaneous • Property Subjects with the Attributes of the Object Note: Subjects that contain at least one configured event are highlighted in a "bold" font in the "Properties" tab subject tree. Indirect Addressing of A string tag for making the attribute dynamic must be provided with indirect an Attribute addressing. By changing the name in the string tag.11. you define actions to be carried out by the selected object. • How to Set Indirect Addressing of an Attribute: Double click on the box in the "Indirect" Column.6 "Event" Tab In the "Event" tab. and thus determines how current the dynamic object is. Select the way in which the attribute is to be made dynamic. or you can set your own cycle time. Indirect addressing is not possible with actions. 2. or Click the right mouse button on the box in the "Indirect" column.97 Setting the Update Cycle The update cycle determines how up-to-date the object attributes are. Indirect addressing is marked with a check mark. • How to Set the Update Cycle: Double click on the box in the "Update" column and select the TAB sequence from the list box. 2-50 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . the corresponding events are displayed in the right half of the window. You can select one of the standard cycles for the dynamic TAB sequence. or Click the right mouse button on the box in the "Update" column and select the desired TAB sequence.Graphics Designer 08. This opens the pop-up menu.

Press Left/Right: The event is triggered directly by pressing the mouse key over the object. when the pointer is on an object: Press or release the left or right mouse button. The following setting is assigned to every triggering event: Action (A . Event Mouse . Standard functions are available for the actions. You can also program your own actions in C programming language.) to display an assigned action or direct connection Triggering Events WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-51 . a blue lightning bolt is displayed. If a direct connection has been configured for an event.97 Graphics Designer Events If an event is linked to an action. Object Event Each object in a picture can be linked with actions.Mouse Click: The event is triggered by releasing the mouse key.Release Left/Right: Releasing the mouse key triggers the event for the object over which the mouse pointer was located when the mouse key was pressed. When you configure actions.. A direct connection is easy to configure and performs very fast during runtime. Triggering events is dependent on the object you select from the subject tree.. but only if the mouse pointer is over the object when the key is pressed and released. You can select the standard functions with a dialog box.08. You can trigger an action with the following events: • Mouse event. the attributes must be accessed using their OLE automation names. the lightning bolt is green. Event Mouse . • Miscellaneous object events: Changing the object • Events which are linked to an attribute of the object: Changing an object attribute Changing the status of a tag which affects an object attribute Notes on Runtime Behavior: Event Mouse . • Keystroke event: Press or release a key.

if the event is linked to a function. The lightning bolt in the object properties window will turn green. Sources can be constants. "Mouse" . dynamic object. or attributes of picture objects. object. Configure the "C-Function". 6. Direct Connection To establish a direct connection. 2. How to configure a direct connection. 5. dialogs. • How to Link an Event with a Function: 1. You can find information about linking an event with a function to an action under Connecting an Event with a Function . 3.97 Selecting the Action The following two entirely different possibilities are available for further processing events: C Action A "C Action" occurs by linking an event with a function which is formulated in ANSI-C programming language and is triggered cyclically or by the event." 4. Targets can be tags or dynamic attributes (of objects. if a direct connection has been configured for an event. Click on the object. or tag) from the “Direct Connection” dialog. for example. tags. Call up the pop-up menu for the action dialog b y clicking the right mouse button on the lightning bolt. Select the "C Action" menu item. The lightning bolt in the object properties window will turn blue.7 Setting Dynamics with a Direct Connection Configuring a direct connection for an event causes the value of the source element (source) to be transferred to the target element (target) during runtime. if this event occurs. 2. select a source element (constant. The appearance of the dialog for configuring a direct connection is dependent on the objects contained in the picture and on the source/target. select the subject and the corresponding attribute. is described in "Making a Direct Connection Dynamic ". 2-52 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08. The lightning bolt in the object properties window turns green. or tag) and a target element (current dialog. or tags)."Mouse Operation. Call up the pop-up menu with the right mouse button and select the "Properties" menu item. In the "Event" tab. Advantages of a direct connection are its easy configuration and increased performance during runtime.11.

Call up the pop-up menu for the action dialog by clicking the right mouse button on the lightning bolt. Assignment errors made can only be noticed in the runtime mode . Call up the pop-up menu with the right mouse button and select the "Properties" menu item. "Mouse" . if an object is used as a source or target Set the tag addressing via these option buttons. Property List Direct/Indirect Tag Tag. An operating message will be displayed if the event occurs. which has been entered in the text tag. A selection can only be made."Mouse Operation. Opens the “Tag Selection” dialog. Select the "Direct Connection. The check box can only be selected. The read/write access is carried out to the tag. 3. A selection can only be made.97 Graphics Designer Basic Elements Operating Element Description Selects a configured picture that is to be displayed during a picture change. In direct addressing.. if an object is used as a source or target Lists all dynamic attributes of a selected object. 2. The option buttons can only be accessed. Select an object." menu item. Object List Lists all objects contained in a picture. • How to Configure a Direct Connection: 1. for example. Operating Message Note: If an entry is incomplete.." 4. 5. the indicated tag must be a text tag. In the "Event" tab. a message will be displayed. the read/write access is carried out to the indicated tag. WinCC can not check. select the subject and the corresponding attribute. if a tag is used as the source of the direct connection. if your input is logically correct or makes sense. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-53 . if a tag is used as a source or target.08. In indirect addressing.

if your input is logically correct or makes sense. select the “Source” type: − Constant. If an object is copies. In the “Direct Connection” dialog. 7. to select a dynamic property of the current dialog (the "Target" . The lightning bolt in the object properties window will be blue. to enter a string sequence into the text field (digits will be converted by WinCC) or to select a picture via the button and the “Select Picture” dialog − Property. In the “Direct Connection” dialog. to select a tag via the button and the selection dialog These actions define the source element. if you want to use the properties of the currently selected object as the source or the target of a direct connection. The direct connection of the object that has been created by the copy procedure will therefore point to “this object”. select the “Target” type: − Current Window. Note: You will be informed. if the input is incomplete. This entry should be used. 2-54 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 6. WinCC can not check. to select an object and a dynamic property − Tag. to select an object and a dynamic property − Tag."Object" field will be blank) − Object in Picture.Graphics Designer 08. to select a tag via the button and the selection dialog These actions define the source element. The newly created object will therefore be used as the source or target of the direct connection. its dynamics will be copied as well. Assignment errors made can only be noticed in the runtime mode The object list contains the entry “this object”.

the tag will be assigned a value of 50. the object “Rectangle1“ will be displayed 50 pixels wide. If the event occurs. the object “Button1” will be labeled “Picture1”. "picture1" 50 Rectangle1 / Width 50 Tag.pdl" Target Explanation Current Dialog / Picture If the event occurs. Button1 / Text If the event occurs.pdl” will be displayed. This will open a dialog containing all the previously configured pictures.7.08. an operating message will be displayed. a string chain can be entered into the text field. a picture Name change will be carried out. the picture named “picture1. In the dialog. you can also use the button. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-55 . Simultaneously. If the event occurs.1 Constants as Source of a Direct Connection If a constant is selected as the source of a direct connection. The following table explains the effects of the text input on various target elements: Source "picture1.97 Graphics Designer 2.11. with direct Operating Message To configure a picture change.

the fill pattern of the object “Rectangle1” will adapt to the fill pattern of the object “Circle1”. The newly created object will therefore be used as the source or target of the direct connection. Circle1 / Fill Pattern Rectangle1 / Fill Pattern If the event occurs. 2-56 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .2 Object Properties as Source of Direct Connections The following table explains the effects of various direct connections. Bar1 / Height Note: The object list contains the entry “this object”.7. The direct connection of the object that has been created by the copy procedure will therefore point to “this object”. the height of the object “Bar1” will be assigned to the tag. if you want to use the properties of the currently selected object as the source or the target of a direct connection. if an object property is used as a source: Source Circle1 / Width Target Current Dialog / Width Explanation If the event occurs. This entry should be used. If an object is copies. its dynamics will be copied as well.11. the dialog width will adapt to the width of the object “Circle1”.Graphics Designer 08. Direct Tag If the event occurs.97 2.

which has been entered in tag 2. if a tag is used as a source: Source Tag1. direct Tag2. the tag.11. Additionally.08. an operating message will be displayed.97 Graphics Designer 2. direct Target Circle1 / Radius Explanation If the event occurs.7.3 Tags as Source of Direct Connections The following table explains the effects of various direct connections. Tag1. the radius of the object “Circle1” will be changed according to the tag value. will be assigned the value of tag 1. indirect with operating message WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-57 . If the event occurs.

Graphics Designer 08.97 2-58 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

Tag Logging.97 Graphics Designer 3 Configuring Actions 3. Functions and actions which may be used throughout a project or across projects are called "global scripts". Tag Logging. They are not linked to an object.3) • Loop in Alarm functionality of the message system (Alarm Logging) The return value of a function can control a property of the object with which the action is linked. you may use "internal functions" and default functions unique to the system.3. In addition to the project functions. you should plan for a higher system load.1 Introduction "Actions" are functions which are formulated in ANSI -C programming language and are executed cyclically or because of an event.4.2) • Archive tags (see Volume 3.3.2) • Compressed archives (see Volume 3. as well as all of the C standard library functions (contained in the internal functions). Section 3. changes in object properties.08. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-1 .3. or changes in the value of tags.4. Actions may be linked with any of the following: • Graphical objects • Process value archives (see Volume 3. Examples of events are keystrokes. Section 3. Section 3. Section 3. Tag Logging.2) • User archives (see Volume 3. Note: Actions are processed interpretatively. It is therefore better to replace extensive actions by implementing separate DLL’s (Dynamic Link Libraries). When implementing numerous or extensive actions. Tag Logging.2.3.

". Now select the category of properties which contains the attribute you want to influence during run time.Graphics Designer 08.1 Making Object Properties Dynamic You selected the "Properties" tab in the "Object Properties" box. select "Event. Example: for a rectangle. You can now utilize the dynamic-wizard. 3-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . If you want to formulate the action yourself. If you wish to make the object’s properties dynamic. 3. make the following preparations:: • Open a configured picture using the WinCC Control Center. the system’s graphic editor. select "Properties". If you wish to react with an action to an event in conjunction with the selected object. Before you can formulate an action and link it to an object.2. which will support you in formulating your action.2 Linking Actions with Graphic Objects You may link an action with an attribute belonging to a graphic object that was created with Graphics Designer.97 3. The function used has a return value that controls the object’s attribute which is linked with it. the following additional steps are required: • • • Open the box "Object Properties" for the desired object. you would select the geometric properties and position X.

This opens a pop-up menu with the following options for making a property dynamic: • Use the Dynamic Dialog • Use a C Action • Use a tag value • Delete a dynamic creation which is already present 3.1.1 Setting Dynamics Using the Dynamics Dialog By clicking the right mouse button on the white light bulb in the "Object Properties" box.. • Start a status evaluation of the tags used in the expression. and arithmetic operations in an expression. This opens the "Dynamic Value Ranges" dialog box. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-3 .97 Graphics Designer Click the right mouse button on the white light bulb in the "Dynamic" column in the "Position X" row. • Set the value ranges and assign attribute values. The data type determines the ways in which the value ranges are defined.2.. functions. Here you can formulate the dynamic function by using tags. You determine how this occurs by setting the following options in the box: • Select the data type of the expressing result.08.". The value of the expression and the status of the tags used in the expression work together to create the attribute value. you opened a pop-up menu and selected "Dynamics Dialog.

".Graphics Designer 08. the formula for setting dynamics is changed to an action. the attribute value is determined according to specific Rules using the value of the formulated expression and the states of the tags used in the expression. Click the left mouse button on "Tag.97 Finally. • How to Include a Tag as a Part of an Expression: Click the left mouse button on the button or. You have now made the selected object attribute dynamic. the system uses the default cycle with a default cycle time as the update event.. Note: When you copy the object whose attribute you just made dynamic in the Graphics Designer. This opens the appropriate pop-up menu. click the right mouse button on the "Expression/Formula" row. The "Select Tag" box is then closed. "Tag" is used as the update event with a default cycle time. This opens the "Select Tag" box where you can select the tag you wish to use in the dynamic expression. or single clicking the left mouse button on the tag name and then clicking the "OK" button. At run time. as an alternative. As a final step. Note: If you do not set an update event and the expression does not contain any tags. If the expression contains tags. Select the tag either by double clicking the left mouse button on the tag name. you must determine the trigger to be used to update the attribute value using the value of the expression.. 3-4 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . the action that is connected to that attribute is copied along with it.

".. Observe the following: • Tag names must always be enclosed by single quotation marks (‘) • Tag names must not contain the symbols +.97 Graphics Designer Note: A tag name can also be entered directly in the "Expression/Formula" field of the "Dynamic Value Ranges" dialog. as an alternative. you return to the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box. click the right mouse button on the "Expression/Formula" row. You may do this in any of the following ways: • Double click the left mouse button on the function name. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-5 . The function is entered in the "Expression/Formula" column at the insertion mark. or /.. -. Click the left mouse button on "Function. This opens the appropriate pop-up menu.08. This opens the "Function Browser" box: Select the desired function by opening folders with the mouse. • How to Include a Function as Part of an Expression: Click the left mouse button on the button or. *. After you assign the current parameters to the function. This opens the dialog for assigning parameters to this function.

however. Select the menu item "Apply. This opens a second menu in which you can select the desired operator by clicking on it with the left mouse button. This opens the appropriate pop-up menu. After assigning the current parameters to the function. The function." The function and its formal parameters are then entered in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box in the "Expression/Formula" box at the insertion mark.". see Section 3. use only the operators listed in the table above. as an alternative. If necessary. In that case. "How to Assign Parameters to a Function" • How to Include an Operator as Part of an Expression: Click the left mouse button on the button or. • Click the right mouse button on the function name: This opens a pop-up menu. The "Function Browser" box remains open. If you marked text in the "Expression/Formula" text row..2.97 • Mark the function and click the "OK" button. The following operators are available: Operator + * / Description Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Note: You can also use the keyboard to enter operators. 3-6 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Other operators will lead to errors because all of the tests executed in the generated C functions are in floating-point format. click the right mouse button on the "Expression/Formula" row. Making a Function Dynamic Using a C Action. with its current parameters. Click the left mouse button on "Operator. enter the current parameters in the set of parentheses following the function name. you return to the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box. This closes both menus and enters the selected operator to the right of the insertion mark in the "Expression/Formula" row. Select the menu item "Parameter Assignment" which will place you in the dialog for assigning parameters within this function. that selected text was replaced by the formula.Graphics Designer 08.1. For assigning parameters.2.. is now entered in the "Expression/Formula" row at the insertion mark. The "Function Browser" box is closed and the function and its formal parameters are inserted in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box in the "Expression/Formula" column at the insertion mark. • Click the right mouse button on the function name: This opens a pop-up menu.

" is entered..97 Graphics Designer • How to Determine the Data Type of an Expression: You can set the data type of an expression by clicking the left mouse button on the appropriate entry in the "Data Type" box. You can change the values for the high limits and attributes by double clicking the left mouse button on the value to be changed (or click the right mouse button on the value and then click "Edit. you must click the left mouse button on the "Add" box or click the right mouse button on the "Result of the Expression/Formula" area and select "New." from the open pop-up menu. The default high limit for a value range is 100 for "Value Range1.. • How to Define a Value Range: The adjustable value range depends on the data type selected. The data type of the expression determines the type of value ranges which you may need to set. Set the value of the object attribute for each value range. "Value Range1. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-7 . the value range reaches from the minimum value that the expression can carry to a value of 100. You can establish an additional value range in the same way.08. In the above example.").." The default increment to the high limit for the next value range is 100. In order to do this. This opens a box in which you can change the value.. The first value range. The following data types are available: Selected Data Type "ANALOG": You can define value ranges for an expression in the "Result of the Expression/Formula" list.

This opens a box in which you can change the attribute value. Selected Data Type "BOOL": You can define the value of an object attribute for the cases "yes/TRUE" (value of the expression <> 0) and "no/FALSE" (value of the expression = 0) in the "Result of the Expression/Formula" list. Selected Data Type "BIT": You define the value of the object attribute in the "Result of the Expression/Formula" list for either case in which a selected bit of a tag is set or not set.Graphics Designer 08.97 Note: After a tag has been selected. 3-8 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . The selected tag is automatically used as a trigger tag and is scanned for changes during run time at a default cycle time of two seconds. You can change the attribute value by double clicking the left mouse button on the value to be changed (or click the right mouse button on the value and then click "Edit. Note: After a tag has been selected..").. The selected tag is automatically used as a trigger tag and is scanned for changes during run time at a default cycle time of two seconds. You cannot set other valid ranges. the "Tag" value is entered in the "Event Name" box. the "Tag" value is entered in the "Event Name" box.

You can change the attribute value by double clicking the left mouse button on the value to be changed (or click the right mouse button on the value and then click "Edit. Note: After a tag has been selected. The selected tag is automatically used as a trigger tag and is scanned for changes during run time at a default cycle time of two seconds. The selected tag is automatically used as a trigger tag and is scanned for changes during run time at a default cycle time of two seconds.. You can set the bit of the previously selected tag by clicking on the right . WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-9 . Open the box by clicking on the left button button. You cannot set a value range. This opens the "Bit Selection" box in which you can click on the button desired bit to select it. This opens a box in which you can change the attribute value.08.. the "Tag" value is entered in the "Event Name" box. the "Tag" value is entered in the "Event Name" box.97 Graphics Designer You cannot set other valid ranges. Use the "Select Tags" box to select the tags that contain the bits to be scanned. and then clicking on the Note: After a tag has been selected. Selected Data Type "DIRECT": The value of the expression is directly assigned to the object attribute.").

" The value you entered is then accepted as the attribute value. You can set the appropriate attribute value for each state by clicking the left mouse button on the attribute value to be changed (or click the right mouse button on the value and then click "Edit"). The tag names (without quotation marks) used in the expression are located in the left part of the window under Status. The priority of the states corresponds to their sequence in the status list. 3-10 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08. the value range containing the value of the expression is determined. Close the "Value Input" box by clicking on "OK. This expands the Dynamic Dialog window. • How Value Ranges and Tag States are Evaluated: The value assigned to the attribute is established according to the following rules: • Evaluation of the Status The status evaluation has the highest priority. Click the left mouse button on a tag name. you must activate the "Evaluate the Status of the Tags" box by clicking on it with the left mouse button. The system checks whether one or more tags used in the expression have one or more states corresponding to the status list. • Evaluation of the Value Ranges If the status evaluation did not result in a value assignment. the first entry in the list has the highest priority. the status with the highest priority determines the value assignment. If so. All of the states which a tag can assume appear in the right part of the window. This opens the "Value Input" box in which you can change the value. The attribute value linked to this value range is assigned to the object attribute.97 • Determining the Effect of the Tag Status on an Attribute Value: If you want the tag status to influence an attribute value.

the default entry for the trigger event is "Default Cycle." or "Window Cycle" as the event. If you enter the name using the keyboard." "Picture Cycle. you delete an entry that was already there. If the expression contains one or more tags. Note: The system presets the trigger event with a default entry. You can select from the following events: • Tag • Default Cycle • Picture Cycle • Window Cycle If you select "Default Cycle. You select an event by opening the "Event" list with the left mouse button and marking the desired event by clicking on it with the left mouse button.08. The default depends on the contents of your formulated expression in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box. If the expression does not contain tags." The entry for the cycle is set with a default value. the default entry for the trigger event is "Tag" and all of the tags that are in the expression are transferred to the tag list . WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-11 . This opens the "Change Trigger " box. Input the trigger name by placing the cursor in the "Trigger Name" row using a left mouse click.97 Graphics Designer • How to Set the Update Event: Click the button. you can assign a trigger name to the event.

3-12 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08. If more than one tag is input. Do this by opening the "Cycle" list with the left mouse button and marking the desired time by clicking on it with the left mouse button. If you selected "Tag" as the event. You can select from the following cycle times: At change 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s 5s 10 s 1 min 5 min 10 min 1 hr User cycle 1 User cycle 2 User cycle 3 User cycle 4 User cycle 5 The "At change" entry is only available if you selected "Tag" as the event." you may need to change the cycle time.97 If you selected "Default Cycle" or "Tag. the action is triggered when the value of one of these tags changes from one cycle to the next. the contents of the "Change Trigger" box change: Here you can input one or more tags which serve as a trigger for the action when their value changes from one cycle to the next.

The “Select Tag” dialog will open from which you can select the desired tag. Afterwards. select “DM_Tags” from the displayed pop-up menu. • Right mouse button click on the “Trigger Name” column in the tag list. If you want to enter the tag name directly. The "Select Tag" box is then closed. • By clicking on the button. click on the "Add" button to transfer the tag to the tag list. The name will not be enclosed by quotation marks. open the "Select Tag" box from which you may select the desired tag. • Select the new cycle time from the pop-up menu. You then return to the "Change Trigger" box.08. If you want to change the cycle time of a tag at a later time. place the cursor on the text line “Tag Name” and enter a name. The selected tag is now entered in the "Trigger Name" column in the tag list. The system assigns a cycle time to the entered tags in the "Default Cycle" column. Select the tag either by double clicking the left mouse button on the tag name. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-13 . select “New” from the pop-up menu. This is the time span between two sequential scans of the tags for value change. If you want to use an existing tag. use the following steps: • Click the right mouse button on the cycle time to be changed to open the pop-up menu.97 Graphics Designer There are three ways to input tags: • Using the left mouse button. or single clicking the left mouse button on the tag name and then clicking the "OK" button.

• How to Create an Action from the Entries: You have completed all of the entries for making the object attribute dynamic. The white light bulb in the "Dynamic" column is now a red lightning bolt .Graphics Designer 08. 3-14 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . If errors occur during this process. the entry "At Change" is available as a cycle. • Select the new cycle time from the list and click the "OK" button to close the box. This means that the action is triggered as soon as the value of one of the tags in the tag list changes. you must create an action from them. If the update event has been set. the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box closes and you are returned to the "Object Properties" box. Delete entered tags by marking them in the tag list and then clicking the "Remove" button. click the "Details" button. The box is then enlarged and displays a description of the errors. Mark a connected range of tags by marking the first tag in the range and then marking the last tag with the "Shift" key depressed. they are reported in the "Error Messages" box: In order to find the causes of the errors. It shows that an action created with the dynamic dialog is linked to this attribute. The system then creates an action from the entries. close the "Change Trigger" box by clicking on the "OK" button. Attention: In the case of the "Tag" trigger event. If the action was generated without errors. Mark individual multiple tags by marking the first tag and then marking all others with the "Ctrl" key depressed. This type of trigger causes a heavy system load. Do this by clicking on the "OK" button in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" dialog box. In order for the settings to control the object attribute during the run time.97 An alternative procedure is the following: • Double click on the cycle time to be changed to open the "Update" box.

with the help of the dynamic dialog. The preconfigured C-action are divided into the following categories: • System Functions • Miscellaneous • Standard Dynamics • Import Functions • Picture Functions • User Archive Functions The different categories can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tabs with the left mouse button.2. Note: For C-actions. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-15 . This is significant because once an action has been loaded as a "C Action. The preconfigured C-actions can be edited in the “Events” tab of the “Object Properties” window.. via C-actions." that is. • When you click the "Test" or "OK" button. Attention! A box will notify you that this action was created using the "simplified script configuration. 3.2 Adding Dynamics with the Dynamic-Wizard The dynamic wizard allows you to add dynamics. the symbol \ will be placed in front of it in the C-action." it can no longer be processed using the dynamic dialog. Example: ‘Motor"M"1’ will be changed to ‘Motor\"M\"1’.1. tag names used in the expression are enclosed by double quotation marks ("). click on the "Test" button. the preconfigured C-actions and trigger events are set and stored at the object properties. If a tag name contains the symbol ".. the "Result of the Expression/Formula" list of value ranges is sorted according to increasing range high limits. You may view and edit the created action by clicking the right mouse button on the red lightning bolt and opening the corresponding pop-up menu. Select "C Action. to an object. If the wizard is executed.97 Graphics Designer Notes: • If you wish to test your entries in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box for errors without creating an action." from the pop-up menu.08.

1. In the course of the wizard. With this function. an action can be created that exits WinCC. With this function. In the dynamic wizard. the C-action stored at the object properties can be edited if necessary. With this function.1. You can determine how the operating system is exited (“Shut down”. an action can be created that exits WinCC or the operating system.1. Exit WinCC Runtime Exit WinCC or Windows Language Switch Exit WinCC Start another application 3.2. 3.exe".2. “Restart”. an action can be created that starts another application.3 Standard Dynamics Operational if authorized Copy Tag Value With this function.2 Miscellaneous Functions Generate Script This function creates the framework of a wizard script..Graphics Designer 08." entry from the "View" menu. After completing the dynamic wizard. • How to add Dynamics to an Object with the Dynamic Wizard: 1. You will be asked to indicate the source and target tag. 3.1 System Functions Hardcopy With this function. In the Graphics Designer. you will indicate the path and name of the application to be started.exe" and be run with the program "Dynwiz. 2.2. This function allows you to copy the value of one tag to another tag.2. an action can be created that switches the data language. The wizard script can be edited with the program "DynWizEdit. With this function.97 Note: The display of the dynamic wizard can be turned on or off via the "Toolbars.2. an action can be created that checks the operator authorization of an user. Select the dynamic wizard via a left mouse button click on the appropriate tab of the C-action categories. select the object or picture to which you want to add dynamics. or “Log on as a different user”). 3-16 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .2. select a C-action via double click. 4. an action can be created that exits the runtime mode of WinCC. an action for creating a hardcopy of the display can be configured. With this function.. Follow the instructions in the dynamic wizard dialogs. 3.

Additional information can be found in "Hantmigr. In the course of the wizard. This C-action is only available for objects containing the “Text” attribute. You will be asked to indicate the tag to be changed and the bit number by the wizard. The object properties “Position X" and "Position Y" can be linked to tags.2.doc" file on the WinCC CD-ROM.97 Graphics Designer Link a prototype to a This function allows you to link an object property. Additional information can be found in "Hantzuli.1. to a tag of the data type “Structure Tag”.2. which will male the position of the object dynamic.doc" file on the WinCC CD-ROM. the “Text” attribute of an object can be linked to a text tag. and make that object property dynamic via the tag value. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-17 . Move Object Fill Object Output String Tag 3. Make a property dynamic This function allows you to link a object property to a tag. Add dynamics to the This function allows you to add dynamics to an object property via an element prototype of a structure tag. Rücksetzen/Ausmaskieren? Display WinCC Dialog This function allows you to display any picture of the Graphics Designer in a Box picture window. Set tag value This function allows you to set the value of a tag. 3.1. You will be asked to indicate the tag to be changed and the value. in addition to the tags. an action can be created that that makes the fill level of an object dynamic via a tag.5 Picture Functions Set/Reset multiple Bits With this function.4 Import Functions Import S7 S5 Assignment List This wizard allows you to read an assignment list of Step 5 or Step 7 into WinCC. the upper and lower limits for the fill levels 0% and 100%. that has been edited via structure “Add dynamics to a prototype” function. You will be asked to indicate the object property and tag in the course of the wizard. With this function. Additional information can be found in "Hantmigr.2.doc" file on the WinCC CD-ROM. With this function.2. an action can be created that sets multiple bits of a tag. you can define. This wizard allows you to accept a COROS LS-B message list into WinCC. Indicate the name of the picture to be displayed and set the appearance of the picture window in the course of the wizard.08. Import Messages Import S5L Only Tag This wizard allows you to accept a COROS LS-B tag list into WinCC.

the wizard creates objects (buttons. Set/Reset Bit With this function. etc. an action can be created to display an error box. or emergency box).6 User Archive Functions Generate Archive Objects For the processing of an user archive. ohne Abbruchknopf? Display Instruction Box Single Picture Change With this function.2. or emergency box). by the wizard. by the wizard. You will be asked to indicate the type of instruction (information. You will be asked to indicate the tag to be changed and the bit number by the wizard. question. Display Error Box With this function.) in the selected picture. an action can be created that sets a bits of a tag. 3-18 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . an action can be created that displays an instruction box. You will be asked to indicate the type of instruction (information. an action for a picture change can be created. The wizard will ask you to select an user archive created in Tag Logging.97 Picture Change in the This function allows you to change the content of a window object in a Window Graphics Designer picture. You will be asked to indicate the name of the new picture to be displayed. I/O fields. as well as the title and text of the message. 3. as well as the title and text of the message.2. question.1.Graphics Designer 08. Rücksetzen? ausmaskieren? With this function.

4.2. create a picture with an object of the type “Button”. 2.2. Select the button. 3. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-19 .7 Example of a configured Dynamic 1.1. In the wizard window “Select Trigger”.97 Graphics Designer 3. In the Graphics Designer. Activate the dynamic wizard via a double click on the picture function “Display Instruction Box”. select “Left mouse key” as the trigger event and click on the “Next” button.08.

if you position the mouse pointer above the button. button in the toolbar of the 9. click on the “Next” button.Graphics Designer 08. Save the picture.97 5. as well as the appearance of the message window. click on the “Finish” button. If you click the left mouse button. the mouse pointer will be displayed with a green lightning bolt. The C-action generated by the wizard can be edited via the button’s pop-up menu item “Properties” (“Events” tab). determine the content of the title line and instruction text. In the final wizard window. will open. In runtime. Afterwards. 6. Activate the project by clicking on the Graphics Designers. displaying the configured texts. In the wizard window "Set options”. a message window. 8. 3-20 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 7.

the system sets the default cycle with a default cycle time as the update event. and Set. The "Edit Action" box is then opened. In that case. you control the attribute that is linked to the action... errors which may have occurred are reported. A box will notify you of this situation. The imported action can then be edited if necessary. Note: When you copy the object whose attribute you just made dynamic in the Graphics Designer. The function becomes an action when you Assign an Update Event. Select "Compile Yes or No.1. the formulation of the action is completed.. The formulated function must be compiled. Using the return value of the function..". In this formulation you may use the preprogrammed C functions which the system makes available in the left half of the box. this is noted with a yellow lightning bolt in the "Dynamic" column within the "Object Properties" box. and the action is linked with the attribute." If you decide not to compile the action. you can access each attribute of every single object in each picture using the Get. You can export actions which were compiled without errors and load them in a file. Note: After formulating the action. If the compilation is carried out without errors. Within the function.97 Graphics Designer 3. you must then formulate the Function that you wish to implement in order to control object attributes. you open a pop-up menu and select "C Action. This means you can read and set the attribute value. You can also import exported actions and thus link them with a new attribute. you can exit the "Edit Action" box and return to the "Object Properties" box without compiling the action.3 Setting Dynamics with a C Action By clicking the right mouse button on the white light bulb in the "Object Properties" box. functions. A compiled C action is marked with a green lightning bolt in the "Object Properties" box. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-21 . the action that is connected to that attribute is copied along with it.08. In C programming language... you need only undertake the Parameter Assignment.2. During compilation. Note: If you do not select an update event.

as well as the left (open) parenthesis.Graphics Designer 08. The first row contains the header file to be linked. The second row already contains the function name followed by parentheses containing the formal parameters. The last row contains the right (close) parenthesis.97 • How to Formulate a C Function: Open the "Edit Action" box: Formulate the function in the right half of the window. The parameters are: Parameter lpszPictureName lpszObjectName lpszPropertyName Meaning Picture name of the active picture Object name of the selected object Attribute name of the attribute with which the action is to be linked Type char pointer char pointer char pointer Edit the C function in this section of the window. The following edit functions are available: Function New row Delete character to the right Delete character to the left Jump to the beginning of the row Jump to the end of the row Jump to the beginning of the text Jump to the end of the text Move the insertion point Cut selected text Copy selected text Paste text from the Clipboard Keyboard Enter Delete Backspace Home End Ctrl+Home Ctrl+End with the cursor keys Ctrl+X Ctrl+C Ctrl+V 3-22 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

select "OK" from the pop-up menu. See also Volume 2. You can shift the split bar right or left using the mouse. If you selected text. You can place fully programmed functions within your function at the cursor location. Expand a selection: Hold the Shift key and place the cursor at the desired end of the selection. Note: You can also open the "Assign Parameters" box by double clicking the left mouse button on the desired function." Mouse with left mouse button Double click with left mouse button with left mouse button • The selected text is replaced by the next character selected using the keyboard. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-23 . and Volume 2. Once the parameter assignment is successfully carried out." This means it contains a declaration of the data types and the formal parameters. Section 4. This opens a pop-up menu in which you select the menu item "Parameter Assignment. This function replaces selected text. Section 3. it is replaced by the function.97 Graphics Designer Function Mark text Mark a word Move the insertion point Further edit functions are: • Write mode is "Insert." This opens the "Assign Parameters " dialog box where you can assign parameters to the selected function. If you selected text. • Expanded selection. If you want to edit the parameter assignment yourself. the selected function with its current parameters is inserted at the insertion mark. The selected function is inserted at the cursor location as "Prototype. Global Script. Select a range: Place the cursor where you wish the selection to begin. This opens the "Select Tag" box from which you select the desired tag. Standard Functions. it is replaced by the function. Open the folders in the left half of the window and select the desired function by clicking on it with the right mouse button. hold down the Shift key. Internal Functions. and then place the cursor where you wish the selection to end. Global Script.08. You can insert tag names by clicking on the button.

you opened a pop-up menu and selected the "Parameter Assignment" menu item. The entries in the "Description" and "Data Type" columns are informational. close the "Assigning Parameters" box by clicking on the "OK" button. The selected function and its parameters are placed at the insertion mark in the "Edit Action" box. you will receive an explanation of the hot spot.97 • How to Assign Parameters to a Function: By clicking the right mouse button on the function name in the "Edit Action" box. you opened the drop-down menu by clicking button and selected the “Select Tag” entry to open the "Select Tag" on the dialog: Note: The graphic displayed contains hot spots. • How to Input a Tag as a Parameter: In the “Setting Parameters” box. You can enter parameters in the following ways: Once all of the parameters have been entered. If you click the left mouse button on a hot spot. The keystroke combination <Ctrl>Tab makes all hot spots visible. The "Assign Parameters " box is opened.Graphics Designer 08. 3-24 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

If you want to use the picture name as a parameter. Click on a picture to select it. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-25 . highlight the object name of the picture in the "Objects" list by clicking on it ("NewPdl1" in the example above) and then click "OK". Click on "OK". If you want to use an attribute name as a parameter. you opened the drop-down menu by clicking button and selected the “Graphic Objects” entry. or single clicking the left mouse button on the tag name and then clicking the "OK" button. You return to the "Assign Parameters" box and the selected name is entered as a parameter. This closes the "Select Picture" box. The "Object" list includes the objects that are contained in the selected picture. an Object. The "Properties" list is filled with the attribute names owned by the selected object.97 Graphics Designer Select the tag either by double clicking the left mouse button on the tag name. • How to Input the Name of a Picture. click on the desired object name in the "Objects" list. If you want to use the object name of an object contained in a picture as a parameter. You then return to the "Assign Parameters" box and the selected tag is entered as a parameter. click on the desired attribute name in the "Properties" list and then on "OK".08. The "Select Tag" box is then closed. This opens the on the "Picture Browser"" dialog: The left third of the box contains a list of pictures available in the project. or an Attribute as a Parameter: In the “Setting Parameters” box.

Note: The system presets the trigger event with a default entry. You can select from the following events: • Tag • Default Cycle • Picture Cycle • Window Cycle If you select "Default Cycle. the default entry for the trigger event is "Default Cycle." or "Window Cycle" as the event. you delete an entry that was already there. you can assign a trigger name to the event. the default entry for the trigger event is "Tag" and all of the tags that are in the expression are transferred to the tag list . You select an event by opening the "Event" list with the left mouse button and marking the desired event by clicking on it with the left mouse button. The default depends on the contents of your formulated expression in the "Dynamic Value Ranges" box.Graphics Designer 08. If the expression contains one or more tags.97 • How to Set the Update Event: Click the button." The entry for the cycle is set with a default value. If the expression does not contain tags. This opens the "Change Trigger " box." "Picture Cycle. If you enter the name using the keyboard. Input the trigger name by placing the cursor in the "Trigger Name" row using a left mouse click. 3-26 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

" you may need to change the cycle time.08. If more than one tag is input. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-27 . You can select from the following cycle times: At change 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s 5s 10 s 1 min 5 min 10 min 1 hr User cycle 1 User cycle 2 User cycle 3 User cycle 4 User cycle 5 The "At change" entry is only available if you selected "Tag" as the event. the action is triggered when the value of one of these tags changes from one cycle to the next. If you selected "Tag" as the event.97 Graphics Designer If you selected "Default Cycle" or "Tag. Do this by opening the "Cycle" list with the left mouse button and marking the desired time by clicking on it with the left mouse button. the contents of the "Change Trigger" box change: Here you can input one or more tags which serve as a trigger for the action when their value changes from one cycle to the next.

select “New” from the pop-up menu. • Select the new cycle time from the pop-up menu. Select the tag either by double clicking the left mouse button on the tag name.Graphics Designer 08. If you want to enter the tag name directly. place the cursor on the text line “Tag Name” and enter a name. or single clicking the left mouse button on the tag name and then clicking the "OK" button. This is the time span between two sequential scans of the tags for value change. If you want to change the cycle time of a tag at a later time. The "Select Tag" box is then closed. The system assigns a cycle time to the entered tags in the "Default Cycle" column. You then return to the "Change Trigger" box. use the following steps: • Click the right mouse button on the cycle time to be changed to open the pop-up menu.97 There are three ways to input tags: • Using the left mouse button. • By clicking on the button. The selected tag is now entered in the "Trigger Name" column in the tag list. Afterwards. click on the "Add" button to transfer the tag to the tag list. The name will not be enclosed by quotation marks. If you want to use an existing tag. • Right mouse button click on the “Trigger Name” column in the tag list. The “Select Tag” dialog will open from which you can select the desired tag. select “DM_Tags” from the displayed pop-up menu. open the "Select Tag" box from which you may select the desired tag. 3-28 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

this is the "Circle1" object and the "Colors" property. on the light bulb icon in the row with the "background color" attribute. Click the right mouse button on the light bulb icon for the appropriate attribute that you want to make dynamic. for example. select the property to be made dynamic. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-29 . Delete entered tags by marking them in the tag list and then clicking the "Remove" button. If the update event has been set. Open the "Object Properties" box by clicking the right mouse button on the appropriate object. • Select the new cycle time from the list and click the "OK" button to close the box. In the following figure. This returns you to the "Edit Action" box. Mark a connected range of tags by marking the first tag in the range and then marking the last tag with the "Shift" key depressed. In this box. Example: In the Graphics Designer. open the picture than contains the object whose attribute you want to make dynamic. Mark individual multiple tags by marking the first tag and then marking all others with the "Ctrl" key depressed. • How to Control the Attribute Value: You can use the return value of your C function to control the attribute that is linked to your action.97 Graphics Designer An alternative procedure is the following: • Double click on the cycle time to be changed to open the "Update" box.08. close the "Change Trigger" box by clicking on the "OK" button.

m Warning(s)" appears in the status bar. A change of the value of the var process tags was selected as the trigger event and the value of the tags is checked every two seconds by the Control Center." message. The function consists of the definition of both local tags xvar and result.. The n and m characters are the number of errors or warnings. select "C-Action.". In the right half of the window.. 3-30 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . The last row ensures that the function value of the C function main receives the value of the event tags.." If errors occurred during the compilation.Graphics Designer 08. The if-else construct assigns the result tags result a value of CO_RED (value for the color red) if the value of the xvar tags is greater than 128. the message "n Error(s).97 From the pop-up menu that opens. The function Click on the is compiled. it already contains the completed structure of a C function. This procedure is displayed in the box’s Toolbar with a "Compile Action. 0 Warning(s). The GetTagDWord ("var") function assigns the value of the process tags var to the local tags xvar. Formulate your function and set the trigger that will call your C function during run time. The "Edit Action" window opens. otherwise it receives the value CO_BLUE (value for the color blue). the status bar displays the message "0 Error(s).. If the function was compiled without errors. • How to Compile the C Function: button in the Toolbar of the "Edit Action" box.

The "Save As" box is closed. After a successful compilation. close the "Edit Action" box by clicking on "OK. The extension "act" is added by the system. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-31 .97 Graphics Designer The errors and warnings appear in the lower part of the edit window . • How to Export an Action: button in the Toolbar. You then have the choice of compiling or returning to the "Object Properties" box without compiling. This shows that this attribute is linked to a compiled C action." This returns you to the "Object Properties" box. Clicking the "Save" button exports the action and loads it in the file you selected. Note: If you close the box without compiling the action. If you decide not to compile the action. The attribute linked to the action is marked with a green lightning bolt in the "Dynamic" column. You can shift this split bar up and down using the mouse. dividing the window. it is marked with a yellow lightning bolt in the "Dynamic" column in the "Object Properties" box.08. This opens the "Save As" box: Click on the Here you select the storage location and the name of the export file. you are notified of this in a dialog box.

". Import files are files which were previously created by exporting an action.1.." Clicking the "Open" button imports the action and then closes the "Open" box. The previously white light bulb is now green. The "Select Tag" box is closed and you return to the "Object Properties" box. Note: The imported action completely replaces an action that was previously created.. The "Select Tag" box is then opened.4 Setting Dynamics with a Tag Value By clicking the right mouse button on the white light bulb in the "Object Properties" box. It shows that a tag was used to set the dynamics in the attribute. you must set the type of Addressing in the "Object Properties" box.2. Here you select the Tag that you want to use to set the dynamics of the referenced object attribute.Graphics Designer 08. Next. you opened a pop-up menu and selected "Tag. The tag name is entered next to the green light bulb. 3. This opens the "Open" box: Here you select the desired import file. and which have an extension "act. 3-32 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 • How to Import an Action: Click on the button in the Toolbar.

the square contains a check mark. The default value is 2 seconds. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-33 . as a value." column in the object attribute row. The white light bulb is colored green. The default addressing method is direct.08. • How to Select a Tag from the "Select Tag" Box: Open the "Select Tag" box. you can open a pop-up menu by clicking the right mouse button on the appropriate square. Through the update cycle." In the case of indirect addressing. This concludes setting the dynamics of the attribute. Finally. or single clicking the left mouse button on the tag name and then clicking the "OK" button. • How to Select the Method of Addressing: Double click with the left mouse button on the square located in the "Indir .97 Graphics Designer There are two addressing methods: • Direct addressing. The tag must be a string type and contain. You then return to the "Object Properties" box. Alternatively. Select the tag either by double clicking the left mouse button on the tag name. you determine the frequency with which the tag value updates the attribute value. • Indirect addressing. The "Select Tag" box is then closed. the addressing method is set to "direct. With an empty square. set the Update Cycle. the name of a tag whose value is assigned to the attribute. The tag name is now entered in the object attribute row in the "Dynamic" column. The tag value is assigned to the attribute directly. From this pop-up menu you can select the method of addressing by clicking the right or left mouse button.

Position the entries using the slider and select the update cycle you want by clicking on it with the left mouse button. select the desired update cycle from the pop-up menu. The update cycle is now entered. Open the list here by clicking the left mouse button on the list window or on the button to the right of the list window. Clicking on the "OK" button returns you to the "Object Properties" box. This closes the menu and enters the selected value in the "Update" column in the "Object Properties" box. Click the right mouse button on the "Object Attribute" row and the "Current" column. you find: • Picture Cycle • Window Cycle • At Change The attribute value is updated when the tag value is changed." Using the left or right mouse button.Graphics Designer 08. This opens a pop-up menu with the following preset update cycles: In addition to preset cycle times. You can also set the update cycle by double clicking the left mouse button to open the "Update" box. 3-34 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 • How to Set the Update Cycle: There are two ways to set the update cycle. The times as well as the names can be changed in the WinCC Control Center under "Update Cycles. The box is located in the "Update" column on the row containing the appropriate object attribute. • User Cycle 1 to User Cycle 5 The times and names are presented as defaults.

the button is set to inactive in this box.. Formulate your C function. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-35 . the function is executed when the event occurs and the "Rectangle1" object is selected. for example. you would use this button to configure the triggering event.08. Since you have already set the event." Click the right mouse button on the white lightning bolt in the "Action" column." to formulate a new function or to change an already available function.2. Setting Dynamics with a C Action Note: When you copy the object you just made dynamic in the Graphics Designer.. a "Mouse Event.2 Reacting to Events You selected the "Event" tab in the "Object Properties" box and set an object like "Rectangle1. on the "Press Left" row. Now the function to be formulated is triggered when the left mouse button is clicked on the "Rectangle1" object. See also Section 3. The "Edit Action" box opens.1. for example.2. Otherwise.. the action that is connected to the object is copied along with it. This category could be. A pop-up menu opens in which you can select any one of the following options: • Create the function or edit an existing function (C Action.97 Graphics Designer 3.2.) • Create a direct connection • Delete the function (Delete) Select "C Action. With keystroke events.." Now select the event category which contains the event for triggering the C function from the left half of the box.

97 3-36 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08.

1 Object types and their properties 4. and picture objects) of the Graphics Designer with their specific properties (attributes).1. 4.08. The conclusion explains the output formats of the I/O-Field and the assignments of the Text List. smart objects. Note: The Smart Objects "3D Bar" and "Group Display" are parts of the "Basic Process Control" option package. Then the attributes of the objects are explained (in alphabetical order). The "Line" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Rotation Reference X Rotation Reference Y Rotation Angle Line Color Line Background Color Line Weight Line Style Line End Style Flashing Line Active Flashing Line Color Off Flashing Line Color On Line Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Geometry Colors Styles Flashing Miscellaneous WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-1 .1 Line Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.97 Graphics Designer 4 Appendix This chapter describes the object types (standard objects.group objects. Windows objects. They are described along with their properties and specific attributes in the WinCC Options Manual.

Graphics Designer 08. The "Polygon" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Rotation Reference X Rotation Reference Y Rotation Angle Number of Corners Current Value X Current Value Y Index Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Dynamic Filling Fill Level Geometry Colors Styles Flashing Miscellaneous Filling 4-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .1.2 Polygon Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.97 4.

08.3 Polyline Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.97 Graphics Designer 4.1. The "Polyline" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Rotation Reference X Rotation Reference Y Rotation Angle Number of Corners Current Value X Current Value Y Index Line Color Line Background Color Line Weight Line Style Line End Style Flashing Line Active Flashing Line Color Off Flashing Line Color On Line Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Geometry Colors Styles Flashing Miscellaneous WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-3 .

4 Ellipse Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.97 4. The "Ellipse" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Radius X Radius Y Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Dynamic Filling Fill Level Geometry Colors Styles Flashing Miscellaneous Filling 4-4 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .1.Graphics Designer 08.

5 Circle Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.97 Graphics Designer 4. The "Circle" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Radius Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Dynamic Filling Fill Level Geometry Colors Styles Flashing Miscellaneous Filling WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-5 .08.1.

Graphics Designer

08.97

4.1.6 Ellipse Segment Properties
All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Ellipse Segment" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Start Angle End Angle Radius X Radius Y Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Dynamic Filling Fill Level

Geometry

Colors

Styles

Flashing

Miscellaneous

Filling

4-6

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

4.1.7 Pie Segment Properties
All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Pie Segment" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Start Angle End Angle Radius Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Dynamic Filling Fill Level

Geometry

Colors

Styles

Flashing

Miscellaneous

Filling

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

4-7

Graphics Designer

08.97

4.1.8 Ellipse Arc Properties
All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Ellipse Arc" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Start Angle End Angle Radius X Radius Y Line Color Line Background Color Line Weight Line Style Flashing Line Active Flashing Line Color Off Flashing Line Color On Line Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display

Geometry

Colors

Styles

Flashing

Miscellaneous

4-8

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

4.1.9 Circular Arc Properties
All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Circular Arc" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Start Angle End Angle Radius Line Color Line Background Color Line Weight Line Style Flashing Line Active Flashing Line Color Off Flashing Line Color On Line Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display

Geometry

Colors

Styles

Flashing

Miscellaneous

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

4-9

Graphics Designer

08.97

4.1.10 Rectangle Properties
All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Rectangle" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Dynamic Filling Fill Level

Geometry

Colors

Styles

Flashing

Miscellaneous

Filling

4-10

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

4.1.11 Rounded Rectangle Properties
All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Rounded Rectangle" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Corner Radius X Corner Radius Y Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Dynamic Filling Fill Level

Geometry

Colors

Styles

Flashing

Miscellaneous

Filling

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

4-11

Graphics Designer

08.97

4.1.12 Static Text Properties
All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Static Text" object is described using the following properties: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Font Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Text Font Font Size Bold Italic Underline Text Orientation X Alignment Y Alignment Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Flashing Text Active Flashing Text Color Off Flashing Text Color On Text Flash Frequency

Geometry

Colors

Styles

Font

Flashing

4-12

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Graphics Designer

Miscellaneous

Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Adapt Border Configured Languages Dynamic Filling Fill Level

Filling

Note: If the text contains control characters, they are also displayed in the object properties window in the tab labeled "Properties" - Subject "Text" Attribute "Text" - "Static" (for example, \r\n equals CR/LF).

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

4-13

1.Graphics Designer 08.13 Application Window Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.97 4. The "Application Window" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Window Contents Template Position X Position Y Window Width Window Height Display Sizable Moveable Border Title Can Be Maximized Can Be Closed Foreground Geometry Miscellaneous 4-14 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

97 Graphics Designer 4.08.14 Picture Window Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.1. The "Picture Window" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Window Width Window Height Display Update Cycle Sizable Moveable Border Title Can Be Maximized Can Be Closed Foreground Scroll Bar Adapt Size Adapt Picture Picture Name Picture Offset X Picture Offset Y Scaling Factor Geometry Miscellaneous WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-15 .

1.Graphics Designer 08." and "Operator Activities Report" cannot be configured in the container since WinCC does not influence which operation the OLE control passes to its container. WinCC OLE controls provide the attributes which are to be made dynamic as individual attributes. The OLE control object properties must be used for configuration.15 OLE Control Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. 4-16 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 ." "Width. Only individual standard types can be made dynamic in WinCC. If you select that kind of attribute in the WinCC object properties." and "View" are determined by the container and are no longer separate in OLE Control. it is triggered by the OLE control and displayed." "Password. For this reason.97 4. Structures cannot be made dynamic." "Height. The changes are accepted as long as the reporting mechanism is implemented in the OLE control." "Position Y. The "OLE Control" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Display Operator-Control Enable Server Name Geometry Miscellaneous OLE Control Properties Notes: The properties "Position X. WinCC and OLE control internal mechanisms are used to change that kind of attribute. Properties like "Operator-Control Enable.

97 Graphics Designer 4.08. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-17 .1. it is automatically registered in the database. such as the file name and path of the OLE task. In this case. Each time an OLE task is installed. The "OLE Object" is described by the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Display Operator-Control Enable Server Name Geometry Miscellaneous Notes: Windows uses a registration database to manage all of the OLE tasks installed on your computer.16 OLE Object Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. You can receive information about using the registration database from the Help functions of the registration editor. If you move or copy an OLE task to another folder manually. it is possible for the entries in the registration database to not be current. This database contains all of the information about each OLE task. you must process the database with the registration editor.

"Options" menu. You can set some attributes in the configuration dialog if you select this option in the "Options" ."Settings" .1. The "I/O Field" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Font Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Font Font Size Bold Italic Underline Text Orientation X Alignment Y Alignment Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Flashing Text Active Flashing Text Color Off Flashing Text Color On Text Flash Frequency Geometry Colors Styles Font Flashing 4-18 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08.17 I/O Field Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.97 4.

97 Graphics Designer Miscellaneous Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Operator Activities Report Operator Input Message Adapt Border Cursor Control Immediate Input Low Limit Value High Limit Value Field Type Output Value Data Format Output Format Apply on Full Apply on Exit Clear on New Input Clear on Invalid Input Hidden Input Limits Output/Input WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-19 .08.

18 Bar Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Bar" is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Bar Width Bar Height Bar Direction Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Bar Color Scale Color Bar Background Color Trend Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Bar Pattern Font Font Size Bold Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Geometry Colors Styles Font Flashing 4-20 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . You can set some attributes in the configuration dialog if you select this option in the "Options" .Graphics Designer 08.97 4."Options" menu."Settings" .1.

08.97 Graphics Designer Miscellaneous Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Change Color Maximum Value Zero Point Value Minimum Value Hysteresis Hysteresis Range Trend Average Value Process Driver Connection Scale Alignment Long Axis Sections Label Each Only Long Axis Sections Length of Axis Section Exponent Display Bar Scaling Zero Point Axis Section Scale Marks Digits to the Left of the Decimal Point Digits to the Right of the Decimal Point Limit Marker Monitoring AL Limit AL Bar Color AL Type AL Monitoring WL Limit WL Bar Color WL Type WL Monitoring TL Limit TL Bar Color TL Type TL Monitoring RL4 Limit RL4 Bar Color RL4 Type RL4 Monitoring RL5 Limit RL5 Bar Color RL5 Type RL5 Monitoring AH Limit AH Bar Color AH Type AH 4-21 Axis Limits WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

97 Monitoring WH Limit WH Bar Color WH Type WH Monitoring TH Limit TH Bar Color TH Type TH Monitoring RH4 Limit RH4 Bar Color RH4 Type RH4 Monitoring RH5 Limit RH5 Bar Color RH5 Type RH5 4-22 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08.

wmf) for the attribute "Picture" must be located in the GraCS folder of the project path. and .emf.19 Graphic Object (External Format) Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.dip.1. . WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-23 .bmp. . The "Graphic Object" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Dynamic Filling Fill Level Picture Picture Referenced Picture Transparent Color Picture Transparent Color On Geometry Colors Styles Flashing Miscellaneous Filling Picture Note: The graphic files (.08.97 Graphics Designer 4.

"Options" menu. You can set some attributes in the configuration dialog if you select this option in the "Options" .97 4.Graphics Designer 08.1."Settings" .20 Status Display Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Status Display" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Border Color Border Background Color Border Weight Border Style Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Current Status Basic Picture Basic Picture Referenced Basic Picture Transparent Color Basic Picture Transparent Color On Flash Picture Flash Picture Referenced Flash Picture Transparent Color Flash Picture Transparent Color On Flash Picture Flash Frequency Flashing Flash Picture Active Geometry Colors Styles Flashing Miscellaneous Status 4-24 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

97 Graphics Designer 4.21 Text List Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.1.08. You can set some of the attributes in the configuration dialog if you select the option in the "Options" "Settings" . The "Text List"" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Font Color Selection Font Color Select Text Color Selection Background Color Select Background Color Separation Line Color Separation Line Background Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Separation Line Weight Separation Line Style Font Font Size Bold Italic Underline Text Orientation X Alignment Y Alignment Geometry Colors Styles Font WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-25 ."Options" menu.

97 Flashing Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Flashing Text Active Flashing Text Color Off Flashing Text Color On Text Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Operator Activities Report Operator Input Message Adapt Border Cursor Control Immediate Input Language Switch Field Type Output Value List Type Assignments Bit Number Apply on Exit Number of Visible Lines Miscellaneous Output/Input 4-26 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08.

97 Graphics Designer 4. You can set some attributes in the configuration dialog if you select this option in the "Options" .22 Button Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Button" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Font Color 3D Border Color 3D Shadow Color Line Weight Line Style Fill Pattern 3D Border Weight Windows Style Text Font Font Size Bold Italic Underline Text Orientation X Alignment Y Alignment Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Flashing Text Active Flashing Text Color Off Flashing Text Color On Text Flash Frequency 4-27 Geometry Colors Styles Font Flashing WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .1."Options" menu.08."Settings" .

bmp) for the attributes "Picture Status On" and "Picture Status Off" must be located in the GraCS folder of the project path. 6. select the "Text" attribute under the "Font" area and double click on the attribute to open the "Text Input" dialog window. If you need to use a label with more than one line on a button. Enter the multiple line text. Delete the "Static Text" object. ).97 Miscellaneous Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Configured Languages Adapt Border Hot Key Picture Status On Picture Status Off Dynamic Filling Fill Level Filling Notes: The graphic files (. Use the "Shift" + "Enter" keystroke combination to move the cursor to the beginning of the next line. use the following trick: 1. Select "Static Text" and "Button" (multiple selection) and open the "Object Properties" window ( ). Close the "Text Input" dialog window. In the "Properties" tab. 4.Graphics Designer 08. 3. 5. Create a "Static Text" object ( 2. Create the button ( ). 7. 4-28 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

1.23 Check Box Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.97 Graphics Designer 4. The "Check Box" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Number of Boxes Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Font Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Box Alignment Index Text Font Font Size Bold Italic Underline Text Orientation X Alignment Y Alignment Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Flashing Text Active Flashing Text Color Off Flashing Text Color On Text Flash Frequency Geometry Colors Styles Font Flashing WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-29 .08.

97 Miscellaneous Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Configured Languages Operator Activities Report Operator Input Message Adapt Border Dynamic Filling Fill Level Selected Boxes Filling Output/Input 4-30 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08.

97 Graphics Designer 4.08.1.24 Option Group Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Option Group" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Number of Boxes Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color Font Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Box Alignment Index Text Font Font Size Bold Italic Underline Text Orientation X Alignment Y Alignment Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Flashing Text Active Flashing Text Color Off Flashing Text Color On Text Flash Frequency Geometry Colors Styles Font Flashing WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-31 .

Graphics Designer 08.97 Miscellaneous Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Configured Languages Operator Activities Report Operator Input Message Adapt Border Dynamic Filling Fill Level Selected Box Filling Output/Input 4-32 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

25 Round Button Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Round Button" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Radius Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color 3D Border Color 3D Shadow Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern 3D Border Weight Latch Down Switch Setting Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Operator-Control Enable Password Display Dynamic Filling Fill Level Geometry Colors Styles Flashing Miscellaneous Filling WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-33 .08.97 Graphics Designer 4.1.

. 4-34 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Transparent Color On Note: The graphic files (. "Picture Status On" and "Picture Status Deactivated" must be located in the GraCS folder of the project path.emf.Graphics Designer 08. Transparent Color Picture Deact. Referenced Picture Deact.bmp.dip. .wmf) for the attributes "Picture Status Off". and .97 Pictures Picture Status Off Picture Off Referenced Picture Off Transparent Color Picture Off Transparent Color On Picture Status On Picture On Referenced Picture On Transparent Color Picture On Transparent Color On Picture Status Deactivated Picture Deact.

"Options" menu."Settings" . The "Slider" object is described using the following attributes: Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Alignment Border Color Border Background Color Background Color Fill Pattern Color High Limit Background Color Low Limit Background Color Button Color High Limit Color Low Limit Color Border Weight Border Style Fill Pattern Border Weight Windows Style Flashing Border Active Flashing Border Color Off Flashing Border Color On Border Flash Frequency Flashing Background Active Flashing Background Color Off Flashing Background Color On Background Flash Frequency Geometry Colors Styles Flashing WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-35 . You can set some attributes in the configuration dialog if you select this option in the "Options" .26 Slider Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.1.97 Graphics Designer 4.08.

Graphics Designer 08. The border is displayed at the maximum width of the outline even if you configured a larger value. 4-36 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 Miscellaneous Operator-Control Enable Password Display Tool Tip Text Operator Activities Report Operator Input Message Extended Operation Maximum Value Minimum Value Operation Steps Process Driver Connection Dynamic Filling Fill Level Filling Note: You can configure an outline for the slider ("Border Weight" and "Background Color" attributes). The size of the object remains the same and the slider is reduced appropriately. In addition. you can configure another border inside the border ("Border Weight" and "Border Color").

1.97 Graphics Designer 4. Each attribute appears only once. The standard attributes of the group and the combined amount of the attributes of all of the subobjects are listed.27 Group Properties All of the object attributes belonging to the selected object are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab.08. The following attributes are always present in a "Group Object": Base Object Name Layer Position X Position Y Width Height Operator-Control Enable Password Display Attributes from Other Subjects Geometry Miscellaneous User-Defined WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-37 .

Graphics Designer 08.28 Picture Properties All of the object attributes are displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Properties" tab. The "Picture" object is described using the following attributes: Geometry Picture Width Picture Height Grid On Grid Width Grid Height Background Color Fill Pattern Color Grid Color Fill Pattern Operator-Control Enable Password Display Update Cycle Date of Last Change Cursor Mode Colors Styles Miscellaneous 4-38 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .1.97 4.

In addition to an explanation of the attribute. The Adapt Border attribute cannot be made dynamic. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-39 . The OLE automation name is also provided under the attribute name. The 3D Border Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name BackBorderWidth. Each object includes the topics with properties that are specific to that object type. The Adapt Size attribute cannot be made dynamic.97 Graphics Designer 4. The Adapt Picture attribute cannot be made dynamic. the size of the box changes. If the contents of the box are changed dynamically.08. This means that each object does not possess all of the available attributes. Adapt Picture AdaptPicture Set the picture size to fit the window size. The 3D Border Color can be made dynamic with the name BorderColorTop. The 3D Shadow Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderColorBottom. 3D Border Weight BackBorderWidth Set the weight of the 3D border. the listing also indicates whether you can make that attribute dynamic. 3D Border Color BorderColorTop Set the color for the left and top part of the 3D border. Adapt Border AdaptBorder Select whether the border should be dynamically fitted to the text size in objects that contain text. The following is an alphabetical listing of all of the available attributes without their object assignment.2 Attributes in Alphabetical Order The attributes (properties) of the various object types are divided into topic groups. 3D Shadow Color BorderColorBottom Set the color for the right and bottom part of the 3D border. Adapt Size AdaptSize Set the window size to fit the picture size.

This attribute is only relevant for input fields and for combined I/O fields. Average Value Average Set whether the last 15 values should be averaged. Slider: Set the location of the slider (horizontal/vertical) with a slider object. The Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name Alignment. The assignments depend on the list type that is set. The Assignments attribute cannot be made dynamic. Axis Section AxisSection Set the units of measurement on the axis. Apply on Full AssumeOnFull Set the system to automatically (without Tab or Return key) exit the input field and accept the input as soon as the input has been completed (the specified number of characters were entered). Apply on Exit AssumeOnExit Set the system to accept the input as soon as the field is exited (using the Tab key or a mouse click). The Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name Direction. With bars.97 Alignment Alignment Direction Bar: Set the alignment of the scale (left/right or top/bottom) with a bar.Graphics Designer 08. 4-40 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Background Color BackColor Set the background color of the object. The size of the units depends on the "Long Axis Sections" attribute. The Apply on Full attribute can be made dynamic with the name AssumeOnFull. The Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BackColor. Assignments Assignments Set the connections between the output value and the text that is to be actually output. The background color is only displayed when the object is at least partially filled. The Apply on Exit attribute can be made dynamic with the name AssumeOnExit. The Average Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name Average. This attribute is only relevant for input fields and for combined I/O fields. bar scaling is only visible when scaling is active. The Axis Section attribute can be made dynamic with the name AxisSection.

and fast (approximately 8 Hz).97 Graphics Designer Background Set the flash frequency for the background." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. Bar Color RH4 ColorLimitHigh4 Set the color for the high limit value of "reserve 4.5 Hz). The Bar Color AL attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorAlarmLow. The Bar Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BackColor2. processor. update cycle. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-41 . Bar Color RH5 ColorLimitHigh5 Set the color for the high limit of "reserve 5. The Bar Color RH5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorLimitHigh5. Bar Background Color Set the color of the bar background." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. The Bar Color AH attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorAlarmHigh. The Background Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashRateBackColor. Bar Color AL ColorAlarmLow Set the color for the limit value for "alarm low. Bar Color BackColor2 Set the color of the bar for displaying the current value. Flash Frequency You can set the frequency to slow (approximately 0. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached.08. the frequency is systemand hardware-dependent (number of objects. BackColor3 The Bar Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BackColor3. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached. and more). the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached. Bar Color AH ColorAlarmHigh Set the color for the limit value of "alarm high. Since flashing is implemented by means of software." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached. memory." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. medium FlashRateBackColor (approximately 2 Hz). The Bar Color RH4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorLimitHigh4.

" If the monitor function for the limit value is active. The Bar Color WL attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorWarningLow. The Bar Color RL5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorLimitLow5." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. Bar Direction Direction Set the positive bar axis." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. The Bar Color WH attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorWarningHigh.97 Bar Color RL4 ColorLimitLow4 Set the color for the low limit value of "reserve 4. Bar Color TL ColorToleranceLow Set the color for the limit value "tolerance low. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached. The Bar Color RL4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorLimitLow4." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. The Bar Color TH attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorToleranceHigh. The Bar Color TL attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorToleranceLow. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached. The Bar Direction attribute can be made dynamic with the name Direction." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. Bar Color TH ColorToleranceHigh Set the color for the limit value of "tolerance high. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached. 4-42 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08. Bar Color WL ColorWarningLow Set the color for the limit value "warning low. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached." If the monitor function for the limit value is active. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached. Bar Color RL5 ColorLimitLow5 Set the color for the low limit value of "reserve 5. the bar will take on the color specified in this attribute when the limit value is reached. Bar Color WH ColorWarningHigh Set the color for the limit value of "warning high.

dib) should be set to "transparent". Bar Scaling ScalingType Set the type of bar scaling (linear. logarithmic. or automatic). The bar scaling is only visible when the "Scale" attribute is active. Basic Picture Transparent Color BasePicTransColor Determine which color of the assigned bitmap object (. The Bar Width attribute can be made dynamic with the name Width. . Bar Width Width Set the width of the bar in pixels. The Basic Picture attribute cannot be made dynamic.bmp. Basic Picture Use this attribute to specify whether the "Transparent Color" function should Transparent Color On be used. Bar Pattern FillStyle2 Set the fill pattern of the bar. The Bar Scaling attribute can be made dynamic with the name ScalingType. The corresponding status is selected by means of the "Current Status" attribute. . The Basic Picture Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic. Basic Picture BasePicture Set the basic picture for the status display. The Bar Height attribute can be made dynamic with the name Height.bmp. You can select a pattern from the selection dialog box. The attribute is analyzed only if the "Basic Picture Transparent Color On" attribute is activated. the entire object or only the object reference is stored.dib).08. The Bar Pattern attribute can be made dynamic with the name FillStyle2. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-43 . Depending on the "Basic Picture Referenced" attribute. Basic Picture Referenced BasePicReferenced Determine whether the assigned picture is stored in the status display object or only the corresponding object reference is stored. The Basic Picture Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BasePicTransColor. This function is only available for bitmap objects (. BasePicUseTransColor The Basic Picture Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name BasePicUseTransColor.97 Graphics Designer Bar Height Height Set the height of the bar in pixels.

Graphics Designer 08. 4-44 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .5 Hz). medium FlashRateBorderColor (approximately 2 Hz). Border Style BorderStyle Set the style of the border of the object. Border Set the flash frequency for the border. and fast (approximately 8 Hz). Border Background Color BorderBackColor Set the background color of the border of the object. Bold FontBold Set the text attribute Bold for the text in the object. Border WindowBorder Determine whether the windows should be displayed with borders." "dash dot. Since flashing is implemented by means of software.97 Bit Number BitNumber Set the number of the relevant bit in the output value. The Bold attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontBold. the frequency is systemand hardware-dependent (number of objects. The Border Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderStyle. The background color is only visible when the border is not a solid line ("Border Style" attribute). The Bit Number attribute can be made dynamic with the name BitNumber. If you select the border styles "dash. update cycle." or "dash dot dot." a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected border weight. The Border Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderBackColor. and more). The Border Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderColor. memory. This attribute is used only with the "bit" list type. The Border Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashRateBorderColor. Flash Frequency You can set the frequency to slow (approximately 0. The Border attribute cannot be made dynamic. Border Color BorderColor Set the border color of the object. processor." "dot.

when a limit is reached) is carried out in individual segments or in the entire bar. This attribute is not analyzed unless the "Title" attribute is active. The Border Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderWidth. This attribute is not analyzed unless the "Title" attribute is active. Box Alignment BoxAlignment Set whether the boxes (for example. This value contains the possibly available border weight (a value of 0 means the border is not displayed)." a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected border weight. Border Weight BackBorderWidth Set the weight of the slider border in pixels. If you select the border styles "dash. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-45 . The Change Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorChangeType. The Can Be Closed attribute cannot be made dynamic. Can Be Maximized MaximizeButton In the case of window objects.08. The Border Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name BackBorderWidth. The Can Be Maximized attribute cannot be made dynamic. Change Color ColorChangeType Set whether a color change (for example. Can Be Closed CloseButton Determine whether the window can be closed." "dot. The Box Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name BoxAlignment. The Button Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ButtonColor." "dash dot. determine whether the window can be enlarged to the maximum screen size.97 Graphics Designer Border Weight BorderWidth Set the weight of the border of the object." or "dash dot dot. in the option group or check box) should be aligned left or aligned right. Button Color ButtonColor Set the color of the button or the slider.

The Corner Radius X attribute can be made dynamic with the name RoundCornerWidth. Current Value X ActualPointLeft Set the current horizontal position of the corner point for polygon and polyline object types in relation to the origin of the picture. Set the corner radius for a rounded rectangle. Clear on New Input ClearOnNew Set the field entry in the input field to be deleted at startup. 4-46 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . This attribute is only relevant for input fields and for combined I/O fields. Current Status Index Select the status (0 to 232 -1) for the status display object type for which you want to set the associated attributes for displaying the "Basic Picture" and the "Flash Picture. This attribute is only relevant for input fields and for combined I/O fields. The Clear on New Input attribute can be made dynamic with the name ClearOnNew. The Current Value X attribute can be made dynamic with the name ActualPointLeft.Graphics Designer 08. The Clear on Invalid Input attribute can be made dynamic with the name ClearOnError. This value is a percentage of half the width of the object." The Current Status attribute can be made dynamic with the name Index. The corner is set by the index. Configured Languages DataLanguage Corner Radius X RoundCornerWidth Set the language for the input in the text object. Changing this setting also affects the "Position X" and "Width" attributes. This value is a percentage of half the height of the object. The Corner Radius Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name RoundCornerHeight. Corner Radius Y RoundCornerHeight Set the corner radius for a rounded rectangle.97 Clear on Invalid Input Set the field entry in the input field to be deleted automatically when there is ClearOnError an invalid input. The Configured Languages attribute cannot be made dynamic.

Digits to the Left of the Decimal Point LeftComma Set the number of digits to the left of the decimal point (0 to 20). I/0 field. The Cursor Control attribute can be made dynamic with the name CursorControl. and others) can be filled. Cursor Control CursorControl Set an alpha cursor to jump to the next box in the tab sequence after exiting the current box. The Dynamic Filling attribute can be made dynamic with the name Filling. The Data Format attribute cannot be made dynamic. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-47 .08. The Digits to the Right of the Decimal Point attribute can be made dynamic with the name RightComma. Use the "Cursor Mode" attribute to determine whether a tab order or an alpha cursor sequence should be active. The Date of Last Change attribute cannot be made dynamic. Date of Last Change LastChange Set the last valid change date of the picture object. rounded rectangle. The Cursor Mode attribute cannot be made dynamic. Data Format DataFormat Set the data type (binary. The Display attribute can be made dynamic with the name Visible.97 Graphics Designer Current Value Y ActualPointTop Set the current vertical position of the corner point for polygon and polyline object types in relation to the origin of the picture. The Digits to the Left of the Decimal Point attribute can be made dynamic with the name LeftComma. ellipse. pie segment. Cursor Mode CursorMode Set the type of cursor (tab order or alpha cursor). Display Visible This attribute determines whether the object is visible or invisible. The corner is set by the index. polygon. circle. Dynamic Filling Filling Determine whether an object with a solid border (rectangle. or string) of the contents of the box. hexadecimal. text. Changing this setting also affects the "Position Y" and "Height" attributes. The Current Value Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name ActualPointTop. ellipse segment. decimal. Digits to the Right of the Decimal Point RightComma Set the number of digits to the right of the decimal point (0 to 20).

Graphics Designer 08. text. starting with 12 o’clock. Flash Picture FlashPicture Set the flash picture for the status display. ellipse. the entire object or only the object reference is stored. or combined I/O field). rounded rectangle. The End Angle attribute can be made dynamic with the name EndAngle. 4-48 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . I/O field. The Flash Picture attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Fill Pattern attribute can be made dynamic with the name FillStyle. The Fill Level attribute can be made dynamic with the name FillingIndex. Depending on the "Flash Picture Referenced" attribute. output. Fill Level FillingIndex Set the percentage value (relative to the height of the object) to which an object with a solid border (rectangle. polygon. Fill Pattern Color FillColor Set the fill pattern color of the object. Field Type BoxType Set the field type (input. Extended Operation ExtendedOperation Allow the slider to be set to a new appropriate limit value (minimum value/maximum value) by clicking on the area outside of the current slider setting. The Fill Pattern Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name FillColor. Exponent Display Exponent Specify whether the number display should be with exponents. The "Fill Color" is set under the "Colors" topic. The Exponent Display attribute can be made dynamic with the name Exponent. The Extended Operation attribute can be made dynamic with the name ExtendedOperation. You can select a fill pattern from the style palette or the selection dialog box. Fill Pattern FillStyle Set the fill pattern of the object. The input is clockwise in degrees. and others) can be filled.97 End Angle EndAngle Set the ending point for the segment and arc object types. The corresponding status is selected by means of the "Current Status" attribute. circle. The Field Type attribute can be made dynamic with the name BoxType.

The Flash Picture Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic.bmp. memory. and more).08. Active The Flashing Background Active attribute can be made dynamic with the FlashBackColor name FlashBackColor. The attribute is analyzed only if the "Flash Picture Transparent Color On" attribute is activated. 4-49 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . the frequency is systemand hardware-dependent (number of objects. Flashing Border Active FlashBorderColor Activate the border flashing.dib). Color Off The Flashing Background Color Off attribute can be made dynamic with the BackFlashColorOff name BackFlashColorOff.bmp. The Flash Picture Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashRateFlashPic. processor. Color On The Flashing Background Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the BackFlashColorOn name BackFlashColorOn. Since flashing is implemented by means of software. and fast (approximately 8 Hz). update cycle. You can set the frequency to slow (approximately 0. The Flashing Border Active attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashBorderColor.dib) should be set to "transparent". Flash Picture Referenced FlashPicReferenced Determine whether the assigned picture is stored in the status display object or only the corresponding object reference is stored. Flash Picture Use this attribute to specify whether the "Transparent Color" function should Transparent Color On be used. The Flash Picture Transparent Color can be made dynamic with the name FlashPicTransColor.5 Hz). Flashing Background Set the background color when flashing is switched on. FlashPicUseTransColor The Flash Picture Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashPicUseTransColor. Flashing Background Set the background color when flashing is switched off. Flash Picture Transparent Color FlashPicTransColor Determine which color of the assigned bitmap object (. This function is only available for bitmap objects (. .97 Graphics Designer Flash Picture Flash Frequency FlashRateFlashPic Set the flash frequency for the flashing picture. medium (approximately 2 Hz). . Flashing Background Activate the background flashing.

Flashing Text Color Off ForeFlashColorOff Set the text color when flashing is switched off. All of the fonts installed in Windows are available to you for this selection. 4-50 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . The Flashing Text Color Off attribute can be made dynamic with the name ForeFlashColorOff. Color On The Flashing Line Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderFlashColorOn BorderFlashColorOn. The Flashing Line Active attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashBorderColor. Flashing Flash Picture Activate the flashing of the flash picture. Color Off The Flashing Line Color Off attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderFlashColorOff BorderFlashColorOff. Flashing Line Set the color for the line when flashing is switched on. Flashing Text Active FlashForeColor Activate the text flashing.Graphics Designer 08. The Flashing Text Active attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashForeColor. Active The Flashing Flash Picture Active attribute can be made dynamic with the FlashFlashPicture name FlashFlashPicture. Flashing Text Color On ForeFlashColorOn Set the text color when flashing is switched on. Color Off The Flashing Border Color Off attribute can be made dynamic with the BorderFlashColorOff name BorderFlashColorOff. The Font attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontName. Flashing Line Active FlashBorderColor Activate the line flashing. Font FontName Set the type style of the text in the object.97 Flashing Border Set the color for the border when flashing is switched off. Color On The Flashing Border Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the BorderFlashColorOn name BorderFlashColorOn. Flashing Line Set the color for the line when flashing is switched off. The Flashing Text Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name ForeFlashColorOn. Flashing Border Set the color of the border when flashing is switched on.

The Font Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ForeColor. If the windows would overlap. Grid On Grid Set whether the grid is displayed in the picture for the configuration phase.). The grid is only displayed during the configuration phase. This attribute is only relevant for input fields and for combined I/O fields.97 Graphics Designer Font Color ForeColor Set the color of the text in the object. Font Size FontSize Set the font size for the text in the object. Hidden Input HiddenInput Hide the input value during input. The Grid Color attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Hidden Input attribute can be made dynamic with the name HiddenInput. The grid is only displayed during the configuration phase. The Grid Height attribute cannot be made dynamic. they should not be open at the same time. these are to be arranged so that they do not overlap each other. An asterisk (*) is displayed for each character. Foreground OnTop Set whether the window should always be in the foreground. and you can enter any given value. Height Height Set the height of the object in pixels. The grid is only displayed during the configuration phase. Grid Color GridColor Set the grid color for the configuration phase. The grid is only displayed during the configuration phase. The Grid On attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Grid Width attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Foreground attribute cannot be made dynamic. Grid Width GridWidth Set the grid width (in pixels) in the picture for the configuration phase. The Height attribute can be made dynamic with the name Height.08. The Font Size attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontSize. When there are multiple windows in the foreground. Grid Height GridHeight Set the grid height (in pixels) in the picture for the configuration phase. The input is in point size (pt. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-51 .

If the value to be displayed is higher than the high limit value. High Limit Value LimitMax Set the high limit value for I/O fields as an absolute value dependent on the data format. Hysteresis Hysteresis Set whether the display should occur with hysteresis. The calculation is carried out only when the hysteresis has been enabled with the "Hysteresis" attribute. 4-52 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . High Limit Color ColorTop Set the color for the top/left slider position. The High Limit Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BackColorTop. The High Limit Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitMax. Hot Key Hotkey Set the key or keystroke combination for a mouse operation in a button. showing that it cannot be displayed. The Hot Key attribute cannot be made dynamic. Set the hysteresis value with the "Hysteresis Range" attribute. The High Limit Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorTop.97 High Limit Background Color BackColorTop Set the color for the top/left part of the slider. Hysteresis Range HysteresisRange Set the hysteresis as a percent of the display value. The Hysteresis Range attribute can be made dynamic with the name HysteresisRange. without having to carry out any further action. The Hysteresis attribute can be made dynamic with the name Hysteresis. Immediate Input EditAtOnce Set the ability to make an input immediately upon accessing the I/O field with the Tab key. it is identified with a sequence of ***. The Immediate Input attribute can be made dynamic with the name EditAtOnce.Graphics Designer 08.

The Italic attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontItalic. every third.97 Graphics Designer Index Index Polygon and Polyline: Enter the number of the corner whose current X or Y value you want to define relative to the origin of the picture. every other one. The Layer attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Language Switch attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Latch Down attribute can be made dynamic with the name Toggle. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-53 . Within the layer. Length of Axis Section Set the length (in pixels) of the axis sections ("Long Strokes" attribute). The Index attribute can be made dynamic with the name Index.). Language Switch LanguageSwitch Determine if the text list objects should be configured in multiple languages or not. Italic FontItalic Set the text attribute Italic for the text in the object. The Label Each attribute cannot be made dynamic. LongStrokesSize The Length of Axis Section attribute can be made dynamic with the name LongStrokesSize. You can also change the location of the elements using the Arrange . When configuring pictures. The Index attribute can be made dynamic with the name Index. Objects in layer 0 are completely in the background and objects in layer 15 are completely in the foreground. etc. you can remove layers and thus make those objects visible which are located in a deeper layer and are hidden by objects in a higher layer.Within a Layer menu item. Check Box and Option Group: Input the number (1 to 32) of the box whose text you want to define. Layer Layer Set the location of the object in the picture. There are 16 layers available (0 to 15).08. Label Each Determine which sections of the scale representation should be labeled (each LongStrokesTextEach one. Latch Down Toggle Ensure that the "pressed" and "not pressed" switch settings for round button object types can be latched down. the objects which were configured first are in the background.

The Limit Marker attribute can be made dynamic with the name Marker. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. Limit RL4 LimitLow4 Set the low limit value for "reserve 4." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Reserve 4 Low Type" attribute.Graphics Designer 08. The Limit RH5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitHigh5." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Alarm High Type" attribute. The Limit RL4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitLow4. Limit RH4 LimitHigh4 Set the high limit value for "reserve 4. The Limit AH attribute can be made dynamic with the name AlarmHigh." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Reserve 4 High Type" attribute." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Alarm Low Type" attribute. 4-54 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . The Limit RH4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitHigh4. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The Limit AL attribute can be made dynamic with the name AlarmLow. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active.97 Limit AH AlarmHigh Set the limit value for "alarm high. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. Limit AL AlarmLow Set the limit value for "alarm low. Limit Marker Marker Determine whether the limit value should be displayed as a scale value in the bar representation. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. Limit RH5 LimitHigh5 Set the high limit for "reserve 5." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Reserve 5 High Type" attribute.

" Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Tolerance High Type" attribute.97 Graphics Designer Limit RL5 LimitLow5 Set the low limit value for "reserve 5." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Reserve 5 Low Type" attribute. Line Background Color BorderBackColor Set the background color of the line of the object. The Limit TL attribute can be made dynamic with the name ToleranceLow. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-55 . The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The Limit RL5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitLow5.08. Limit TL ToleranceLow Set the limit value for "tolerance low. The Limit TH attribute can be made dynamic with the name ToleranceHigh. The background color is only visible when the line is not solid ("Line Style" attribute)." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Tolerance Low Type" attribute. The Limit WL attribute can be made dynamic with the name WarningLow. Limit WH WarningHigh Set the limit value for "warning high." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Warning High Type" attribute. Limit WL WarningLow Set the limit for "warning low. The Limit WH attribute can be made dynamic with the name WarningHigh. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The Line Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderBackColor." Determine the type of analysis (percentage or absolute) with the "Warning Low Type" attribute. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. Limit TH ToleranceHigh Set the limit value for "tolerance high. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active.

If you select the line styles "dash. The Low Limit Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BackColorBottom. Line Weight BorderWidth Set the weight of the line of the object. the frequency is systemand hardware-dependent (number of objects. The Line Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderColor. and fast (approximately 8 Hz). and more). Line Style BorderStyle Set the line style of the object. update cycle.5 Hz).) for the object. Flash Frequency You can set the frequency to slow (approximately 0. 4-56 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Low Limit Background Color BackColorBottom Set the color for the bottom/right part of the slider. binary. or bit). memory." a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected line weight. The Long Axis Sections attribute can be made dynamic with the name LongStrokesBold. medium FlashRateBorderColor (approximately 2 Hz). processor.Graphics Designer 08. etc. Line Set the flash frequency for the line. angled arrow. The Line End Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderEndStyle." "dot." or "dash dot dot." a weight of 1 pixel is displayed independent of the selected line weight." "dot." "dash dot. start arrow. List Type ListType Set the type of text list (decimal." "dash dot." or "dash dot dot. The Line Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderWidth.97 Line Color BorderColor Set the color of the line of the object. The Line Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashRateBorderColor. The Line Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name BorderStyle. If you select the line styles "dash. The List Type attribute cannot be made dynamic. Line End Style BorderEndStyle Select the line end style (rounded. Long Axis Sections LongStrokesBold Set whether the long axis sections in the scale representation should be displayed as bold or normal. Since flashing is implemented by means of software.

Minimum Value Min Set the absolute value for the smallest value view. The Monitoring RH4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckLimitHigh4. it is identified with a sequence of ***. and "Type AH"). the representation upon reaching the limit value. and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit AL". "Bar Color RH4". The Low Limit Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ColorBottom. The limit value. the representation upon reaching the limit value. Low Limit Value LimitMin Set the low limit value for I/O fields as an absolute value dependent on the data format. If the value to be displayed is lower than the low limit value. The Monitoring AH attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckAlarmHigh. Monitoring AH CheckAlarmHigh Determine whether the limit value for "alarm high" should be monitored. and "Type RH4"). The Minimum Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name Min. The Monitoring AL attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckAlarmLow. Maximum Value Max Set the absolute value for a full value view. If the scale view is active. this value is displayed. The Low Limit Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name LimitMin. "Bar Color AH".08.97 Graphics Designer Low Limit Color ColorBottom Set the color for the bottom/right slider position. and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit RH4". showing that it cannot be displayed. If the scale view is active. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-57 . Monitoring RH4 CheckLimitHigh4 Determine whether the high limit value for "reserve 4" should be monitored. this value is displayed. the representation upon reaching the limit value. and "Type AL"). The limit value. Monitoring AL CheckAlarmLow Determine whether the limit value for "alarm low" should be monitored. The limit value. and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit AH". The Maximum Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name Max. "Bar Color AL".

"Bar Color RH5". Monitoring TH Determine whether the limit value for "tolerance high" should be monitored. "Bar Color TH". and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit TH". the representation upon reaching the limit value. and "Type TL"). The Monitoring TL attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckToleranceLow. "Bar Color TL". and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes (("Limit RL5". and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit WH". and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit RL4". The Monitoring TH attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckToleranceHigh. The limit value. The limit value. and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit TL". Monitoring WH CheckWarningHigh Determine whether the limit value for "warning high" should be monitored. CheckToleranceLow The limit value. The limit value. the representation upon reaching the limit value. 4-58 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Monitoring RL4 CheckLimitLow4 Determine whether the low limit value for "reserve 4" should be monitored. and "Type RL5").Graphics Designer 08. The Monitoring RL5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckLimitLow5. the representation upon reaching the limit value. and "Type RH5"). the representation upon reaching the limit value. and "Type RL4"). "Bar Color RL5". The Monitoring RH5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckLimitHigh5. the representation upon reaching the limit value. Monitoring TL Determine whether the limit value for "tolerance low" should be monitored. Monitoring RL5 CheckLimitLow5 Determine whether the low limit value for "reserve 5" should be monitored. and "Type TH").97 Monitoring RH5 CheckLimitHigh5 Determine whether the high limit value for "reserve 5" should be monitored. and "Type WH"). "Bar Color WH". "Bar Color RL4". CheckToleranceHigh The limit value. The limit value. and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit RH5". the representation upon reaching the limit value. The Monitoring RL4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckLimitLow4. The Monitoring WH attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckWarningHigh.

"Bar Color WL". The limit value. "/". Number of Boxes BoxCount Determine how many boxes are available for multiple or single selection in the Windows objects check box and option group. If the amount of configured text is larger than this value. The Operation Steps attribute can be made dynamic with the name SmallChange. the selection list receives a vertical scroll bar. Operation Steps SmallChange Set the number of steps the slider can be moved with a mouse click. The object name is unique within a picture.". The Number of Visible Lines attribute can be made dynamic with the name NumberLines. The Number of Corners attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Number of Boxes attribute can be made dynamic with the name BoxCount. The Monitoring WL attribute can be made dynamic with the name CheckWarningLow. Number of Visible Lines NumberLines Set the number of lines the selection list of a text list object should contain.08. Only Long Axis Sections LongStrokesOnly Set whether the long axis sections alone or both sections should be displayed in the scale representation. and the type of analysis are set in three supplemental attributes ("Limit WL". WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-59 . The Only Long Axis Sections attribute can be made dynamic with the name LongStrokesOnly. the object is addressed using this unique name. The Moveable attribute cannot be made dynamic. The object name cannot contain any of the following characters: "\". During script configuration or WinCC-API calls. Leading and trailing blank spaces are deleted by the system.97 Graphics Designer Monitoring WL CheckWarningLow Determine whether the limit value for "warning low" should be monitored. Number of Corners PointCount Set the number of corners for the polygon and polyline object types. Object Name ObjectName Set the name of the object. The Object Name attribute cannot be made dynamic. the representation upon reaching the limit value. Moveable Moveable Determine whether a window can be moved. ":" and ". and "Type WL").

a dialog box appears when there is operator activity in an object. Password PasswordLevel Set the authorization level for controlling this object (no input = no triggering of actions). Operator Input Message OperationMessage Determine whether a message should be output when an operation is successfully carried out. In order for you to actually be able to control the object.Graphics Designer 08. there are no user limits set.97 Operator Activities Report OperationReport This attribute determines whether the reason for operator activity needs to be reported. The Output Format attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Operator-Control Enable attribute can be made dynamic with the name Operation. The Output Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name OutputValue. The Operator Activities Report attribute can be made dynamic with the name OperationReport. The user can input the reason for the activity as text in the dialog box. Operator-Control Enable Operation Specify whether the object can be controlled. You can set an authorization level (password) for each controllable object. 4-60 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . This value is used in RUNTIME mode when the corresponding tag is not connected or not updated when the picture starts. for example. If 0 is entered as the value for the Password Attribute. When you select the Yes option. The Operator Input Message attribute can be made dynamic with the name OperationMessage. The operator activity is then sent to the diagnostics system and archived by it. The operator activity is then sent to the diagnostics system. Output Value OutputValue Set the defaults for the value to be displayed. The Password attribute can be made dynamic with the name PasswordLevel. you must also have authorization ("Password" attribute) to control the object. Output Format OutputFormat Set the way in which the output value is represented. The operator-control authorizations for each user are stored in a user-specific system entry. The representation is dependent on the data format. That system determines whether a message system is available which could issue a message in a message line.

The Picture Name attribute can be made dynamic with the name PictureName. . Picture Name PictureName Set the name of the picture to be displayed. The default value is 600. Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Picture Deact." PicDeactTransparent The attribute is analyzed only if the "Picture Deact. The Picture Off Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Picture Off Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name PicUpTransparent. Referenced PicDeactReferenced Determine whether the picture assigned to the Deactivated state is stored in the object or only the corresponding object reference is stored. You can shift the picture using the slider.bmp.dib) should be Transparent Color set to "transparent.bmp. Picture Off Transparent Color PicUpTransparent Determine which color of the assigned bitmap object (. The Picture Height attribute can be made dynamic with the name Height. the entire object or the object reference is saved.bmp. Use this attribute to specify whether the "Transparent Color" function should Transparent Color On be used. PicDeactUseTransColor The Picture Deact. The Picture attribute can be made dynamic with the name PictureName. The Picture Deact. The attribute is analyzed only if the "Picture Off Transparent Color On" attribute is activated. . Picture Off Referenced PicUpReferenced Determine whether the picture assigned to the Off state is stored in the object or only the corresponding object reference is stored. Transparent Color On" attribute is activated. This function is only available for bitmap objects (.08. Picture Deact. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-61 . Depending on the "Picture Referenced" attribute. Picture Deact. Picture Deact.dib). Picture Height Height Set the picture height in pixels. Determine which color of the assigned bitmap object (. Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name PicDeactTransparent.97 Graphics Designer Picture PictureName Set the picture (external format) to be displayed in the graphics object. Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name PicDeactUseTransColor. .dib) should be set to "transparent". The input can be larger than the maximum resolution of the screen.

Picture Status Deactivated PictureDeactivated Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed on a button for the deactivated state. .Graphics Designer 08. PicDownUseTransColor The Picture On Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name PicDownUseTransColor. . PicDownTransparent The attribute is analyzed only if the "Picture On Transparent Color On" attribute is activated.bmp.bmp. PicUpUseTransColor The Picture Off Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name PicUpUseTransColor. The Picture On Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic. Picture On Use this attribute to specify whether the "Transparent Color" function should Transparent Color On be used. 4-62 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Picture Referenced PicReferenced Determine whether the assigned picture is stored in the object or only the corresponding object reference is stored. The Picture Status Deactivated attribute can be made dynamic with the name PictureDeactivated. Picture Offset Y OffsetTop Set the vertical distance of the picture from the top edge of the window.97 Picture Off Use this attribute to specify whether the "Transparent Color" function should Transparent Color On be used. This function is only available for bitmap objects (. . Picture On Determine which color of the assigned bitmap object (. The Picture On Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name PicDownTransparent. The Picture Offset X attribute can be made dynamic with the name OffsetLeft. The Picture Offset Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name OffsetTop.dib).dib).dib) should be Transparent Color set to "transparent". Picture Offset X OffsetLeft Set the horizontal distance of the picture from the left edge of the window. The Picture Referenced attribute cannot be made dynamic.bmp. Picture On Referenced PicDownReferenced Determine whether the picture assigned to the On state is stored in the object or only the corresponding object reference is stored. This function is only available for bitmap objects (.

97 Graphics Designer Picture Status Off PictureUp Button: Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed on a button for the off state (button not depressed). . This function is only available for bitmap objects (. The default value is 800. The input can be larger than the maximum resolution of the screen.dib). The Picture Transparent Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name PicTransColor.bmp. . Picture Use this attribute to specify whether the "Transparent Color" function should Transparent Color On be used. The Picture Status Off attribute cannot be made dynamic. The attribute is analyzed only if the "Picture Transparent Color On" attribute is activated. Picture Transparent Color PicTransColor Determine which color of the assigned bitmap object (. The Picture Status Off attribute can be made dynamic with the name PictureUp. The Picture Status On attribute can be made dynamic with the name PictureDown. PicUseTransColor The Picture Transparent Color On attribute can be made dynamic with the name PicUseTransColor. Round Button: Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed for a round button for the on state (button not depressed).dib) should be set to "transparent".bmp. Picture Status On PictureDown Button: Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed on a button for the on state (button depressed). Picture Width Width Set the picture width in pixels.08. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-63 . You can shift the picture using the slider. Round Button: Set the image (bitmap) that is displayed for a round button for the off state (button not depressed). The Picture Width attribute can be made dynamic with the name Width. The Picture Status On attribute cannot be made dynamic. Position X Left Set (in pixels) the horizontal distance of the starting point of the object (left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding the object) from the starting point of the picture (left upper corner of the picture).

Radius Radius Set the radius in pixels (0 to 999) for circular objects. and polyline object ReferenceRotationLeft types are rotated. Rotation Reference Y Set the reference point around which the line. polygon. starting with the left edge of the rectangle surrounding the object. The Radius X attribute can be made dynamic with the name RadiusWidth. The Radius Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name RadiusHeight. Radius X RadiusWidth Set the horizontal radius in pixels (0 to 999) for elliptical objects. polygon. 4-64 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . The starting point (zero) is the configured start position. This value is used in RUNTIME mode if the appropriate tag is not linked or not updated when the picture starts. The Position Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name Top. Rotation Angle RotationAngle Set the clockwise rotation angle (in degrees) of the object around the rotation point. Radius Y RadiusHeight Set the vertical radius in pixels (0 to 999) for elliptical objects. The Radius attribute can be made dynamic with the name Radius. The Process Driver Connection attribute can be made dynamic with the name Process. Rotation Reference X Set the reference point around which the line. and polyline object ReferenceRotationTop types are rotated. The Rotation Reference Y attribute can be made dynamic with the name ReferenceRotationTop. starting with the top edge of the rectangle surrounding the object. The input is relative to the object height. The input is relative to the width of the object.Graphics Designer 08. The Rotation Reference X attribute can be made dynamic with the name ReferenceRotationLeft. Process Driver Connection Process Set the default for the value to be displayed. The Rotation Angle attribute can be made dynamic with the name RotationAngle.97 Position Y Top Set (in pixels) the vertical distance of the starting point of the object (left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding the object) from the starting point of the picture (left upper corner of the picture).

The Scale Marks attribute can be made dynamic with the name ScaleTicks. The Select Text Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name UnselTextColor. The Scaling Factor attribute can be made dynamic with the name Zoom. Scale Color ScaleColor Set the color of the scale. Boxes which are not available are indicated by 0.97 Graphics Designer Scale Scaling Set whether an additional scale should be used to represent the values within the bar representation. Use the "Bar Scaling" attribute to set the type of scale. This attribute is only in effect when the scale is active. Scaling Factor Zoom Set the zoom factor for the window view. Selected Box Process This attribute informs the system which box the user selected with a single selection (option group). The selected box is indicated by a set bit (1). The Scroll Bars attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Scale Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ScaleColor. The input is then discarded in this case. The input is a percentage of the entire bar height. Select Background Color UnselBGColor Set the color of the background for the unselected entries in the browser list for "Text List" objects. The Select Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name UnselBGColor. Scroll Bars ScrollBars Determine whether scroll bars are available in the window when needed. Select Text Color UnselTextColor Set the color of the text for the unselected entries in the browser list for "Text List" objects. each box is represented by a bit (box 1 corresponds to the bit value of 0). The Scale attribute can be made dynamic with the name Scaling. an error has occurred. In a 32-bit value. If more than 1 bit is set.08. Scale Marks ScaleTicks Set the scale divisions within the bar. The Selected Box attribute can be made dynamic with the name Process. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-65 .

Sizeable Sizeable 4-66 Determine whether the window size can be changed. Separation Line Set the background color of the separation lines in the browser list for "Text Background Color List" objects. In a 32-bit value. The Sizeable attribute cannot be made dynamic. The Separation Line Weight attribute can be made dynamic with the name ItemBorderWidth. ItemBorderBackColor The Separation Line Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ItemBorderBackColor. Selection Text Color SelTextColor Set the color of the text in the selected entry of the browser list for "Text List" objects. Boxes which are not available are indicated by 0. ItemBorderStyle The Separation Line Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name ItemBorderStyle. ItemBorderColor The Separation Line Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name ItemBorderColor. Separation Line Style Set the style of the separation lines in the browser list for "Text List" objects. Separation Line Weight ItemBorderWidth Set the separation line weight in the browser list for "Text List" objects. The Selected Boxes attribute can be made dynamic with the name Process.97 Selected Boxes Process This attribute informs the system which boxes the user selected with multiple selection (check box). SelBGColor The Selection Background Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name SelBGColor. Selection Background Set the color of the background in the selected entry of the browser list for Color "Text List" objects. Server Name ServerName Displays the name under which the embedded object (OLE control or OLE object) is registered in Windows. each box is represented by a bit (box 1 corresponds to the bit value of 0). The selected box is indicated by a set bit (1). The Server Name attribute cannot be made dynamic. Separation Line Color Set the color of the separation lines in the browser list for "Text List" objects. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08. The Selection Text Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name SelTextColor.

not the entire object. the object property "Index" determines. process data acquisition. Title Caption In the case of window objects. they are also displayed in the "Object Properties" window (for example. Switch Setting Pressed Template Template Indicate the status of the round button ("pressed" or "not pressed"). memory. You can set the frequency to slow (approximately 0. etc. The Template attribute cannot be made dynamic.5 Hz). and more). The text properties are set with other attributes. For check. determine whether the window has a title bar. Since flashing is implemented by means of software. The Text Orientation attribute can be made dynamic with the name Orientation.) in the window. Text Flash Frequency FlashRateForeColor Set the flash frequency for the text. The Start Angle attribute can be made dynamic with the name StartAngle. The input is clockwise in degrees. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-67 . medium (approximately 2 Hz). The Switch Setting attribute can be made dynamic with the name Pressed. to which element the text change is referring. the frequency is systemand hardware-dependent (number of objects.08. processor. update cycle. This only changes the alignment of the text within the object. \r\n equals CR/LF). Text Text Set the text to be displayed in the object.97 Graphics Designer Start Angle StartAngle Set the beginning point for the segment and arc object types. The Text Flash Frequency attribute can be made dynamic with the name FlashRateForeColor. If the text entered contains control characters. The "Can Be Maximized" and "Can Be Closed" attributes are analyzed only when the "Title" attribute is active. starting with 12 o’clock.and radio-boxes. Text Orientation Orientation Set the direction of the text (horizontal/vertical). The Text attribute can be made dynamic with the name Text. Set the type of template according to the application (message system. and fast (approximately 8 Hz). The Title attribute cannot be made dynamic.

it points up or down.Graphics Designer 08. Trend Trend Set whether the trend should be displayed. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active.97 Tool Tip Text ToolTipText The attribute tool tip text determines the text that will be displayed in runtime as a "Tool Tip". Depending on the tendency of the measured value. The default is absolute. Type AH TypeAlarmHigh Determine whether the limit value for "alarm high" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. The default is absolute. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The trend view shows the directional trend of the measured value when there are small changes to that value. if the mouse pointer is positioned above the object. it points up or down. Trend Color TrendColor Set the color for the trend display. The Type RH5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeLimitHigh5. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. 4-68 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Type RH4 TypeLimitHigh4 Determine whether the high limit value for "reserve 4" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. The Trend attribute can be made dynamic with the name Trend. The Type AL attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeAlarmLow. The default is absolute. The trend is represented with a small arrow beneath the bar. Depending on the tendency of the measured value. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The default is absolute. The Type AH attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeAlarmHigh. The Trend Color attribute can be made dynamic with the name TrendColor. The trend is represented by a small arrow beneath the bar. The attribute Tool Tip Text can be made dynamic with the name ToolTipText. The Type RH4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeLimitHigh4. Type RH5 TypeLimitHigh5 Determine whether the high limit value for "reserve 5" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. Type AL TypeAlarmLow Determine whether the limit value for "alarm low" should be provided as a percentage or absolute.

The limit value is monitored only when the value is active.97 Graphics Designer Type RL4 TypeLimitLow4 Determine whether the low limit value for "reserve 4" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The default is absolute. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-69 . The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The default is absolute. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active.08. The default is absolute. The Type TL attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeToleranceLow. TypeRL5 TypeLimitLow5 Determine whether the low limit value for "reserve 5" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. Type WL TypeWarningLow Determine whether the limit value for "warning low" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. Type TH TypeToleranceHigh Determine whether the limit value for "tolerance high" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. Type TL TypeToleranceLow Determine whether the limit value for "tolerance low" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. The Type RL4 attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeLimitLow4. Type WH TypeWarningHigh Determine whether the limit value for "warning high" should be provided as a percentage or absolute. The Type RL5 attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeLimitLow5. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. The limit value is monitored only when the value is active. Underline FontUnderline Set the text attribute Underline for the text in the object. The default is absolute. The default is absolute. The Type WL attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeWarningLow. The Type TH attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeToleranceHigh. The default is absolute. The Type WH attribute can be made dynamic with the name TypeWarningHigh. The Underline attribute can be made dynamic with the name FontUnderline.

attributes that do not correspond to the Windows style are ignored (for example. On the other hand. The Window Height attribute can be made dynamic with the name Height." The Zero Point attribute can be made dynamic with the name ZeroPoint. 4-70 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . The Y Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name AlignmentTop. The X Alignment attribute can be made dynamic with the name AlignmentLeft. Window Height Height Set the height of the window in pixels. The zero point can also be outside of the range represented. This attribute is only analyzed when the "Bar Scaling" attribute is set to "automatic. bottom). Window Width Width Set the width of the window in pixels. The input is a percentage of the entire bar height. The Windows Style attribute can be made dynamic with the name WindowsStyle. center. The Window Width attribute can be made dynamic with the name Width.Graphics Designer 08. Width Width Set the width of the object in pixels. etc. The Width attribute can be made dynamic with the name Width.) in the window. The Update Cycle attribute cannot be made dynamic. Y Alignment AlignmentTop Set the vertical alignment of the text (top. centered. setting a border weight of a non-gray background color deactivates the "Windows Style" attribute. The Window Contents attribute cannot be made dynamic.97 Update Cycle UpdateCycle Set the method and frequency for updating the object. When this attribute is active. process data acquisition. Window Contents Application Determine the type of application (message system. X Alignment AlignmentLeft Set the horizontal alignment (aligned left. Zero Point ZeroPoint Set the zero point of the bar for bar objects. Windows Style WindowsStyle Determine whether the object should correspond to the general Windows style (gray buttons without borders). "Border Weight"). aligned right) of the text.

set the location of the zero point with the "Zero Point" attribute. For bar object types. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-71 .08. The Zero Point Value attribute can be made dynamic with the name ZeroPointValue.97 Graphics Designer Zero Point Value ZeroPointValue Set the absolute value for the zero point.

A preceding "0" indicates that leading zeros are inserted where necessary (up to a maximum number of "1").97 4.3 Output formats for I/O-Fields Data Format Binary You may select the predefined output format "Binary" from the selection list. Example: You can define your own output format in the "Enter Format" input field.Graphics Designer 08. The following characters are allowed: Character "1" Definition Binary values "0" or "1" Each "1" stands for a character in the output value. 4-72 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

9e +1." Examples: Definition Sign provided Exponent representation Number between 0 and 9 Leading zero accompanies output Decimal point Value 1.0 s9. Example: You can define your own output format in the "Enter Format" input field.9 1.97 Graphics Designer Data Format Decimal You may select the predefined output format "Decimal" from the selection list.0 s9. The following characters are allowed: Character "s" "e" "9" "0" ".0e+000 09.08.00 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-73 .99 01.0 is to be displayed Output Format Display 9.9 +1.

8 Number 0 .. or a ... 7 Number 0 ... or number "0 . 9" Separator "/"..or uppercase letters Uppercase letters Sign ("+" or "-").. ???? any string with 4 characters) Lower... 9 Hexacharacter 0 ... 9" Lower. "..Graphics Designer 08.... f 4-74 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . "." or blank Number 0 . 4 Number 0 ..or uppercase letters or number "0 . F.. 5 Number 0 . 6 Number 0 ... 3 Number 0 .. ":".. The following characters are allowed: Character * ? a A b B d t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 h Definition Any string in any length Any string with a length of "Number ?" (for example. 9" Uppercase letters or number "0 . Example: You can define your own output format in the "Enter Format" input field. 1 Number 0 .. blank... 2 Number 0 ....9.".. A ..97 Data Format String You may select the predefined output format "String" from the selection list.. decimal point.

Example: You can define your own output format in the "Enter Format" input field. The following characters are allowed: Character "f" Definition Hexadecimal value "0" to "f" Each "f" stands for a character in the output value.08. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-75 .97 Graphics Designer Data Format Hexadecimal You may select the predefined output format "Hexadecimal" from the selection list. A preceding "0" indicates that leading zeros are inserted where necessary (up to a maximum number of "f").

Use the "Append" button to add a new list entry to the end of the list. If there is no text assigned to the value to be displayed. The "To Value" range type defines a value range that is open on the bottom and reaches to include the value you entered.97 4." and "From Value") are provided for the assignment in the "Decimal" list type . the text "***" is output in CONFIGURATION mode and in RUNTIME mode." "Single Value. the value range (relative to the value to be displayed) can be defined." and "Down" buttons to remove a list entry or shift it up or down within the sequence of the list.4 Assignments for Text Lists List Type Decimal Use the "Assignments" attribute to assign the values for the text list . 4-76 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Four range types ("To Value." "From-To Value. The "From Value" range is analogous to this and defines a value range that is open on the top.Graphics Designer 08. Depending on the range type that is set. Use the "Remove." "Up. Exactly one value can be assigned to a text for the "Single Value" range type. The "From-To Value" range type allows you to enter two values that define a value range (including the values you enter).

One text can be assigned to each bit number (relative to the value to be displayed) for the "Binary" list type." "Up. If there is no text configured for the bit number and if the corresponding bit is set as the only one in the output value.97 Graphics Designer List Type Binary Use the "Assignments" attribute to assign the values for the text list .08. Use the "Remove." and "Down" buttons to remove a list entry or shift it up or down within the sequence of the list. the text "***" is displayed in CONFIGURATION mode and in RUNTIME mode. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-77 . The bit number has a value range of 0 to 31. Use the "Append" button to add a new list entry to the end of the list.

97 List Type Bit Use the "Assignments" attribute to assign the value for the text list . One is for the case in which the bit that is observed has a value of 0. and one is for the case in which the bit has a value of 1. Exactly two texts can be configured for assignment to the "Bit" list type. Use the "Bit Number" attribute (value range 0 to 31) to specify which bit of the value to be displayed is observed. 4-78 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Graphics Designer 08.

4-20 Bar Background Color 4-41 Bar Color 4-41 Bar Color AH 4-41 Bar Color AL 4-41 Bar Color RH4 4-41 Bar Color RH5 4-41 Bar Color RL4 4-42 Bar Color RL5 4-42 Bar Color TH 4-42 Bar Color TL 4-42 Bar Color WH 4-42 Bar Color WL 4-42 Bar Direction 4-42 Bar Height 4-43 Bar Pattern 4-43 Bar Scaling 4-43 Bar Width 4-43 BasePicTransColor 4-43 BasePicUseTransColor 4-43 Basic Picture 4-43 Basic Picture Referenced 4-43 Basic Picture Transparent Color 4-43 Basic Picture Transparent Color On 4-43 BIT 3-8 Bit Number 4-44 Bit selection 3-9 BitNumber 4-44 Bold 4-44 Border 4-44 Border Background Color 4-44 Border Color 4-44 Border Flash Frequency 4-44 Border Style 4-44 Border Weight 4-45 BorderBackColor 4-44. 4-45 BackColor 4-40 BackColor2 4-41 BackColor3 4-41 BackColorBottom 4-56 BackColorTop 4-52 BackFlashColorOff 4-49 BackFlashColorOn 4-49 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 3-1. 4-14 Apply on Exit 4-40 Apply on Full 4-40 Assignments 4-40 AssumeOnExit 4-40 AssumeOnFull 4-40 Attribute name 3-25 Attributes 2-41. 4-55 BorderColor 4-44.97 Graphics Designer Index 3 3D Bar 2-7 3D Border Color 4-39 3D Border Weight 4-39 3D Shadow Color 4-39 Background Color 4-40 Background Flash Frequency 4-41 Bar 2-5. 3-14 Action configuration 3-1 ActualPointLeft 4-46 ActualPointTop 4-47 Adapt Border 4-39 Adapt Picture 4-39 Adapt Size 4-39 Addressing 3-33 Addressing method 3-33 AlarmHigh 4-54 AlarmLow 4-54 Alignment 4-40 Alignment palette 2-15 AlignmentLeft 4-70 AlignmentTop 4-70 Alpha Cursor 2-23 Application Window 2-4.08. 4-39 Average 4-40 Average Value 4-40 Axis Section 4-40 AxisSection 4-40 B BackBorderWidth 4-39. 4-56 BorderWidth 4-45. 4-27 Index-1 A Action 2-51. 4-56 BorderColorBottom 4-39 BorderColorTop 4-39 BorderEndStyle 4-56 BorderFlashColorOff 4-50 BorderFlashColorOn 4-50 BorderStyle 4-44. 4-56 Box Alignment 4-45 BoxAlignment 4-45 BoxCount 4-59 BoxType 4-48 Button 2-8. 3-2.

4-42 Display 4-47 Drawing an Object 2-9 Dynamic 2-41. 3-26. 3-27 Cycle time 3-8.Graphics Designer 08. 3-4. 3-32 Export file 3-31 Expression 3-5 Extended Operation 4-48 ExtendedOperation 4-48 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 3-9. 3-23 Edit window 3-31 EditAtOnce 4-52 Ellipse 2-4 Ellipse Arc 2-4. 2-49 Make dynamic 3-2. 4-29 CheckAlarmHigh 4-57 CheckAlarmLow 4-57 CheckLimitHigh4 4-57 CheckLimitHigh5 4-58 CheckLimitLow4 4-58 CheckLimitLow5 4-58 CheckToleranceHigh 4-58 CheckToleranceLow 4-58 CheckWarningHigh 4-58 CheckWarningLow 4-59 Circle 2-4. 3-21 C Function 3-22. 3-11. 3-26 Default cycle time 3-4. 3-30 Can Be Closed 4-45 Can Be Maximized 4-45 Change 3-1 Change Color 4-45 Changing the palette size 2-2 Check Box 2-8. 3-32 Dynamic dialog 2-49 Dynamic Filling 4-47 E Edit functions 3-22. 4-8 Ellipse Segment 2-4. 2-51. 3-21 Default entry 3-11. 3-11. 4-6 End Angle 4-48 EndAngle 4-48 Event 2-50.97 Button Color 4-45 ButtonColor 4-45 C C Action 2-49. 3-1. 3-26. 3-12. 3-7. 3-26 Default value 3-11. 3-21. 3-3. 4-5 Circular Arc 2-4. 3-35 Event category 3-35 Events 3-35 Exponent 4-48 Exponent Display 4-48 Export 2-20. 3-26. 2-52. 3-30. 4-9 Clear on Invalid Input 4-46 Clear on New Input 4-46 ClearOnError 4-46 ClearOnNew 4-46 Color palette 2-2 ColorAlarmHigh 4-41 ColorAlarmLow 4-41 ColorBottom 4-57 ColorChangeType 4-45 ColorLimitHigh4 4-41 ColorLimitHigh5 4-41 ColorLimitLow4 4-42 ColorLimitLow5 4-42 ColorToleranceHigh 4-42 ColorToleranceLow 4-42 ColorTop 4-52 ColorWarningHigh 4-42 ColorWarningLow 4-42 Configured Languages 4-46 Context sensitive help 2-1 Corner Radius X 4-46 Corner Radius Y 4-46 Ctrl+C 3-22 Ctrl+End 3-22 Ctrl+Home 3-22 Ctrl+V 3-22 Ctrl+X 3-22 Index-2 Current Status 4-46 Current Value X 4-46 Current Value Y 4-47 Cursor Control 4-47 Cursor Mode 4-47 CursorControl 4-47 Cycle 3-11. 3-12. 2-53 Direction 4-40. 3-33 Digits to the Left of the Decimal Point 4-47 Digits to the Right of the Decimal Point 4-47 Direct connection 2-51. 3-9 Date of Last Change 4-47 Default addressing 3-33 Default cycle 3-4. 3-2. 3-34 D Data Format 4-47 Data type 3-3. 3-28. 2-52. 3-8. 3-13. 3-27. 3-21. 3-31. 3-14.

3-32 Import file 3-32 Increment 3-7 Index 4-46. 4-56 FlashRateFlashPic 4-49 FlashRateForeColor 4-67 Font 4-50 Font Color 4-51 Font palette 2-37 Font Size 4-51 FontBold 4-44 FontItalic 4-53 FontName 4-50 FontSize 4-51 FontUnderline 4-69 ForeColor 4-51 ForeFlashColorOff 4-50 ForeFlashColorOn 4-50 Foreground 4-51 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 Formula 3-5 Function 3-5 Function name 3-5. 4-37 Group Display 2-7 Group object 2-22. 4-18 Immediate Input 4-52 Import 2-30. 4-23 Grid Color 4-51 Grid Height 4-51 Grid On 4-51 Grid Width 4-51 Group 2-22. 2-50 Italic 4-53 ItemBorderBackColor 4-66 ItemBorderColor 4-66 ItemBorderStyle 4-66 ItemBorderWidth 4-66 K Keystroke 3-1 Index-3 .08. 4-53 Indir 3-33 Indirect addressing 2-41. 4-61. 4-37 H Height 4-43. 3-22 Function value 3-30 G Graphic Object (External Format) 2-5. 4-70 Hidden Input 4-51 HiddenInput 4-51 High limit 3-7 High Limit Background Color 4-52 High Limit Color 4-52 High Limit Value 4-52 Home 3-22 Hot Key 4-52 Hysteresis 4-52 Hysteresis Range 4-52 HysteresisRange 4-52 I I/O Field 2-5.97 Graphics Designer F Feedback Documentation 2-20 Field Type 4-48 Fill Level 4-48 Fill Pattern 4-48 Fill Pattern Color 4-48 FillColor 4-48 Filling 4-47 FillingIndex 4-48 FillStyle 4-48 FillStyle2 4-43 Flash Picture 4-48 Flash Picture Flash Frequency 4-49 Flash Picture Referenced 4-49 Flash Picture Transparent Color 4-49 Flash Picture Transparent Color On 4-49 FlashBackColor 4-49 FlashBorderColor 4-49. 4-50 FlashFlashPicture 4-50 FlashForeColor 4-50 Flashing Background Active 4-49 Flashing Background Color Off 4-49 Flashing Background Color On 4-49 Flashing Border Active 4-49 Flashing Border Color Off 4-50 Flashing Border Color On 4-50 Flashing Flash Picture Active 4-50 Flashing Line Active 4-50 Flashing Line Color Off 4-50 Flashing Line Color On 4-50 Flashing Text Active 4-50 Flashing Text Color Off 4-50 Flashing Text Color On 4-50 FlashPicTransColor 4-49 FlashPicUseTransColor 4-49 FlashRateBackColor 4-41 FlashRateBorderColor 4-44. 4-51.

3-33 Light bulb 3-3 Light bulb icon 3-29 Lightning bolt 3-14. 3-35 Limit AH 4-54 Limit AL 4-54 Limit Marker 4-54 Limit RH4 4-54 Limit RH5 4-54 Limit RL4 4-54 Limit RL5 4-55 Limit TH 4-55 Limit TL 4-55 Limit WH 4-55 Limit WL 4-55 LimitHigh4 4-54 LimitHigh5 4-54 LimitLow4 4-54 LimitLow5 4-55 LimitMax 4-52 LimitMin 4-57 Line 2-4. 4-57 Monitoring AH 4-57 Monitoring AL 4-57 Monitoring RH4 4-57 Monitoring RH5 4-58 Monitoring RL4 4-58 Monitoring RL5 4-58 Monitoring TH 4-58 Monitoring TL 4-58 Monitoring WH 4-58 Monitoring WL 4-59 Mouse event 3-35 Moveable 4-59 Multiple selection 2-42. 3-31. 4-1 Line Background Color 4-55 Line Color 4-56 Line End Style 4-56 Line Flash Frequency 4-56 Line Style 4-56 Line Weight 4-56 List Type 4-56 List type "Binary" 4-77 List type "Bit" 4-78 List type "Decimal" 4-76 Long Axis Sections 4-56 LongStrokesBold 4-56 LongStrokesOnly 4-59 LongStrokesSize 4-53 Low Limit Background Color 4-56 Low Limit Color 4-57 Low Limit Value 4-57 M Marker 4-54 Max 4-57 Maximum Value 4-57 Menu bar 2-17 Menu commands 2-17 Min 4-57 Minimum value 3-7. 3-21. 3-14. 2-39 OffsetLeft 4-62 OffsetTop 4-62 OLE automation name 4-39 OLE Control 2-5. 3-21. 4-28 N Number of Boxes 4-59 Number of Corners 4-59 Number of Visible Lines 4-59 NumberLines 4-59 O Object 3-2 Object attribute 3-4. 4-16 OLE links 2-32 OLE Object 2-5.Graphics Designer 08. 2-48 Latch Down 4-53 Layer 2-29. 3-33 Object list 2-40 Object name 3-25. 3-32. 3-15. 4-59 Object palette 2-3 Object properties 2-10.97 L Label Each 4-53 Language Switch 4-53 Languages 2-30. 4-17 On-line help 2-1 Only Long Axis Sections 4-59 Operation 4-60 Operation Steps 4-59 OperationMessage 4-60 OperationReport 4-60 Operator 3-6 Operator Activities Report 4-60 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 Index-4 . 2-26. 4-53 Layer bar 2-38 LeftComma 4-47 Length of Axis Section 4-53 Library 2-26 Light bulb 3-3.

4-10 ReferenceRotationLeft 4-64 ReferenceRotationTop 4-64 Result of expression 3-3 Result tags 3-30 Return value 3-1. 4-61 Picture Browser 3-25 Picture cycle 3-11.97 Graphics Designer Operator Input Message 4-60 Operator-Control Enable 4-60 Operators 3-6 Option Group 2-8. 3-2 R Radius 4-64 Radius X 4-64 Radius Y 4-64 RadiusHeight 4-64 RadiusWidth 4-64 Range 3-23 Range high limit 3-15 Rectangle 2-4. 2-18. 3-23. 3-34 Picture Deact. 4-33 RoundCornerHeight 4-46 RoundCornerWidth 4-46 Rounded Rectangle 2-4. 3-29 RightComma 4-47 Rotation Angle 4-64 Rotation Reference X 4-64 Rotation Reference Y 4-64 RotationAngle 4-64 Round Button 2-8. 4-31 Orientation 4-67 Output Format 4-60 Output format "Binary" 4-72 Output format "Decimal" 4-73 Output format "Hexadecimal" 4-75 Output format "String" 4-74 Output Value 4-60 OutputValue 4-60 P Palette 2-27 Parameter Set parameters 3-23. 3-21.08. 4-7 Polygon 2-4. Transparent Color 4-61 Picture Deact. 4-15 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 PictureDeactivated 4-62 PictureDown 4-63 PictureName 4-61 PictureUp 4-63 PicUpTransparent 4-61 PicUpUseTransColor 4-62 PicUseTransColor 4-63 Pie Segment 2-4. 3-26 Pressed 4-67 Print Preview 2-19 Priority 3-10 Process 4-64. 2-23 Index-5 . 3-2. 4-2 Polyline 2-4. 4-66 Process Driver Connection 4-64 Process tag 3-30 Properties 3-25 Property 3-1. 3-24 Parameter assignment 3-5. 3-22. 3-24 Parameter parentheses 3-22 Parameters 3-5. 4-3 Position Y 4-64 Presetting 3-11. 4-61 Picture Off Referenced 4-61 Picture Off Transparent Color 4-61 Picture Off Transparent Color On 4-62 Picture Offset X 4-62 Picture Offset Y 4-62 Picture On Referenced 4-62 Picture On Transparent Color 4-62 Picture On Transparent Color On 4-62 Picture Referenced 4-62 Picture Status Deactivated 4-62 Picture Status Off 4-63 Picture Status On 4-63 Picture Transparent Color 4-63 Picture Transparent Color On 4-63 Picture Width 4-63 Picture Window 2-5. 4-65. 3-26. 3-24. Transparent Color On 4-61 Picture Height 4-61 Picture name 3-25. 3-25 Password 4-60 PasswordLevel 4-60 PicDeactTransparent 4-61 PicDeactUseTransColor 4-61 PicDownTransparent 4-62 PicDownUseTransColor 4-62 PicTransColor 4-63 Picture 4-38. Referenced 4-61 Picture Deact. 3-23. 4-11 Runtim mode 2-53 Run-Time Behavior 2-51 Runtime Mode 2-7.

3-9 Triggering events 2-51 Type AH 4-68 Type AL 4-68 Type RH4 4-68 Type RH5 4-68 Type RL4 4-69 Type RL5 4-69 Type TH 4-69 Type TL 4-69 Type WH 4-69 Type WL 4-69 TypeAlarmHigh 4-68 TypeAlarmLow 4-68 TypeLimitHigh4 4-68 TypeLimitHigh5 4-68 TypeLimitLow4 4-69 TypeLimitLow5 4-69 TypeToleranceHigh 4-69 TypeToleranceLow 4-69 TypeWarningHigh 4-69 TypeWarningLow 4-69 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 3-13. 4-35 SmallChange 4-59 Smart Objects 2-4 Split bar 3-23. 3-28. 3-30 Status Display 2-6. 3-31 Standard Objects 2-4 Standard toolbar 2-35 Start Angle 4-67 StartAngle 4-67 Static 2-41. 3-14. 3-23. 3-25. 3-26. 3-32. 3-26 Trigger tag 3-8. 4-12 Status 3-3. 3-26 Trigger name 3-11. 2-42 Static Text 2-4. 4-77. 3-10 Status bar 2-38. 4-78 Language Switch 2-6 Text Orientation 4-67 Tips & Tricks 2-1 Title 4-67 Toggle 4-53 ToleranceHigh 4-55 ToleranceLow 4-55 Tool Tip Text 4-68 Toolbar 2-27 ToolTipText 4-68 Top 4-64 Trend 4-68 Trend Color 4-68 TrendColor 4-68 Trigger 3-4. 3-13. 3-4. 4-25. 3-12. 3-29 Tag name 3-4.Graphics Designer 08. 2-50 Switch Setting 4-67 System load 3-1 T Tab "Default Objects" 2-33 Tab "Event" 2-50 Tab "Grid" 2-32 Tab "Options" 2-32 Tab "Properties" 2-40 Index-6 Tab "Visible Layers" 2-32 Tab Order 2-23 Tag 3-24 Tag dialog 2-49 Tag list 3-11. 3-27 Trigger event 3-11. 4-76. 3-28. 3-11. 4-24 Status evaluation 3-10 Status list 3-10 Style palette 2-12 Subject tree 2-40.97 S Scale 4-65 Scale Color 4-65 Scale Marks 4-65 ScaleColor 4-65 ScaleTicks 4-65 Scaling 4-65 Scaling Factor 4-65 ScalingType 4-43 Scroll Bars 4-65 SelBGColor 4-66 Select Background Color 4-65 Select Text Color 4-65 Selected Box 4-65 Selected Boxes 4-66 Selecting an Object 2-10 Selection Background Color 4-66 Selection Text Color 4-66 SelTextColor 4-66 Separation Line Background Color 4-66 Separation Line Color 4-66 Separation Line Style 4-66 Separation Line Weight 4-66 Server Name 4-66 Sizeable 4-66 Slider 2-8. 3-26. 3-14. 3-33 Tag status 3-10 Tag value 3-32 Template 4-67 Text 4-67 Text Flash Frequency 4-67 Text List 2-6.

3-26 User cycle 3-12. 3-34. 3-12.97 Graphics Designer U Underline 4-69 UnselBGColor 4-65 UnselTextColor 4-65 Update cycle 2-41. 3-13. 3-26 Window Height 4-70 Window Width 4-70 Windows Objects 2-8 Windows Style 4-70 WindowsStyle 4-70 X X Alignment 4-70 Y Y Alignment 4-70 Z Zero Point 4-70 Zero Point Value 4-71 ZeroPoint 4-70 ZeroPointValue 4-71 Zoom 4-65 Zoom palette 2-17 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 Index-7 . 3-34 V Valid range 3-8.08. 3-27. 3-27. 3-11. 4-70 Update event 3-4. 2-50. 3-28 Value range 3-3. 3-33. 3-9 Value assignment 3-10 Value change 3-1. 4-63. 3-5. 3-7. 4-70 Window Contents 4-70 Window cycle 3-11. 3-10 Visible 4-47 W WarningHigh 4-55 WarningLow 4-55 Width 4-43.

Graphics Designer 08.97 Index-8 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

WinCC Global Scripts Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 Edition August 1997 .

we cannot guarantee full agreement. including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design. SINEC.) (We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. transmission or use of this document or ist contents is not permitted without express written authority. However.WinCC. All rights. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. (The reproduction. STEP are Siemens registered trademarks. are reserved. All other product and system names in this manual are (registered) trademarks of their respective owners and must be treated accordingly. SIMATIC.) © Siemens AG 1994-1997 All rights reserved C79000-G8276-C107-01 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany Technical data subject to change Siemens Aktiengesellschaft . Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely. the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Offenders will be liable for damages.

.....................................................3............ 4....................................... 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-7 4-10 4-14 4-15 4-17 4-17 4-19 4-19 4-23 4-26 4-34 4-35 4-42 4-43 4-46 4-47 4-49 4-51 4-55 4-61 4-62 4-65 4-65 4-68 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 i ...........23 4....................................................... graphics-set-font Functions ........19 4.................. Options (Standard Functions)...............18 4...........................................................................................3........4..................................................................................4................. graphics-get-misc Functions.....22 4.....4...................................2 3............. 1-1 2-1 3-1 3-3 3-9 3-9 3-9 3-13 3-20 3-22 3-22 3-24 3-25 4 Internal Functions ..........................3 3...4 4.............. graphics-set-color Functions............ WINDOWS (Standard Functions) .4.............................. graphics ...................... graphics-get-fill Functions...............................................4....4.........5 3.8 Alarm (Standard Functions).................11 4.......................................................................3 4...2 4................10 4.....................4...................................................................................9 4..................1 3..............4....................................................2 3....4..1 4............ graphics-get-axes Functions............................................ Standard Functions........................................ graphics-set-axes Functions.................. graphics-get-flash Functions.........8 4.....................................................14 4.............. graphics-get-state Functions ............ graphics-get-property-Funktionen...4.................................................... GRAPHICS (Standard Functions)...................12 4.............. TEMPLATE.... graphics-set-fill Functions............ WINCC (Standard Functions).......................................... graphics-set-focus-Functions....1 4..................4...................................................................................................... graphics-get-style Functions..................................... graphics-get-link Functions.....................................................4..................................................................................................................4. allocate .16 4......................24 alarm (Internal Functions)........................................... TOOLBAR BUTTONS...................................... graphics-get-color Functions .......................................... graphics-get-pictures Functions.......17 4......................................4............7 4..... Split Screen Manager (Standard Functions) ................................................4.................................... graphics-get-limits Functions....6 4.............................Table of Contents / Global Scripts 1 2 3 Introduction ......4.............3 4..................... graphics-get-font Functions......................4 3....4.................................1 3.... 3..................... graphics-get-geometry Functions ............2 4.........5 4...............................................20 4.................................................... graphics-get-i_o Functions .....4....... graphics-set-flash Functions...............................4.........15 4......................4...............4.............. graphics-get-general Functions ... graphics-get-ole_control Functions............. Report (Standard Functions) ...................4.............................. Project Functions ............................7 3............................................... c_bib ..............13 4............................................................ graphics-set-geometry Functions.....4.................... graphics-get-focus-Functions ........................................................ TAGLOG (Standard Functions) ..................21 4......4....................4 4...........6 3......

......8 4........ Line Styles .............6 6.................................... graphics-set-state Functions....................................................... Tag .... graphics-set-pictures Functions.....4............................. 4-73 4-76 4-88 4-89 4-96 4-97 4-101 4-103 4-106 4-110 4-111 4-114 4-117 4-121 4-125 4-128 4-132 4-136 4-140 4-140 5 6 Actions ............................................................... graphics-set-property-Funktionen.1 graphics-set-i_o Functions........... Field Type.......97 4.. graphics-set-link Functions...............................................................5 4...................6 4..................................................... wincc system.......4................................4....................... tag-set-state-wait Functions .... tag-set-wait Functions ..........8 6...........................................................4......... Line End Styles ................................................... graphics-set-ole_control Functions...............................5 4. Flash Frequencies....................................6....................6 4...............................................................1 6............................... wincc........................7 6.................................... Bar Orientation...........................4..........................5.. tag-set-state Functions.................................................... Colors ................................3 4............................and Radio Boxes .........................31 4.9 6....5.................. Value Definitions of the Attributes ......................................... 5-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-5 ii WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .....................5....4..................32 4.....................5..........................4 4.........................25 4......................... Element Orientation in Check.........................29 4................................. graphics-set-misc Functions.........................................4..................................5...................................................30 4............... I/O-Field..... graphics-set-limits Functions ...........................................................28 4............2 4................................................. Text Orientation .........4........................................................Global Scripts 08. graphics-set-style Functions.......1 4..................................4...... tag-get-wait Functions............3 6.............................. tag-get-state Functions...................7 4........ tag-get-Functions .....................................................5....... 6........ tag-get-state-wait Functions ........10 Language Identifiers.. Tag-set Functions .........5 6........................................................4 6................................................... I/O-Field............. Data Type of the Field Content .....................27 4...................26 4.....5..................................................33 4..............................................................................5.............2 6..........................................................................................

siemens. and on CompuServe (go. you may call our Hotline at 011-49-911-895-7000 (Fax 7001). You can find the addresses in the attachment entitled Siemens Worldwide.aut.siemens. use a modem with up to V. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 iii .8 kBaud). the SIMATIC Customer Support provides current information and downloads that can be beneficial for the utilization of SIMATIC products: * from the Internet under http://www.autforum).de/support/html_00/index. Total Overview and Configuration Example The "Getting Started" manual.htm.aut. in "S7-300 Automation System Structure in an S7-300. Naturally. contains a total overview of WinCC and a configuration example in which the most significant functions of the individual components are followed through in a practical application.34 (28.shtml * via the SIMATIC Customer Support Mailbox under phone# +49 (911) 895-7100 * To address the mailbox. located in the businesses responsible for your location. 1.75. Additional Support If you have technical questions.de/ * via fax# 08765-93 02 77 95 00 In addition. 64 kBit). N. which is part of the WinCC package.de/coros/html_00/coros. which parameters must be set as follows: 8. please address them to your Siemens contact partner.08. the information is also available to you in the on-line help in either a context-sensitive fashion or in the on-line help contents. Information about SIMATIC products Up to date information about SIMATIC products can be obtained: * from the Internet under http://www.siemens. or dial up through ISDN (x. Inquiries can also be made via Internet mail or mail addressed to the above mailbox. The SIMATIC Customer Support can be reached by phone under the number +49 (911) 895-7000 and by fax under the number +49 (911) 895-7002.aut. You can find the information you need quickly by using the table of contents or the index. In addition. You can find additional information on the Internet under the address www." in catalogs.97 Global Scripts Preface Purpose of the Manual This manual introduces you to the functions of each software component and their operation in a reference manual format. ANSI.

Global Scripts 08.97 iv WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

4. you should plan for a higher system load. Standard Functions You can create new standard functions and change existing standard functions. see Control Center.h" #pragma code() WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 1-1 . Internal Functions You cannot create or change internal functions. Use the following command sequence for this purpose: #pragma code("<NAME>. The project functions are unique to the project in which they were created. and internal functions in the following areas: • In object-related C actions • In object-related actions that you create in the dynamic dialog Use them to make the following areas dynamic: Process value archives User archives Compressed archives At run time. standard functions. you must activate the project and start the run-time system. Section 2.dll") #include "<NAME>. Use project functions. see Control Center. When implementing numerous or extensive actions. Functionalities of available DLLs can be made available to functions and actions in WinCC. Actions You can create and change actions as global scripts.1. To start the run -time system.97 Global Scripts 1 Introduction Global Scripts is the general term for C functions and actions that can be used throughout a project or across projects depending on their type. The standard functions are recognized across projects. Before you do this. For activating the project. They are recognized across projects. Note: Actions are processed interpretively. It is therefore better to replace extensive actions with separate DLLs (Dynamic Link Libraries). These actions are unique to the project in which they were created.3.08. Section 6. you can implement global script actions in the process control . You can differentiate among the following types: Project Functions You can create new project functions and change existing project functions.

h” before the ‘#include "ap-pbib. insert “apdefap. while the prototype of the project function is transferred..).h”. { .. } The prototype of this function will be transferred to the file “ap_pbib.dll") #include "pldcsapi.. } #include "ap-pbib... { ..Global Scripts 08. { .97 Note: If you define your own structures in connection with project or standard functions.. the following construction will cause translation errors: struct MyOwnStruct.h"’ structure struct MyOwnStruct. To realize the transfer of such a structure or call back function. In the project function itself. } void MyFunction (struct MyOwnStruct.h" #prgma code() #include "ap_pbib.. proceed as follows: In the project catalog (projectpath\library).h” or “ap_glob.. write only the following #include "apdefap.h" 1-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . but the structure is missing from there.h" The structure of MyOwnStruct and the structure of the call back function will therefore be known to the object.h" Correspondingly also: #pragma code ("pdlcsapi..

h is loaded in the project folder . you must integrate the header file apdefap. Add function information 3. Create a project function by means of the Global Script editor.. If a project function is loaded and other default or project functions are used there. If necessary. The header file ap_plib. Formulate the function 2. You can also use them in other project functions and Global Script actions.08. You have now created your project function.h. You can use project functions to make graphic objects and archives dynamic.h contains the definitions of the project functions. if necessary. generate header files.h or ap_glob. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-1 . Use the following steps in creating a project function: 1. Save the function and. They are unique to the current project in which they were created. The file contains the header file from the project library ap_plib. rename it. the header file apdefap. Start the editor in the Control Center.h which contains the header file ap_glob.\<Projectname>\LIBRARY. 5.97 Global Scripts 2 Project Functions Project functions are C functions that you program and change yourself..h. Compile the function 4. The first time you create a project function.

Open the submenu by placing the cursor or clicking on "New" and select the "Function" submenu item.Global Scripts 08. This selection opens a window that already contains the outline of a C function. The "Global Script" box opens. standard function. or Use one of the buttons on the Toolbar. or action) in the function browser.97 • How to Formulate a Function: 1. Open the pop-up menu by clicking the right mouse button on the function type (project function. 2. The following edit functions are available: Function New line Delete character to the right Delete character to the left Jump to the beginning of the line Jump to the end of the line Jump to the beginning of the text Jump to the end of the text Move the cursor Cut selected text Copy selected text Paste text from the Clipboard Key Stroke Enter Delete Backspace Home End Ctrl+Home Ctrl+End Cursor keys Ctrl+X Ctrl+C Ctrl+V 2-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Start the Global Script editor in the Control Center. 3. Formulate your function.

" • Highlighted text is replaced by the next character you enter on the keyboard. Position the cursor or highlight the text you want to replace. 4. the submenu contains an entry for each one. If you need to. 3." menu item in the pop -up menu. If necessary. 5. This action opens the "Select a Tag" dialog in which you can select the desired tag. update the parameters of the function you pasted.97 Global Scripts Function Highlight text Highlight a word Move the insertion point Mouse With the left mouse button Double click with the left mouse button With the left mouse button Additional edit functions include the following: • The writing mode is "Insert. Select the appropriate editing window from the submenu listing. If you have multiple editing windows open. Hold down the Shift key and place the cursor at the end of the area you want to highlight.. In the function browser. Proceed as follows: 1. • Expanded highlighting: Highlight an area: Place the cursor at the beginning of the area you want to highlight.08. open the appropriate folder and click the right mouse button on the desired function to open the pop-up menu. 2. You can place fully programmed project functions.. Expand a highlighted selection: Hold down the Shift key and move the cursor to the end of the area you want to highlight. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-3 . Select the "Send to. Enter tag names by clicking on the button. standard functions. and internal functions within your function at the cursor location or you can replace selected text with such functions. open folders.

Enter a comment.Global Scripts 08. 5." "Month. Click the "OK" button to close the "Description" box. Click on the "Change" button and enter your password in the "Enter Password" box. You have now protected your function with a password. a brief description of the function. 1." "Year. for example. Date created. Retype your password to confirm it. and version are already entered. 3. Click on the "OK" button to close the box. If you want to assign a password to your function to protect it from changes. 2-4 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Click on the button to open the "Description" box. 4. The entries are applied. The date created and date changed formats are (left to right) "Day. date changed. in the "Comment" box. click on the "Password" button to activate the "Change" button. make the window that contains the desired function the active window. Enter or change the "Created by" and "Changed by" boxes." 2.97 • How to Add Information about a Function: If you have more than one editing window open.

The editing window stays open. proceed as follows: 1. The active editing window is divided into two areas. Generally.08. 2. This selection opens a box in which you can set the name and the storage location. Click on the "Close" box in the editing window. The editing window stays open. make the window that contains the desired function/action the active window. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 2-5 . Click on the button to begin compiling. If you want to save your function or action under its current name. or cancel the procedure. 3. You can then choose to save the function/action. This action opens a box that tells you that there are changes that have not been saved. otherwise it closes. Click on the button. If you want to save your function/action under another name select "Save As…" in the "File" menu. • How to Save the Function: If you create a new function or a new action. reject the changes.97 Global Scripts • How to Compile the Function/Action: If you have more than one editing window open. it receives a default name from the system. Select the "Save" command in the "File" menu. the storage area is set as follows: • For project functions: In the "Library" subfolder in the project folder • For actions: In the "Pas" subfolder in the project folder • For standard functions: In the WinCC system folder in the "Aplib" subfolder. the editing window stays open. If you cancel the procedure. The top portion contains your function/action and the bottom displays the messages from the compiler.

97 • How to Generate the New Header Files: If functions are programmed autonomously. This makes the functions available but unknown to the system. deleted functions are made unrecognizable to the system. The system can then recognize these new or changed functions. Use the button or select the "Generate header" menu item to regenerate the header files. 2-6 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . the new functions appear in the function browser of the Global Script Editor.Global Scripts 08. When the new header files are generated. In the same way. you can make them available to the project by copying them to the appropriate folders.

The header file apdefap. (see Section 2). (see Section 2). and Global Script actions.08. New standard functions are added to the available standard functions on the server computer in the WinCC installation folder under . If a new standard function is created and if other standard functions are used there. You have now created your standard function.h.h are located in the folder . (see Section 2).\APLIB. other standard functions. and rename it if necessary (see Section 2). you must integrate the header file apdefap .. The files apdefap.\APLIB. Compile the function. Start this editor in the Control Center. You can also use them in project functions.h that contains the definition of the standard functions... Create a standard function with the Global Script editor. Standard functions are recognized across projects.h or ap_glob. Expand the function information. You must follow these steps to create a standard function: • • • • • Formulate the function. If necessary.97 Global Scripts 3 Standard Functions The system makes standard functions available.h and ap_glob. Use standard functions to make graphic objects and archives dynamic. They are divided into the following categories: Alarm GRAPHICS TAGLOG WINCC WINDOWS WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-1 . In addition.h integrates the header file ap_glob . Save the function. The system provides standard functions. you can also create standard functions yourself. generate header files (see Section 2). These functions can be changed to adapt to your needs..

Global Scripts 08.97 Depending on the option package (for example. 3-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . are explained in more detail in the Simatic-WinCC-Manual "Tag Logging User Archives". These functions are divided into the following categories: Options Report Split Screen Manager userarc The standard functions contained in "userarc". Basic Process Control. Advanced Process Control). the system provides you with additional standard functions.

97 Global Scripts 3. This function displays the short-term archive (display short-term archive). Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnArcLong) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnArcLong) BOOL OnBtnArcShort(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnArcShort(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects.08. It provides the message data of the single messages and can only be activated if the "trigger action" parameter is set. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnArcShort) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnArcShort) WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-3 . • FALSE: = An error occured BOOL GMsgFunction(char* pszMsgData) Function: This function represents a global function for single messages. BOOL OnBtnArcLong(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnArcLong(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. Parameters: pszMsgData = Pointer to a buffer on which the message data are stored. This function displays the sequence archive (display sequence archive).1 Alarm (Standard Functions) The return value for these functions is the following error code: • TRUE: = The function was executed without errors.

This function displays the info text (Infotext). This function acknowledges the horn signal (horn acknowledgment). Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name 3-4 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Parameters pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnHornAckn) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnHornAckn) BOOL OnBtnInfo(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name BOOL OnBtnHornAckn(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnHornAckn(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects.97 BOOL OnBtnComment(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name BOOL OnBtnEmergAckn(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. This function opens the acknowledgment dialog (Emergency acknowledgment/reset). This function displays the comment (comment).Global Scripts 08.

This function activates the "Set Lock" dialog.0.08. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnLoop) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnLoop) BOOL OnBtnMsgFirst(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgFirst(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects.97 Global Scripts BOOL OnBtnLanguage(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. This function triggers the "Loop-In-Alarm" function of the selected message. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name BOOL OnBtnLoop(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnLoop(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. This function switches to the beginning of the message list (First list). Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name This function will not be supported anymore starting with WinCC V4. BOOL OnBtnLock(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. This function allows you to change the language of the message window operation (Language switch). Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgFirst) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnMsgFirst) WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-5 .

This function switches to the end of the message list (Last list).Global Scripts 08. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgLast) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnMsgLast) BOOL OnBtnMsgNext(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgNext(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. This function switches to the previous message in the message list (Previous message). Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgNext) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnMsgNext) BOOL OnBtnMsgPrev(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgPrev(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgPrev) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnMsgPrev) 3-6 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . This function switches to the next message in the message list (Next message).97 BOOL OnBtnMsgLast(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgLast(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects.

This function activates the horizontal and vertical scroll function (Auto scroll On/Off). This function activates reporting (Report function). Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnPrint ) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnPrint) BOOL OnBtnScroll(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnScroll(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. This function calls the process message window (Call process message window). Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnScroll) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnScroll) WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-7 . Note: The process message window contains the current messages that have not been acknowledged.97 Global Scripts BOOL OnBtnMsgWin(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnMsgWin(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnMsgWin) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnMsgWin) BOOL OnBtnPrint(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnPrint(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects.08.

Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name BOOL OnBtnSinglAckn(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnSinglAckn(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. This function executes the acknowledgment of a message (single acknowledgment). This function activates the "Set Selection" dialog. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnVisibleAckn) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnVisibleAckn) 3-8 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . This function executes the acknowledgment of all of the messages visible in the message window (group acknowledgment).97 BOOL OnBtnSelect(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects. Parameters: pszMsgWin = Pointer to the message window name (OnBtnSinglAckn) pszMsgWin = Pointer on the name of the OLE-Control-Element (AXC_OnBtnSinglAckn) BOOL OnBtnVisibleAckn(char* pszMsgWin) BOOL AXC_OnBtnVisibleAckn(char* pszMsgWin) Function: Implementation of external message window operation by means of graphic objects.Global Scripts 08.

2 GRAPHICS (Standard Functions) void OpenPicture(Picture Picture Name) Function: Opens the picture with the picture name you set.97 Global Scripts 3. Function: Gives the current position of the column pointer in a table window. Parameters: lpszTemplate = Pointer on the name of the table window WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-9 .08.3.1 TEMPLATE int TlgGetColumnPosition(char* lpszTemplate) Return Value: Current position of the column pointer in a table window. Parameters: Picture Name = Picture Name 3.3 TAGLOG (Standard Functions) TEMPLATE TOOLBAR BUTTONS The return value for the TOOLBAR BUTTONS functions is the following error code: • TRUE: The function was executed without errors. • FALSE: An error occured 3. The name of the table window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.

Function: Gives the number of columns in a table window. The name of the table window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate. The name of the table window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate. The name of the trend window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate. Parameters: lpszTemplate = Pointer on the name of the table window int TlgGetNumberOfTrends(char* lpszTemplate) Return Value: Number of visible trends in a trend window.97 int TlgGetNumberOfColumns(char* lpszTemplate) Return Value: Number of columns in a table window. Function: Gives the number of trends in a trend window.Global Scripts 08. Parameters: lpszTemplate = Pointer on the name of the table window int TlgGetNumberOfRows(char* lpszTemplate) Return Value: Number of rows in a table window. Function: Gives the number of rows in a table window. Parameters: lpszTemplate = Pointer on the name of the trend window 3-10 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

Parameters: lpszTemplate nTrend = Pointer on the name of the trend window = Number of the trend (0 <= nTrend <= Number of visible trends . The name of the table window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.1) SYSTEMTIME TlgGetRulerTimeTrend(char* lpszTemplate. int nTrend) Return Value: Time of a trend in a trend window at the position of the ruler. The name of the trend window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate. The name of the trend window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate.08. Parameters: lpszTemplate nTrend = Pointer on the name of the trend window = Number of the trend (0 <= nTrend <= Number of visible trends .1) WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-11 .97 Global Scripts int TlgGetRowPosition(char* lpszTemplate) Return Value: Current position of the row pointer in a table window. Function: Gives the time of a trend with the number “n trend” in a trend window at the position of the ruler. int nTrend) Return Value: Archive name of a trend in a trend window at the position of the ruler. Function: Gives the current position of the row pointer in a table window. Function: Gives the archive name of a trend with the number “n trend” in a trend window at the position of the ruler. Parameters: lpszTemplate = Pointer on the name of the table window char* TlgGetRulerArchivNameTrend(char* lpszTemplate.

The cell is specified by nColumn and nLine. Parameters: lpszTemplate nTrend = Pointer on the name of the trend window = Number of the trend (0 <= nTrend <= Number of visible trends . int nColumn.97 double TlgGetRulerValueTrend(char* lpszTemplate. Parameters: lpszTemplate nColumn nLine 3-12 = Pointer on the name of the table window = Number of the column = Number of the line WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . The name of the table window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate. Function: For process value archives and user archives. int nLine) Return Value: Content of a cell of a table window as text.1) char* TlgGetRulerVariableNameTrend(char* lpszTemplate. gives the content of a cell of a table window as text. Function: Gives the value of a trend with the number “n trend” in a trend window at the position of the ruler.1) char* TlgGetTextAtPos(char* lpszTemplate. int nTrend) Return Value: Value of a trend in a trend window at the position of the ruler. The name of the trend window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate. The name of the trend window is transferred with the parameter lpszTemplate. int nTrend) Return Value: Tag name of a trend in a trend window at the position of the ruler.Global Scripts 08. Parameters: lpszTemplate nTrend = Pointer on the name of the trend window = Number of the trend (0 <= nTrend <= Number of visible trends . Function: Gives the tag name of a trend with the number “n trend” in a trend window at the position of the ruler.

3. The number of records displayed depends on the configured time range Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressHelpButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the online help in the table window Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressInsertRecordButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Inserts a data record Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressLastButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the last data records of the display area in the table window. The number of records displayed depends on the configured time range Parameters: lpszTemplateName WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 = Pointer on the name of the application window 3-13 .08.97 Global Scripts 3.2 TOOLBAR BUTTONS BOOL TlgTableWindowPressEditRecordButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: The editing of the table window is permitted/not permitted (toggle-Function) Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressFirstButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the first data records of the display area in the table window.

Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressOpenDlgButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: The dialog for the online configuration of the table window is displayed Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window 3-14 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 BOOL TlgTableWindowPressNextButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the data records following the current display area in the table window. Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressOpenArchiveVariableSelectionDlgButton(char* lpszWindowName) Function: Opens a dialog for connecting table columns to one archive name and one tag each. where the left column will be positioned at the right column. The number of records displayed depends on the configured time range Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressNextItemButton(char* lpszWindowName) Function: The columns of a table window will be moved to the left by one column.Global Scripts 08.

Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-15 . in which the values are displayed. Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressOpenTimeSelectDlgButton(char* lpszWindowName) Function: Opens a dialog for connecting table columns to one time range each.08.97 Global Scripts BOOL TlgTableWindowPressOpenItemSelectDlgButton(char* lpszWindowName) Function: Opens a dialog for selecting the visible columns. where the right column will be positioned at the left column. The number of records displayed depends on the configured time range Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressPrevItemButton(char* lpszWindowName) Function: The columns of a table window will be moved to the right by one column. Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressPrevButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the data records preceding the current display area in the table window.

Global Scripts 08. The number of records displayed depends on the configured time range Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressHelpButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the online help for the trend window Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the ap plication window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressLastButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the last data records of the display area in the trend window. The number of records displayed depends on the configured time range Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window 3-16 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 BOOL TlgTableWindowPressRemoveRecordButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Deletes a data record Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of a the application window BOOL TlgTableWindowPressStartStopButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: The updating of the table window is turned on/off (toggle-Function) Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressFirstButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the first data records of the display area in the trend window.

Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressNextButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the data records following the current display area in the trend window.97 Global Scripts BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressLinealButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Turns the ruler for the trend window on/off (toggle-Function). See also TlgTrendWindowPressZoomInButton Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-17 . The trend in the front will be moved to the back.08. The ruler can be moved via the left or right cursor keys. Selecting a zoom area is only possible with a mouse. The number of records displayed depends on the configured time range Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressNextItemButton(char* lpszWindowName) Function: Moves all trends in a trend window one layer to the front. Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOneToOneButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: The trend window will revert to the state it had before the magnifying glass was turned on. The magnifying glass is turned off.

in which the values are displayed.97 BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOpenArchiveTagSelectionDlgButton(char* lpszWindowName) Function: Opens a dialog for connecting trends in a trend window to one archive name and one tag each. Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOpenDlgButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: The dialog for the online configuration of the trend window is displayed. Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOpenItemSelectDlgButton(char* lpszWindowNumber) Function: Opens a dialog for selecting the visible trends and the trend that is to be displayed at the front. Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of th e application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressOpenTimeSelectDlgButton(char* lpszWindowNumber) Function: Opens a dialog for connecting trends to one time range each.Global Scripts 08. Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window 3-18 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

The trend in the back will be moved to the front. Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-19 . The number of records displayed depends on the configured time range Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressPrevItemButton(char* lpszWindowName) Function: Moves all trends in a trend window one layer to the back.97 Global Scripts BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressPrevButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: Displays the data records preceding the current display area in the trend window. Selecting a zoom area is only possible with a mouse.08. Parameter: lpszWindowName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressStartStopButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: The updating of the trend window is turned on/off (toggle-Function) Parameter: lpszTemplateName = Pointer on the name of the application window BOOL TlgTrendWindowPressZoomInButton(char* lpszTemplateName) Function: The magnifying glass is turned on.

Parameter: ErrorExecute = Structure.4 WINCC (Standard Functions) void OnErrorExecute(CCAPErrorExecute ErrorExecute) Function: OnErrorExecute will be called up. BOOL bCycle. char* szTagName. which informs you about the occurred error Structure Definition: typedef struckt { DWORD dwCurrentThreadID. DWORD dwParamSize. //Thread ID of the current //Error code 1 //Error code 2 //cycle/acycle //Name of the application //Name of the function //Name of the tag //Pointer to the action stack //Size of the action stack //Cycle of the variable //Pointer to CMN_ERROR 3-20 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 3. This enables you to perform your own error treatment and to determine the exact error cause. LPVOID lpParam. char* szFunctionName. char* szApplicationName. if an error occurred while executing an action or function. } CCAPErrorExecute. thread DWORD dwErrorCode1. DWORD dwErrorCode2. DWORD dwCycle. CMN_ERROR* pError.Global Scripts 08.

08. is described in the following table: 1007001 1007001 1007001 1007001 1007001 1007001 1007004 1007005 1007005 1007005 1007005 1007006 1007006 1007006 1007006 0 1 4097 4098 4099 4100 0 1 2 4 32768ff 0 1 2 3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1007007 1007007 1007007 1 2 3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Exception in the action Exception while accessing the return result Stack overflow while executing the action Division by 0 in the action Access to a symbol not present in the action Access violation in the action Unknown function Action contains no P-Code Function name is wrong Return value type is invalid Error in the Ciss Compiler while loading the action Tag is not defined Tag timeout Tag can not be supplied in the desired format Tag delivers a status violation. the status is located at CMN_ERROR.dwError1 Error at PDLRTGetProp Error at PDLRTSetProp Error at DM-Call WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-21 .97 Global Scripts The meaning of the individual error markings and the transferred structure elements depending on them.

For internal use only. DWORD GetSignificantMask(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 3. Parameters: Program_Name = Pointer to the program name. For internal use only. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. LPCSTR lpcObjectName.Global Scripts 08. LPSTR lpPictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. BOOL PASSCheckAreaPermission(LPCTSTR areaname) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. 3. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Authorization available FALSE = No authorization available Function: Determines if the user has general authorization for operating a specific system. LPCSTR lpcPropertyName.5 WINDOWS (Standard Functions) unsigned int ProgramExecute(char* Programm_Name) Function: Starts the program with the name provided.6 Options (Standard Functions) BOOL GetCSigPicture(LPCSTR lpcPictureName. Parameters: areaname = Name of the system 3-22 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

08. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Authorization available FALSE = No authorization available Function: Checks whether the user has the authorization for the transferred system when the authorization level is transferred.97 Global Scripts BOOL PASSCheckAreaLevelPermission(LPCTSTR areaname. input the "1" character. Parameters: areaname = Name of the system level = Authorization level as a number value void PASSLoginDialog(TCHAR ch) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. DWORD level) This function is a part of the ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL option package.). WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-23 . Function: Displays the Login dialog and loads the user data to shared memory when a successful login occurs. Parameters: ch = Specification of the monitor on which the login dialog is to be opened (for monitor 1.

97 3.7 Report (Standard Functions) void ReportJob(LPSTR lpJobName. LPSTR lpMethodName) This function will be replaced by the functions RPTJobPreview and RPTJobPrint and should therefore not be used any more. Parameter lpJobName = Pointer on the name of the print job BOOL RPTJobPrint(LPSTR lpJobName) Function: Starts the print job. Parameter lpJobName = Pointer on the name of the print job lpMethodName = Pointer on the name of the function mode "PRINT" Print job will be executed "PREVIEW" Print preview is started BOOL RPTJobPreview(LPSTR lpJobName) Function: Starts the preview of a print job. Parameter lpJobName = Pointer on the name of the print job 3-24 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08. Function: Depending on the value of the parameter lpMethodName. a print job or a print preview will be started.

8 Split Screen Manager (Standard Functions) BOOL AcknowledgeAllPicture(LPCTSTR pictName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. LPTSTR newName. BOOL LoopInAlarm(TCHAR* TagName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. For internal use only. int GetIndexFromMask(DWORD dwMask) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. For internal use only. For internal use only. DWORD dwBitMask) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. int nNewNameLength. void GetMessageClassFromVar(TCHAR* VarName. int nClassIndex. For internal use only. BOOL* bQuit) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. BOOL GetCountPicture(LPTSTR aktName. Parameters: TagName = Pointer to the tag name void profile(long pos_no. For internal use only. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-25 . long value.08. BOOL* bActive. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Authorization available FALSE = No authorization available Function: This function displays a prototype picture for the tag name provided and links the prototype picture with the tag name. LPCTSTR lpszPictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package.97 Global Scripts 3. void GetASVarIndex(int nVarIndex. For internal use only. int nClassIndex. BOOL* bQuit) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. BOOL* bActive.

Parameters: TagInfo = Pointer to the buffer on which the information about the measurement point is stored 3-26 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 BOOL PTMUnload() This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. void SetMessageClassToVar(TCHAR* VarName. For internal use only. For internal use only. BOOL bQuit) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. int nClassIndex. void reset_hoer(Tag var) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. BOOL SFCLoopInAlarm(TCHAR* TagInfo) This function is a part of the ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL option package. int nClassIndex.Global Scripts 08. For internal use only. void SetASVarIndex(int nVarIndex. BOOL bQuit) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. BOOL bActive. For internal use only. Function: This function unloads the Picture Tree Manager. BOOL bActive. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Function was executed FALSE = Function was not executed or incorrect parameter input Function: This function opens a view to the SFC plan that triggered the message at the measurement point provided.

char* PictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. including the extension. Parameters: Screen PictureName = contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name. char* PictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Parameters: Screen PictureName = contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name. Display not changed Function: The picture named lptPictureName is displayed in the overview area of the monitor described with Screen. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Display changed in the overview area FALSE = Error. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Display changed in the button area FALSE = Error.08. of the picture to be displayed in the button area BOOL SSMChangeOverviewField(char Screen. Display not changed Function: The picture named lptPictureName is displayed in the button area of the monitor described with Screen. including the extension. of the picture to be displayed in the overview area WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-27 .97 Global Scripts BOOL SSMChangeButtonField(char Screen.

Return Value: Error code TRUE = Picture in the first lower node exists. (Default setting) Store BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldDown(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. (picture prototype). If the file specified in PictureName is not in the hierarchy. Parameters: Screen PictureName = contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name. BOOL Store) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. = Update the picture store if TRUE. Function: This function determines which picture in the Screen workspace is displayed and checks whether the picture exists in the corresponding lower node in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager. char* PictureName." the area name is transmitted and saved automatically. You can access the area name by means of the "SSMGetAreaFromPicturePath" function. Display not changed Function: The contents of a file are displayed in the workspace of the monitor described with Screen." Parameters: Screen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string 3-28 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . FALSE = Error or the picture in the first lower node does not exist.Global Scripts 08. If the name specified in PictureName is included in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager. of the PDL file to be displayed.97 BOOL SSMChangeWorkField(char Screen. you can set the area name by calling the SSMRTSetAreaToPicturePath function. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Display changed in the overview area FALSE = Error. including the extension.

08. Function: This function determines which picture in the Screen workspace is displayed and checks whether the picture exists in the node to the left in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager." Parameters: Screen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldRight(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Picture in the node to the left exists. Function: This function determines which picture in the Screen workspace is displayed and checks whether the picture exists in the node to the right in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Picture in the node to the right exists. FALSE = Error or picture in the node to the left does not exist." Parameters: Screen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-29 .97 Global Scripts BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldLeft(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. FALSE = Error or picture in the node to the right does not exist.

" Parameters: Screen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string BOOL SSMChgWorkFieldDown(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Parameters: Screen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string 3-30 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08. Function: This function determines which picture is displayed in the monitor workspace. FALSE = Error or the picture in the next higher node does not exist. Function: This function determines which picture in the Screen workspace is displayed and checks whether the picture exists in the corresponding higher node in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager. The picture stack is updated automatically. FALSE = Error. display not changed in the workspace. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Display changed in the workspace.97 BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldUp(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Picture in the next higher node exists. It gets the appropriate picture from the first lower node in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager" and displays this new picture in the workspace of Screen.

It gets the appropriate picture from the node to the left in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager" and displays this picture in the workspace of Screen. Function: This function determines which picture is displayed in the Screen workspace. The picture stack is updated automatically.08. Parameters: Screen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-31 . The picture stack is updated automatically. display not changed in the workspace. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Display changed in the workspace. It gets the appropriate picture from the node to the right in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager" and displays this picture in the workspace of Screen. Parameters: Screen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldRight(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. display not changed in the workspace.97 Global Scripts BOOL SSMChgWorkFieldLeft(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Display changed in the workspace. Function: This function determines which picture is displayed in the Screen workspace. FALSE = Error. FALSE = Error.

Return Value: Error code TRUE = User-related settings deleted.Global Scripts 08. Files that belong to other users or other editors are unaffected. Function: This function determines which picture is displayed in the Screen workspace.97 BOOL SSMCheckWorkFieldUp(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Parameters: Screen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string BOOL SSMDeleteUserSettings(LPCTSTR lpctUserName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. FALSE = Error. display not changed in the workspace. The picture stack is updated automatically. It gets the appropriate picture from the next higher node in the hierarchy of the "Picture Tree Manager" and displays this picture in the workspace of Screen. Parameters: lpctUserName = Pointer to the name of the user whose settings are to be deleted. 3-32 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Files that belong to the current user in other folders are also not affected. FALSE = Error Function: Use this function to delete all of the files of the "Split Screen Manager" that were created by lpctUserName in the standard folder of lpctUserName. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Display changed in the workspace.

08.97

Global Scripts

BOOL SSMGetAreaFromPath(char* PicturePath, char* AreaName, int len) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = User-related settings deleted. FALSE = Error Function: This function gets the system assignment of the specified picture path. The function does not use the "Picture Tree Manager." PicturePath must contain the complete path of a picture displayed in the workspace or in one of the top fields. Parameters: PicturePath = Pointer to the name of the picture, including the path. You do not need to input the extension. AreaName = Pointer to a buffer on which the area/system name should be stored. len = maximum length of the AreaName buffer BOOL SSMGetAreaFromWorkField(char Screen, char* AreaName, int nAreaNameLen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = No errors FALSE = An error occurred Function: This function gets the system assignment of the workspace in the monitor specified. Parameters: Screen AreaName nAreaNamelen = contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to a buffer on which the area/system name should be stored. = maximum length of the AreaName buffer

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

3-33

Global Scripts

08.97

BOOL SSMGetAutoLoadSettings() This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Automatic load activated FALSE = Error Function: This function determines whether the user -specific settings should be loaded automatically in the run -time system after a user has logged on. BOOL SSMGetContainerToPicture(char* PictureName, char* ReturnContainer, int len) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got container FALSE = Error Function: This function uses the Picture Tree Manager to get the container that is appropriate for the picture specified. Parameters: PictureName = Name of the picture ReturnContainer = Pointer to a buffer on which the container name should be stored len = maximum length of the ReturnContainer buffer

3-34

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Global Scripts

BOOL SSMGetContPict(int area_no, int subarea_no, char* ReturnPictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got picture name FALSE = Error Function: This function gets the picture name of the container specified by the system number and the subsystem number. If the subsystem number is zero, the function gets the picture name of the system container. Parameters: area_no subarea_no ReturnPictureName = System number = Subsystem number = Pointer to a buffer on which the picture name should be stored.

BOOL SSMGetContainer(int area_no, int subarea_no, char* ReturnName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got container name FALSE = Error Function: This function gets the container name of the container specified by the system number and subsystem number. If the subsystem number is zero, the system gets the container name of the system container. Parameters: area_no subarea_no ReturnName = System number = Subsystem number = Pointer to a buffer on which the container name should be stored.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

3-35

Global Scripts

08.97

BOOL SSMGetRootToPicture(char* PictureName, char* ReturnRootContainer) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got system container name FALSE = Error Function: This function uses the picture name to get the system container name. Parameters: PictureName ReturnRootContainer = Picture name = Pointer to a buffer on which the system container name should be stored

char SSMGetScreen(char* lpszPictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Function: This function specifies the monitor on which the selected picture is displayed. Parameters: lpszPictureName = Pointer to the picture to be examined BOOL SSMGetWorkFieldPicture(char Screen, char* ReturnPictureName, int len) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got picture name FALSE = Error Function: This function gets the name (including the extension) of the picture currently displayed in the workspace of Screen. Parameters: Screen ReturnPictureName len 3-36 = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string. = Pointer to a buffer on which the name of the picture should be stored = Length of the ReturnPictureName buffer
WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Global Scripts

BOOL SSMGetWorkFieldCoordinates(TCHAR cMonitor, int* pLeft, int* pTop, int* pWidth, int* pHeight) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got size and location of the workspace. FALSE = Error Function: This function gets the location and position of the workspace for the cMonitor monitor and loads it in the pLeft, pTop, pWidth and pHeight parameters. Parameters: cMonitor = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string. pLeft = Pointer to a storage location on which the X coordinates of the workspace should be loaded pTop = Pointer to a storage location on which the Y coordinates of the workspace should be loaded pWidth = Pointer to a storage location on which the width of the workspace should be loaded pHeight = Pointer to a storage location on which the height of the workspace should be loaded. void SSMGetWorkFieldPath(char Screen, char* ReturnBaseName, int Length) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Function: This function gets the complete path of the picture in the workspace from the monitor specified. Parameters: Screen ReturnBaseName Length = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to a button on which the path specification should be loaded = Length of the ReturnBaseName buffer

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

3-37

Global Scripts

08.97

BOOL SSMLoadCurrentFields(LPCTSTR lpctSettingsName, LPCTSTR lpctUserName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got path settings FALSE = Error Function: From the file specified in lpctSettingsName, this function loads the user-specific information as long as the name specified in lpctUserName corresponds to the user name stored in the file. The following information is loaded for each monitor: Name of the picture in the overview area Name of the picture in the workspace Name of the picture in the button area Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all of the pictures displayed in process windows at this point Picture stack Picture store Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all of the areas visible at this point Parameters: lpctSettingsName = Pointer to the name of the file in which the user-specific information is stored. If lpctSettingsName does not contain any name extensions, the extension ".SSM" is attached. If lpctSettingsName does not contain any path specification, the function searches for it in the SSM standard folder of the lpctUserName user. If lpctSettingsName contains relative or absolute path specifications, then that path is used without any changes (not recommended). = Pointer to the name of the user whose settings are to be loaded. If there is no user name entered in lpctUserName (ZERO or empty character string), the name of the user that is currently logged on is used.

lpctUserName

3-38

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Global Scripts

BOOL SSMLoadSettings(TCHAR cMonitor) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got path settings FALSE = Error Function: This function displays the user-specific settings in a dialog window. The following information is displayed for the monitor specified: Name of the picture in the overview area Name of the picture in the workspace Name of the picture in the button area Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all of the pictures displayed in process windows at this point Picture stack Picture store Names and positions (PosX, PosY, Width, Height) of all of the areas visible at this point Parameters: cMonitor = Number of the monitor as a character string on which the selection dialog is to be displayed. BOOL SSMOpenSpecField(char Screen, char* FieldName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = No errors FALSE = An error occurred Function: This function opens a spec field on the monitor specified. Parameters: Screen FieldName = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the buffer on which the spec field name is stored

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

3-39

Global Scripts

08.97

BOOL SSMOpenTopField(char Screen, char* PictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Opened process window FALSE = Error or no top field available Function: This function opens a process window of variable size and uses it to display the picture specified by PictureName. Parameters: Screen PictureName = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name of the picture to be displayed in the process window

BOOL SSMOpenTopFieldFixedSize(char Screen, char* PictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Opened process window FALSE = Error Function: This function opens a process window of a set size and uses it to display the picture specified by PictureName. Parameters: Screen PictureName = Contains the number of the monitor as a character strin g = Pointer to the name of the picture to be displayed in the process window

3-40

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

Parameters: Screen = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-41 . Parameters: Screen PictureName len = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name of the picture that is stored in the picture store = Length of the PictureName buffer int SSMPictureStoreNum(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Function: This function specifies the picture number of the picture located in the picture store. char* PictureName. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Edited picture store FALSE = Error Function: This function loads a picture name from the picture store of the monitor specified.97 Global Scripts BOOL SSMPictureStoreGet(char Screen. int len) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package.08.

Global Scripts 08. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Edited picture store FALSE = Error Function: This function stores a picture name in the picture store of the monitor specified. char* PictureName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Parameters: Screen PictureName = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name of the picture that is stored in the picture store.97 BOOL SSMPictureStoreSet(char Screen. Parameters: Screen szCommandLine = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Command line (program name including parameters) 3-42 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . char * szCommandLine) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. unsigned int SSMProgramExecute(char Screen. Function: This function starts an application on the monitor specified.

Parameters: Screen = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-43 . Function: This function specifies how many pictures are located in the picture stack of the monitor specified. int len. int* ReturnCount) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = No errors FALSE = An error occurred Function: This function gets the picture name of the top memory area in a picture stack.97 Global Scripts BOOL SSMPictureMemoryInquire(char Screen. char* PictureName.08. Parameters: Screen PictureName len ReturnCount = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name of the picture that is stored in the picture stack = Length of the PictureName buffer = Pointer to the number of pictures (elements) in the picture store of the monitor Screen int SSMPictureMemoryNum(char Screen) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. A maximum of 8 pictures can be stored in the picture stack.

The memory is then available again.Global Scripts 08. Parameters: Screen PictureName ReturnCount = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name of the picture that is stored in the picture stack = Pointer to the number of pictures (elements) in the picture stack of the monitor BOOL SSMPictureMemoryRestore(char Screen. Parameters: Screen PictureName len ReturnCount = Contains the number of the monitor as a character string = Pointer to the name of the picture that is stored in the picture stack = Length of the PictureName buffer = Pointer to the number of pictures (elements) in the picture stack of the monitor Screen 3-44 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 BOOL SSMPictureMemoryStore(char Screen. Return Value: Error code TRUE = No errors FALSE = An error occurred Function: This function saves a picture from the appropriate monitor to the picture stack. char* PictureName. Return Value: Error code TRUE = No errors FALSE = An error occurred Function: This function loads a picture to the appropriate monitor from the picture stack. char* PictureName. int len. int* ReturnCount) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. int* ReturnCount) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package.

including the path settings. Parameters: dwLanguage = The language to be used in RUNTIME as a number value WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-45 . AreaName = Pointer to the area name to be connected to the picture path BOOL SSMSetLanguage(DWORD dwLanguage) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. Return Value: Error code TRUE = No errors FALSE = An error occurred Function: This function sets the area name for a picture path.08.97 Global Scripts BOOL SSMSetAreaNameToPicture(char* PicturePath. The area name is not tested by this function but is stored directly. char* AreaName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. The extension does not have to be given. Parameters: PicturePath = Pointer to the name of the picture. Return Value: Error code TRUE = No errors FALSE = An error occurred Function: This function sets the language to be used in RUNTIME mode.

it must be ". LPCTSTR lpctUserName) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. If lpctSettingsName does not contain any path specification. PosY. PosY. the name of the user that is currently logged on is used. that path is used without any changes (not recommended). If lpctSettingsName contains relative or absolute path specifications. the file is set up in the SSM standard folder of the lpctUserName user.Global Scripts 08. it is overwritten.SSM. the ". There are no limitations regarding the file name. If you provide an extension. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got path settings FALSE = Error Function: This function creates a file specified in lpctSettingsName and saves user-specific information in it. Height) of all of the pictures displayed in process windows at this point Picture stack Picture store Names and positions (PosX. If a file already exists with the name specified in lpctSettingsName. Width. If there is no user name entered in lpctUserName (ZERO or empty character string). Width.SSM" extension is added. The following information is stored for each monitor: Name of the picture in the overview area Name of the picture in the workspace Name of the picture in the button area Names and positions (PosX." If lpctSettingsName does not contain any name extensions. = Pointer to the name of the user whose settings are to be loaded. Height) of all areas visible at this time Parameters: lpctSettingsName = Pointer to the name of the file in which the user-specific information is to be stored.97 BOOL SSMStoreCurrentFields(LPCTSTR lpctSettingsName. lpctUserName 3-46 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

The following information is stored for the monitor specified: Name of the picture in the overview area Name of the picture in the workspace Name of the picture in the button area Names and positions (PosX. BOOL SSMUnload() This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package. For internal use only. Return Value: Error code TRUE = No errors FALSE = An error occurred Function: This function unloads the Split Screen Manager. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 3-47 . Height) of all areas visible at this time Parameters: cMonitor = Number of the monitor as a character string on which to display the selection dialog. PosY. PosY. Width. Width. Height) of all of the pictures displayed in process windows at this point Picture stack Picture store Names and positions (PosX.97 Global Scripts BOOL SSMStoreSettings(TCHAR cMonitor) This function is a part of the BASIC PROCESS CONTROL option package.08. Return Value: Error code TRUE = Got path settings FALSE = Error Function: This function stores the user-specific settings in a file selected by means of a selection dialog.

97 3-48 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08.

winCC contains functions for language switching. tag Contains functions for writing and reading process tags. for deactivating runtime. You can also use them in project functions.97 Global Scripts 4 Internal Functions Use internal functions to make graphic objects and archives dynamic. and for exiting WinCC. graphics Contains functions for reading and setting properties of graphic objects. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-1 . and Global Script actions. standard functions.08. Internal functions are divided into the following categories: alarm contains functions for starting and stopping the reception of single messages and for specifying filters. c_bib Contains functions from the C standard library . allocate Contains functions for reserving and enabling working memory.

LPMSG_FILTER_STRUCT lpMsgFilter. = Pointer that acquires the extended error message BOOL MSRTStopMsgService (DWORD dwServiceID. Function: Set a new filter for the service displayed.Global Scripts 08. = Notification function for transferring messages to the service = Pointer to the filter conditions: (NULL = all messages) = Specifies which messages are sent. DWORD dwNotifyMask.1 alarm (Internal Functions) BOOL MSRTSetMsgFilter (DWORD dwServiceID. Function: Stop the service for receiving single messages.97 4. You can create your own message window. Parameters: dwServiceID lpError = ID number of the service you want to stop = Pointer that acquires the extended error message 4-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Parameters: dwServiceID lpMsgFilter lpError = Service. LPCMN_ERROR lpError). = User data are sent to callback. MSG_SERVICE_NOTIFY_PROC lpfnNotifyProc. LPVOID lpvUser. LPCMN_ERROR lpError). Function: Start the service for receiving single messages. LPCMN_ERROR lpError). Parameters: lpdwServiceID lpfnNotifyProc lpMsgFilter dwNotifyMask lpvUser lpError = Contains the service ID after the function has been called up successfully. LPMSG_FILTER_STRUCT lpMsgFilter. for which the filter is to be set = Filter to be used = Pointer that acquires the extended error message BOOL MSRTStartMsgService (LPDWORD lpdwServiceID.

return returnwert.97 Global Scripts 4. the system releases the memory. strcpy(returnwert. Parameters: lpFree = Pointer void* SysMalloc(unsigned long int size). When the action is completed and the result is sent.2 allocate The "allocate" function category contains functions for reserving and enabling work memory.08. Example: Reserve memory for the return value of the action. char* main(. { char* returnwert. Function: Reserves memory for an action. Function: Releases memory that was reserved with the "SysMalloc" function. returnwert=SysMalloc(17).). The memory range is allocated to the action. char text[17].&text[0].. Use the "SysFree" function to release the memory yourself. void SysFree(void* lpFree).. } Parameters: size = Size of the memory in bytes WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-3 .

Global Scripts 08.3 c_bib The functions category c_bib contains C functions from the C library and is divided into the following areas: ctype math memory stdio stdlib string time stdio itself is divided into the following areas: char_io directio error file file_pos output You can find a description of this function in related technical literature.97 4. 4-4 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

The get functions themselves are divided into the following function groups: axes color fill flash focus font general geometry i_o limits link miscs ole_control pictures property state style The get functions need the following two parameters: lpszPictureName: Picture name (without name extension pdl) lpszObjectName: Object name WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-5 .4 graphics The Graphics function category is divided into the following functions: get Functions Functions for transmitting attribute values.97 Global Scripts 4.08.

Global Scripts 08. Parameter: Attribute value The return value for the set functions is the following error code: TRUE: The function was executed without errors.97 set Functions Functions for setting attribute values. 4-6 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . FALSE: An error occurred. The set functions themselves are divided into the following function groups: axes color fill flash focus font geometry i_o limits link miscs ole_control pictures property state style The set functions need the following three parameters: lpszPictureName: Picture name (without name extension pdl) lpszObjectName: Object name 3.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-7 .4. BOOL GetExponent (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Only with bar objects Return Value: Number of digits to the left of the decimal point on the axis. FALSE means the numbers on the axis are in decimal format. Only with bar objects Return Value: TRUE means the long axis sections on the bar scale are displayed as bold.97 Global Scripts 4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetLeftComma (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE: The text is to the left of the bar. Only with bar objects Return Value: TRUE means the numbers on the axis are exponents. BOOL GetLongStrokesBold (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with bar objects Return Value: Axis section: the value difference between two neighboring axis labels. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).1 graphics-get-axes Functions BOOL GetAlignment (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.08. double GetAxisSection (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the long axis sections on the bar scale are displayed as normal. Only with bar objects Return Value: TRUE: The text is to the right of the bar. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means that both the long axis sections and the subsections are displayed in the bar scale. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). 4-8 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Only with bar objects Return Value: Number value that controls the text labels of the long axis sections Example: Return Value = 1 -> Each long axis section is labeled. Only with bar objects Return Value: Scale marks as a percentage value of the entire height of the bar. FALSE means without an additional scale. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value = 2 -> Every other long axis section is labeled. Only with bar objects Return Value: Number of digits to the right of the decimal point on the axis . long int GetLongStrokesSize(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).Global Scripts 08.97 BOOL GetLongStrokesOnly (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with bar objects Return Value: TRUE means with an additional scale. BOOL GetScaling (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetRightComma (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with bar objects Return Value: TRUE means that only the long axis sections are displayed in the bar scale. Only with bar objects Return Value: Number value that controls the length of the long axis sections long int GetLongStrokesTextEach (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetScaleTicks (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

97 Global Scripts long int GetScalingType(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with bar objects Return Value Number value that determines the type of bar scaling 0: Linear (same weight) 1: Logarithmic (lower values emphasized) 2: Negative logarithmic (higher values emphasized) 3: Automatic (linear) 4: Tangent (high and low values emphasized) 5: Squared (high values emphasized) 6: Cubic (high values heavily emphasized) WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-9 .08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

long int GetBackColor2 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value that sets the bottom right background color with slider objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the line or border background color long int GetBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the background color of the object Note: If the function call relates to the entire picture. set the parameter lpszObjectName = NULL. Return Value: Number value of the bar background color for bar objects long int GetBackColorBottom(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).Global Scripts 08.2 graphics-get-color Functions long int GetBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetBorderBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetBackColorTop(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the bar color of bar objects long int GetBackColor3 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value that sets the top left background color with slider objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 4.4. Return Value: Number value of the line or border color 4-10 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

set the parameter lpszObjectName = NULL.08.97 Global Scripts long int GetBorderColorBottom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the button color in slider objects long int GetColorBottom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the color for the left and top part of the 3D border long int GetButtonColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the font color WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-11 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the color for the bottom/right slider position (low limit) long int GetColorTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the color for the top/left slider position (high limit) long int GetFillColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the color for the right and bottom part of the 3D border (shadow) long int GetBorderColorTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the color of the fill pattern Note: If the function call relates to the entire picture. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

Return Value: Number value of the scale color in bar objects long int GetSelBGColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the trend color in bar objects 4-12 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetSelTextColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Display of the separate line background color in a "Text List" object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetTrendColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 long int GetGridColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Display of the font color for selected entry in the browser list in a "Text List" object. long int GetItemBorderColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Display of the separate line color in a "Text List" object. long int GetScaleColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the grid color of the Graphics Designer workspace long int GetItemBorderBackColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Display of the background color for selected entry in the browser list in a "Text List" object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

97 Global Scripts long int GetUnselBGColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Display of the text color for unselected entries in the browser list for a "Text List" object. long int GetUnselTextColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-13 . Return Value: Display of the background color for unselected entries in the browser list for a "Text List" object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).08.

I/O field. polygon. Return Value: TRUE means the dynamic filling attribute with the background color is active. and others) can be filled. ellipse segment. long int GetFillingIndex (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. rounded rectangle. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). pie segment. text. ellipse. FALSE means the dynamic filling attribute with the background color is not active.3 graphics-get-fill Functions BOOL GetFilling (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. Return Value: Number value of the current fill level (percentage) 4-14 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). circle .97 4.4. An object with a solid border (rectangle.

Return Value: Number value of the border color or line color when the flashing attribute is switched off long int GetBorderFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means background flashing is not active. Return Value: TRUE means background flashing is active.4 graphics-get-flash Functions long int GetBackFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the border color or line color when the flashing attribute is switched on BOOL GetFlashBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-15 . Return Value: TRUE means border or line flashing is active. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the background color when the flashing attribute is switched off long int GetBackFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 Global Scripts 4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means border or line flashing is not active. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Background color when the flashing attribute is switched on as number value long int GetBorderFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL GetFlashBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).08.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Line or border flash frequency. Return Value: TRUE means text flashing is active. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the text color when the flashing attribute is switched on 4-16 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetFlashRateForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetFlashRateBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetForeFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Text flash frequency. Return Value: Background flash frequency. long int GetFlashRateBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 BOOL GetFlashForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means text flashing is not active. Return Value: Number value of the text color when the flashing attribute is switched off long int GetForeFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Return Value: TRUE means the "Italic" text attribute is set. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Name of the object the focus is placed on or has been placed on last 4. Return Value: Pointer to the name of the font that is currently set.97 Global Scripts 4. BOOL GetFontItalic (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the "Bold" text attribute is not set. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: TRUE means the "Bold" text attribute is set.6 graphics-get-font Functions long int GetAlignmentLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-17 . char* GetFontName (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.4. centered. aligned right) of the text long int GetAlignmentTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the "Italic" text attribute is not set. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). center. Return Value: Number value of the vertical alignment (aligned top. bottom) of the text BOOL GetFontBold (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the horizontal alignment (aligned left.08.4.5 graphics-get-focus-Functions char* Get_Focus(). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). the element or point has to be set with the SetIndex function before calling the GetText function. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetOrientation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means the text orientation is vertical. as well as for polygons and polylines. Return Value: TRUE means the "Underline" text attribute is set. Return Value: Current font size lpszPictureName = Name of the picture lpszObjectName = Name of the object BOOL GetFontUnderline (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the "Underline" text attribute is not set. For radio.and check-boxes.97 long int GetFontSize (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. char* GetText (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. 4-18 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Return Value: Pointer to static text. Return Value: TRUE means the text orientation is horizontal.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetBoxCount (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the bar direction (up. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Current horizontal position (X axis ) of the corner point for polygon and polyline object types in relation to the origin of the picture. left. Return Value: Provides the picture layer on which the object is located. or right) in bar objects long int GetEndAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).08. down.8 graphics-get-geometry Functions long int GetActualPointLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. The SetIndex function sets the current point of the polygon. Return Value: Current vertical position (Y axis ) of the corner point for polygon and polyline object types in relation to the origin of the picture.7 graphics-get-general Functions long int GetLayer (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number of selected check boxes in a check box area or option buttons in an option group area. The SetIndex function sets the current point of the polygon. Return Value: End angle of pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and ellipse arcs WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-19 . long int GetDirection (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetActualPointTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 Global Scripts 4.4. 4.

long int GetLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Height of the rectangle surrounding an object Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 BOOL GetGrid (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Radius of a circle. Return Value: TRUE means that the grid is turned on in the workspace of the Graphics Designer. or circular arc 4-20 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . pie segment. Return Value: Number of corners for a polygon or polyline long int GetRadius (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. Return Value: Height of the grid in the workspace of the Graphics Designer long int GetGridWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Current location on the X axis of the left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding an object long int GetPointCount (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. Return Value: Width of the grid in the workspace of the Graphics Designer long int GetHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means that the grid is turned off in the workspace of the Graphics Designer. long int GetGridHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

an ellipse segment. and polyline Return Value: X value of the rotation reference (the reference point around which the object is rotated) long int GetReferenceRotationTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. and polyline. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: The vertical radius of an ellipse. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Valid for line. Return Value: Clockwise rotation angle (in degrees) of the object around the rotation point long int GetRoundCornerHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. and polyline. Valid for line. an ellipse segment.08. or an ellipse arc long int GetReferenceRotationLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Horizontal radius of an ellipse. Return Value: Y value of the rotation reference (the reference point around which the object is rotated) long int GetRotationAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. polygon. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Vertical radius of the corner of a rounded rectangle long int GetRoundCornerWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Horizontal radius of the corner of a rounded rectangle WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-21 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). polygon. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Valid for line. polygon. or an ellipse arc long int GetRadiusWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 Global Scripts long int GetRadiusHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetZeroPoint (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Current Y axis value of the left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding an object long int GetWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL.Global Scripts 08. Return Value: Width of the rectangle surrounding an object Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Zero point in bar objects 4-22 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Return Value: Beginning angle for pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and ellipse arcs long int GetTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 long int GetStartAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Return Value: Display of the relevant bit in the output value in the "Bit" list type. Only with I/O fields Return Value: TRUE means the system accepts the input value as soon as the field is exited. Only with I/O fields Return Value: TRUE means the system exits the input field automatically (without Tab or Enter key) and accepts the input as soon as the input has been completed (the specified number of characters was entered).4. FALSE means the input field is not deleted when there is an invalid input. FALSE means the system does not accept the input value as soon as the field is exited. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means the system does not exit the input field automatically and accept the input as soon as the input has been completed. BOOL GetAssumeOnFull (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL GetAssumeOnExit (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL GetClearOnError (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetBitNumber(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with I/O fields Return Value: TRUE means the input field is deleted automatically when there is an invalid input. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).08. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-23 .97 Global Scripts 4.9 graphics-get-i_o Functions char* GetAssignments(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Assignment of text to value range depending on the type of list.

long int GetDataFormat (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Displays the type of the text list. The following list types are possible: 0: Decimal 1: Binary 2: Bit 4-24 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Only with I/O fields Return Value: Number value of the data type (binary.Global Scripts 08. char* GetInputValueChar (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with I/O fields Return Value: Input value long int GetListType(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means the input value is not hidden during input.97 BOOL GetClearOnNew (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. An asterisk (*) is displayed for each character. Only with I/O fields Return Value: TRUE means the input field is deleted at startup. or string) of the contents of the field BOOL GetHiddenInput (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). decimal. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means the input field is not deleted at startup. Only with I/O fields Return Value: Pointer to the input value double GetInputValueDouble (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. hexadecimal. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Only with I/O fields Return Value: TRUE means the input value is hidden during input.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).08.97 Global Scripts long int GetNumberLines(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with I/O fields Return Value: Pointer to the output format char* GetOutputValueChar (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). char* GetOutputFormat (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Display of how many visible lines a browser list in a "Text List" object contains. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Only with I/O fields Return Value: Output value WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-25 . Only with I/O fields Return Value: Pointer to the output value double GetOutputValueDouble (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). the browser list receives a vertical scroll bar. Note: If the number of configured texts is larger than the number of visible lines.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). 4-26 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Return Value: TRUE means that the limit value for "alarm low" is monitored in bar objects. FALSE means that the limit value for "alarm low" is not monitored in bar objects. Return Value: Alarm low limit in bar objects BOOL GetCheckAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: TRUE means that the high limit value for "reserve 4" is monitored in bar objects.Global Scripts 08. FALSE means that the high limit value for "reserve 4" is not monitored in bar objects. FALSE means that the limit value for "alarm high" is not monitored. Return Value: TRUE means that the limit value for "alarm high" is monitored in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means that the high limit value for "reserve 5" is not monitored in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).10 graphics-get-limits Functions double GetAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL GetCheckAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 4. BOOL GetCheckLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.4. Return Value: Alarm high limit in bar objects double GetAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL GetCheckLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: TRUE means that the high limit value for "reserve 5" is monitored in bar objects.

Return Value: TRUE means that the limit value for "tolerance low" is monitored in bar objects. BOOL GetCheckToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: TRUE means that the limit value for "tolerance high" is monitored in bar objects. Return Value: TRUE means that the limit value for "warning high" is monitored in bar objects.08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-27 . Return Value: TRUE means that the low limit value for "reserve 4" is monitored in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means that the limit value for "warning high" is not monitored in bar objects. BOOL GetCheckWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL GetCheckToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means that the limit value for "tolerance low" is not monitored in bar objects. Return Value: TRUE means that the low limit value for "reserve 5" is monitored in bar objects. FALSE means that the low limit value for "reserve 4" is not monitored in bar objects. FALSE means that the limit value for "tolerance high" is not monitored in bar objects. BOOL GetCheckLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 Global Scripts BOOL GetCheckLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means that the low limit value for "reserve 5" is not monitored in bar objects.

Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the high limit value of "reserve 4" is reached long int GetColorLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means that the limit value for "warning low" is not monitored in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). long int GetColorAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 BOOL GetCheckWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the high limit value of "reserve 5" is reached long int GetColorLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "alarm high" is reached long int GetColorAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the low limit value of "reserve 4" is reached 4-28 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "alarm low" is reached long int GetColorLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: TRUE means that the limit value for "warning low" is monitored in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).Global Scripts 08.

08.97 Global Scripts long int GetColorLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: The high limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects double GetLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: The high limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-29 . Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "warning high" is reached long int GetColorWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "warning low" is reached double GetLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the low limit value of "reserve 5" is reached long int GetColorToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "tolerance high" is reached long int GetColorToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the bar color when the limit value of "tolerance low" is reached long int GetColorWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

Global Scripts

08.97

double GetLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: The low limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects

double GetLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: The low limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects

double GetLimitMax (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: High limit value for I/O fields

double GetLimitMin (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Low limit value for I/O fields

BOOL GetMarker (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the limit value is displayed as a scale value in bar objects. FALSE means the limit value is not displayed in bar objects.

double GetToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Limit value for "tolerance high" in bar objects

double GetToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Limit value for "tolerance low" in bar objects

4-30

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Global Scripts

BOOL GetTypeAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the limit value for "alarm high" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the limit value for "alarm high" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

BOOL GetTypeAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the limit value for "alarm low" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the limit value for "alarm low" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

BOOL GetTypeLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

BOOL GetTypeLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

BOOL GetTypeLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

4-31

Global Scripts

08.97

BOOL GetTypeLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

BOOL GetTypeToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

BOOL GetTypeToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

BOOL GetTypeWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the limit value for "warning high" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the limit value for "warning high" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

4-32

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Global Scripts

BOOL GetTypeWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means the limit value for "warning low" is provided as a percentage in bar objects. FALSE means the limit value for "warning low" is provided as an absolute in bar objects.

double GetWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Limit value for "warning high" in bar objects

double GetWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Limit value for "warning low" in bar objects

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

4-33

Global Scripts

08.97

4.4.11 graphics-get-link Functions
BOOL GetLink(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName,LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName, LPLINKINFO() pLink); Return Value: Inquiry to the current tag connection of object properties Parameters: Stucture: The tag structure consists of the LinkTyp, dwCycle, and szLinkName parameters. LinkType: 0 1 2 3 4 dwCycle: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13-17

Object property not dynamic Direct tag connection Indirect tag connection C action C action created by means of the dynamic wizard

Picture cycle Window cycle Upon change 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s 5s 10 s 1 min 5 min 10 min 1 hr User cycle 1 to 5

szLinkName: If there is of a direct or indirect tag connection, the tag name is transferred. Example: { LINKINFO linkinfo; GetLink( ......., &linkinfo); printf(„%d, %d, %s“, linkinfo.LinkType, linkinfo.dwCycle, linkinfo.szLinkName); }

4-34

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Global Scripts

4.4.12 graphics-get-misc Functions
BOOL GetAdaptBorder (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Valid for static text, I/O field, button, check box, and option button. Return Value: TRUE means the border is dynamically fitted to the text size. FALSE means the border is not dynamically fitted to the text size.

BOOL GetAdaptPicture (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Valid for picture windows. Adapts the picture to the size of the picture window. Return Value: TRUE means the picture is adapted to fit the window size. FALSE means the picture is not adapted to fit the window size.

BOOL GetAdaptSize (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Only for picture windows. Return Value: TRUE means the window size is adapted to fit the picture size. FALSE means the window size is not adapted to fit the picture size.

BOOL GetAverage (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Only with bar objects Return Value: TRUE means the last 15 values will be averaged. FALSE means the last 15 values will not be averaged.

long int GetBoxType (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Field type of an I/O object (input field, output field, input/output field)

BOOL GetCaption (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means that the picture window has a title. FALSE means that the picture window does not have a title. 4-35

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

Global Scripts

08.97

BOOL GetCloseButton (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means that the picture window can be closed. FALSE means that the picture window cannot be closed.

BOOL GetColorChangeType (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means that the color change when a limit is reached is carried out in the entire bar. FALSE means that the color change when a limit is reached is carried out in an individual bar segment .

BOOL GetCursorControl (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means that the cursor control is turned on in I/O field s (an alpha cursor jumps to the next field in the tab sequence after exiting the current field). FALSE means that the cursor control is turned off in I/O fields.

BOOL GetCursorMode (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means that the cursor mode for the picture is an alpha cursor sequence. FALSE means that the cursor mode for the picture is a tab order sequence.

BOOL GetEditAtOnce (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means that the immediate input attribute is set to "yes" for I/O field s (you can make an input immediately upon accessing the I/O field with the Tab key, without having to carry out any further action). FALSE means that the immediate input attribute is set to "no" for I/O fields.

4-36

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

08.97

Global Scripts

BOOL GetExtendedOperation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means that the extended operation attribute is set to "yes" for sliders (the slider is set to a new appropriate minimum/maximum limit value by clicking on the area outside of the current slider setting) FALSE means that the extended operation attribute is set to "no" for sliders.

long int GetHotkey (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Hot key or key combination for a button.

BOOL GetHysteresis (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: TRUE means that the display occurs with hysteresis for bar objects. FALSE means that the display occurs without hysteresis for bar objects.

double GetHysteresisRange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Hysteresis in the bar object display (hysteresis as a percent of the display value)

char* GetLanguageSwitch(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Shows if the text list object was configured in one or more languages. TRUE multiple language text list FALSE single language text list

char* GetLastChange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName, LPCTSTR lpszObjectName); Return Value: Date the picture was last changed.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01

4-37

double GetMin (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 double GetMax (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetOffsetLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: TRUE means that the picture or application window is always in the foreground. Return Value: Absolute value for the smallest value view for bar and slider objects BOOL GetMoveable (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: The absolute value for a full value view with bar and slider objects BOOL GetMaximizeButton (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: TRUE means that the picture or application window can be moved. Return Value: Horizontal distance of the picture from the left edge of the window in picture windows long int GetOffsetTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means that the picture or application window is not always in the foreground. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Vertical distance of the picture from the top edge of the window in picture windows BOOL GetOnTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: TRUE means that the picture or application window can be maximized. FALSE means that the picture or application window cannot be maximized.Global Scripts 08. FALSE means that the picture or application window cannot be moved. 4-38 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. Valid for all objects except application windows. option button. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-39 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means that the reason for operator activity is not reported. picture windows. and slider objects Return Value: TRUE means that a message is output when an operation is successfully carried out. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). check box.08. BOOL GetOperationMessage (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means that the object cannot be controlled. FALSE means that no message is output when an operation is successfully carried out. BOOL GetOperationReport (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetPasswordLevel (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. and OLE control Return Value: TRUE means that the reason for operator activity is reported. picture windows. and OLE control Return Value: Authorization level for controlling the object Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture.97 Global Scripts BOOL GetOperation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Valid for all objects except application windows. Valid for the I/O field. Return Value: TRUE means that the object can be controlled. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL.

FALSE means that the picture window does not have a scroll bar. char* GetServerName(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Valid for picture objects Return Value: Pointer to the name of a picture contained in a picture object double GetProcess (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). bar. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).Global Scripts 08. Return Value: TRUE means that the application or picture window size can be changed. long int GetSmallChange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Displays the name of the object (OLE Control and OLE object). BOOL GetSizeable (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. For check boxes and option groups: The selected box(es) BOOL GetScrollBars(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means that the application or picture window size cannot be changed.97 char* GetPictureName (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Valid for slider. check box. under which it is registered in Windows. and option group objects Return Value: For sliders and bars: Value of the presetting for the process value to be displayed. Return Value: TRUE means that the picture window has a scroll bar. Return Value: Number of steps the slider can be moved with a mouse click 4-40 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. double GetZeroPointValue (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Zoom factor for a picture window WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-41 . FALSE means that the application or picture window is displayed without a border. Return Value: TRUE means that the object is displayed. Return Value: TRUE means that the application or picture window is displayed with a border. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. FALSE means that the object is not displayed.08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means that the trend is not displayed in a bar object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetWindowBorder (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: TRUE means that the trend is displayed in a bar object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 Global Scripts BOOL GetTrend (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Absolute value for the zero point in a bar display long int GetZoom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the update cycle for the entire picture BOOL GetVisible (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetUpdateCycle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Global Scripts 08. long int GetRangeMin(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Slider position of the OCX slider as a number value long int GetRangeMax(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Minimum setting range of the OCX slider as a number value.13 graphics-get-ole_control Functions long int GetPosition(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. 4-42 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Maximum setting range of the OCX slider as a number value. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).4.

FALSE means copy the contents of the bit map file to the graphic (for the "deactivated" status). WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-43 . *.wmf) can be linked. Return Value: TRUE means use the transparent color for the "deactivated" status. *.08.emf.emf. Return Value: Picture for the "on/pressed" status. Return Value: TRUE means a reference to the bit map file for the "deactivated" status. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetPicDeactReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 Global Scripts 4.bmp.4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).14 graphics-get-pictures Functions char* GetPictureDeactivated(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the "deactivated" status. Return Value: Picture name for the "off/not pressed" status Bitmap files (*. *.dib) as well as metafiles (*. Bitmap files (*. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). char* GetPictureDown(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.dib) as well as metafiles (*. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).dib) as well as metafiles (*. *.emf. BOOL GetPicDeactUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. *. long int GetPicDeactTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Picture name for "deactivated" status Bitmap files (*. Return Value: Transparent color for the "deactivated" status Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. *.wmf) can be linked.bmp. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).wmf) can be linked char* GetPictureUp(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.bmp.

FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the "on/pressed" status. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Transparent color for the background picture of a graphic object Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics.Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetPicDownUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: TRUE means a reference to the bitmap file for the "on/pressed" status. Return Value: TRUE means a reference to the bitmap file. Return Value: TRUE means a reference to the bitmap file for the "off/not pressed" status. Return Value: TRUE means use the transparent color for the "on/pressed" status. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Transparent color for the "on/pressed" status Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetPicReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means copy the contents of the bitmap file to the graphic object. 4-44 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 BOOL GetPicDownReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetPicUpReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means copy the contents of the bitmap file to the graphic (for the "off/not pressed" status). FALSE meas copy the bitmap file to the graphic (for the status "on/pressed") long int GetPicDownTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int GetPicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).97 Global Scripts long int GetPicUpTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL GetPicUpUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the background picture of a graphic object. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-45 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: TRUE means use the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status. Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. Return Value: Transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status. BOOL GetPicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status. Return Value: TRUE means use the transparent color for the background picture of a graphic object.08.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName) Return Value: Pointer on the attribute value of the type char.97 4. Parameter: lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute 4-46 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Parameter: lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute long GetPropWord(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.4. LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName) Return Value: Attribute value of the type BOOL. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.15 graphics-get-property-Funktionen BOOL GetPropBOOL(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName) Return Value: Attribute value of the type double. Parameter: lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute char* GetPropChar(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName) Return Value: Attribute value of the type long. Parameter: lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute double GetPropDouble(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

FALSE means copy the contents of the bitmap file to the status display. Return Value: TRUE means use the transparent color for the base picture . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).4. Return Value: Transparent color of the base picture Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. Return Value: Flash picture name (file name of the graphic) WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-47 . Return Value: TRUE means the flash picture is dynamically animated. char* GetFlashPicture(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. char* GetBasePicture(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL GetFlashFlashPicture(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: TRUE means reference to the bitmap file. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).08. FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the base picture . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Base picture name for the status display BOOL GetBasePicReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 Global Scripts 4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetBasePicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.16 graphics-get-state Functions long int GetBasePicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the flash picture is statically animated. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

Return Value: Number value for the flash frequency of a flash picture 0: 1: 2: 3: No flash frequency Flash frequency slow (approximately 0. BOOL GetFlashPicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08.). long int GetIndex(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. update time. Return Value: Current index of a polygon or polyline. Return Value: Transparent color of the flash picture Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. FALSE means do not use the transparent color for the flash picture . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: TRUE means use the transparent color for the flash picture . the frequency depends on the system and the hardware (number of objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means copy the contents of the bitmap file to the status display.97 long int GetFlashPicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. 4-48 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .5 Hz) Flash frequence medium (approximately 2 Hz) Flash frequency fast (approximately 8 Hz) Note: Since flashing is a software implementation. memory. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetFlashPicReferenced(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. processor. etc. Return Value: TRUE means reference to the bitmap file. long int GetFlashRateFlashPic (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Line weight or weight of the border line as number value long int GetBoxAlignment (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value of the assignment of the control elements in check boxes or option buttons.08.97 Global Scripts 4. Return Value: Number value of the type of fill pattern Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. Return Value: Number value of the type of line end style long int GetBorderStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. align left or right long int GetFillStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-49 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).17 graphics-get-style Functions long int GetBackBorderWidth(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Number value for the weight of the border of 3D border and slider objects long int GetBorderEndStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).4. Return Value: Number value of the line style or border style long int GetBorderWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

" meaning you can determine the way the button looks yourself.97 long int GetFillStyle2 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). BOOL GetWindowsStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the switch setting is latched. Only for round buttons Return Value: TRUE means a switch setting of on/pressed. 4-50 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . FALSE corresponds to the "not Windows style. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Only for round buttons Return Value: TRUE means the switch setting is not latched. Return Value: Style for the separate line for the "text list" object long int GetItemBorderWidth(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). Return Value: Number value of the fill pattern of the bar in a bar display long int GetItemBorderStyle(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: TRUE corresponds to the "Windows style. You can only use this function on buttons. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName)." meaning the button is displayed according to Windows conventions. FALSE means a switch setting of off/not pressed.Global Scripts 08. BOOL GetToggle(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Return Value: Weight for the separate line for the "text list" object BOOL GetPressed(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName).

08. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-51 . double dAxisSection).18 graphics-set-axes Functions BOOL SetAlignment (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with bar objects Function: Determine whether the number display should be with exponents or decimals. BOOL bAlignment). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetAxisSection (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: dAxisSection = Axis section BOOL SetExponent (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE: The text is to the left of the bar.97 Global Scripts 4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means the number display on the axis is with decimals. Parameters: bExponent = Axis numbering with exponents/decimals TRUE means the number display on the axis is with exponents. BOOL bExponent). Only with bar objects Function: Set the units of measurement on the axis (the value difference between two neighboring axis labels).4. Parameters: bAlignment = Text located right or left of the bar. TRUE: The text is to the right of the bar. Only with bar objects Function: Set the location of the text (right/left) relative to the bar.

Parameters: bLongStrokesBold = Long axis sections bold/normal TRUE means the long axis sections in the scale representation of the bar are bold. 4-52 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 BOOL SetLeftComma (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bLongStrokesOnly = Exclusively long axis sections yes/no. long int lLeftComma). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bLongStrokesOnly). Only with bar objects Function: Set the number of digits to the left of the decimal point. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means the long axis sections in the scale representation of the bar are normal. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. TRUE means only long axis sections are used on the bar scale. Parameters: lLeftComma = Number of digits to the left of the decimal point BOOL SetLongStrokesBold (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means long axis sections and sub-sections are used on the bar scale. BOOL bLongStrokesBold).Global Scripts 08. Only with bar objects Function: Set whether the long axis sections in the scale representation should be displayed as bold or normal. BOOL SetLongStrokesOnly (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with bar objects Function: Determine whether only long axis sections or the sub-sections are also used on the bar scale.

long int lScaleTicks). long int lRightComma).97 Global Scripts BOOL SetLongStrokesSize(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with bar objects Function: Set the number of digits to the right of the decimal point (0 to 20) in the axis labeling. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lLongStrokesSize = Length of the long axis sections BOOL SetRightComma (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Only with bar objects Function: Set the length of the long axis sections on the bar scale. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Only with bar objects Function: Set the scale marks within the bar as a percentage of the entire bar height. Only with bar objects Function: Turn the scale on and off. long int lLongStrokesSize). Parameters: lScaleTicks = Scale marks as a percentage of the entire bar height BOOL SetScaling (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bScaling = Scale on/off TRUE means "with scale" FALSE means "without scale" WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-53 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.08. BOOL bScaling). Parameters: lRightComma = Number of digits to the right of the decimal point BOOL SetScaleTicks (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

Parameters: lScalingType 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: = Type of bar scaling Linear (same weight) Logarithmic (low values emphasized) Negative logarithmic (high values emphasized) Automatic (linear) Tangent (high and low values emphasized) Squared (high values emphasized) Cubic (high values heavily emphasized) 4-54 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08. long int lScalingType).97 BOOL SetScalingType(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Only with bar objects Function: Set the type of bar scaling.

08. long int lBackColor).19 graphics-set-color Functions BOOL SetBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the bottom/right background color for slider objects. Parameters: lBackColor3 = Number value of the bar background color for bar objects BOOL SetBackColorBottom(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the color of the bar background for bar objects. Parameters: lBackColor2 = Number value of the bar color for bar objects BOOL SetBackColor3 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 Global Scripts 4. long int lBackColor3). BOOL SetBackColor2 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lBackColorBottom). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the background color of the object. Parameters: lBackColor = Number value of the background color of the object Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. long int lBackColor2). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the bar color for bar objects. Parameters: lBackColorBottom = Number value of the bar background color WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-55 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.4.

long int lBorderColorBottom). long int lBorderColor). long int lBorderBackColor). Parameters: lBackColorTop = Number value of the bar background color BOOL SetBorderBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the line or border color. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 BOOL SetBackColorTop(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. Parameters: lBorderColor = Number value of the line or border color BOOL SetBorderColorBottom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the color for the right and bottom part (shadow) of the 3D border . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lBackColorTop). Function: Set the line or border background color. Parameters: lBorderColorBottom = Number value of the 3D shadow color 4-56 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the top/left background color for slider objects. Parameters: lBorderBackColor = Number value of the line or border background color BOOL SetBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Parameters: lColorBottom = Number value of the color of the bottom/right part of a slider BOOL SetColorTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lBorderColorTop). Function: Set the color for the bottom/right part of a slider . Function: Set the color for the left and top part of the 3D border. Parameters: lBorderColorTop = Number value of the left and top 3D border color BOOL SetButtonColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the color for the top/left slider position.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetBorderColorTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lButtonColor = Number value of the button color in slider objects BOOL SetColorBottom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lColorTop = Number value of the color for the top/left slider position WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-57 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.08. Function: Set the button color for slider objects. long int lButtonColor). long int lColorTop). long int lColorBottom). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

long int lFillColor). long int lItemBorderBackColor). BOOL SetForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lItemBorderBackColor = Number value of the background color BOOL SetItemBorderColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the fill pattern color.97 BOOL SetFillColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lForeColor).Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lItemBorderColor). Parameters: lForeColor = Number value of the text color BOOL SetItemBorderBackColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lFillColor = Number value of the fill pattern color Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the separate line color for the "text list" object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lItemBorderColor = Number value of the separate line color 4-58 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Function: Set the separate line background color for the "text list" object. Function: Set the color of the text in the object. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lSelBGColor = Background color for the selected entry BOOL SetSelTextColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the trend color in bar objects. Parameters: lScaleColor = Number value of the scale color in bar objects BOOL SetSelBGColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lTrendColor). Function: Set the background color for the selected entry in the browser list for the "text list" object. Function: Set the scale color for bar objects.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetScaleColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lSelTextColor). long int lScaleColor). Parameters: lSelTextColor = Text color for the selected entry BOOL SetTrendColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the text color for the selected entry in the browser list for the "text list" object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lSelBGColor). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lTrendColor = Number value of the trend color in bar objects WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-59 .08.

Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lUnselTextColor = Number value for the text color 4-60 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 BOOL SetUnselBGColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lUnselBGColor = Background color for unselected entries in the browser list BOOL SetUnselTextColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the text color for unselected entries in the browser list for the "text list" object. Function: Set the background color for unselected entries in the browser list for the "text list" object. long int lUnselBGColor). long int lUnselTextColor).

long int lFillingIndex). Parameters: lFillingIndex = Number value of the filling index WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-61 .20 graphics-set-fill Functions BOOL SetFilling (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bFilling). Function: Set the filling index.08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means dynamic filling with the background color is inactive. Parameters: bFilling = Dynamic filling with the background color active/inactive TRUE means dynamic filling with the background color is active. Function: Activate/deactivate dynamic filling with the background color.97 Global Scripts 4.4. BOOL SetFillingIndex (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

4. Parameters: lBorderFlashColorOn = Number value of the border or line color when the flashing attribute is switched on 4-62 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . long int lBackFlashColorOff). Parameters: lBackFlashColorOff = Number value of the background color when flashing attribute is switched off BOOL SetBackFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lBorderFlashColorOn). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the border or line color when the flashing attribute is switched on. long int lBorderFlashColorOff). Parameters: lBackFlashColorOn = Number value of the background color when the flashing attribute is switched on BOOL SetBorderFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lBackFlashColorOn). Function: Set the background color when the flashing attribute is switched on.Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 4.21 graphics-set-flash Functions BOOL SetBackFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the background color when the flashing attribute is switched off. Function: Set the border or line color when the flashing attribute is switched off. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lBorderFlashColorOff = Number value of the border or line color when the flashing attribute is switched off BOOL SetBorderFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

BOOL SetFlashForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Activate the flashing border or line. Function: Set the background flash frequency. FALSE means border or line flashing is inactive. Function: Activate or deactivate background flashing. BOOL bFlashBackColor). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means text flashing is inactive. Parameters: bFlashBorderColor = Flashing border or line active/inactive TRUE means border or line flashing is active. Function: Activate the text flashing. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lFlashRateBackColor = Background flash frequency WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-63 . long int lFlashRateBackColor). BOOL SetFlashRateBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bFlashBackColor = Background flashing active/inactive TRUE means background flashing is active. FALSE means background flashing is inactive. BOOL SetFlashBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bFlashForeColor).97 Global Scripts BOOL SetFlashBackColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bFlashForeColor = Text flashing active/not active TRUE means text flashing is active.08. BOOL bFlashBorderColor).

Function: Set the line or border flash frequency. Function: Set the text color when the flashing attribute is switched on. Parameters: lFlashRateForeColor = Text flash frequency BOOL SetForeFlashColorOff (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lForeFlashColorOff). Function: Set the text color when the flashing attribute is switched off.Global Scripts 08. Function: Set the text flash frequency. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lFlashRateBorderColor).97 BOOL SetFlashRateBorderColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lForeFlashColorOff = Number value of the text color when the flashing attribute is switched off BOOL SetForeFlashColorOn (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lFlashRateForeColor). Parameters: lFlashRateBorderColor = Line or border flash frequency BOOL SetFlashRateForeColor (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lForeFlashColorOn). Parameters: lForeFlashColorOn = Number value of the text color when the flashing attribute is switched on 4-64 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

Parameters: lAlignmentTop = Number value of the vertical alignment of the text (top. Function: Set the horizontal alignment (aligned left. bottom) BOOL SetFontBold (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bFontBold = "Bold" on/off TRUE means "Bold" is on. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName). FALSE means "Bold" is off. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.23 graphics-set-font Functions BOOL SetAlignmentLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Turns the "Bold" text attribute on and off. long int lAlignmentTop). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.08. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-65 . centered.22 graphics-set-focus-Functions BOOL Set_Focus(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Places the focus on the specified object 4. aligned right) of the text BOOL SetAlignmentTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.4. BOOL bFontBold). Parameters: lAlignmentLeft = Number value of the horizontal alignment (aligned left. aligned right) of the text.97 Global Scripts 4. centered. bottom). long int lAlignmentLeft).4. center. center. Function: Set the vertical alignment of the text (top. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

Parameters: lFontSize = Font size BOOL SetFontUnderline (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. BOOL bFontUnderline). Parameters: bFontItalic = "Italic" on/off TRUE means "Italic" is on. Parameters: szFontName = Pointer to the name of the font BOOL SetFontSize (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bFontItalic). FALSE means "Underline" is off. char* szFontName). Function: Set the font size. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lFontSize). FALSE means "Italic" is off. 4-66 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Function: Turns the "Underline" text attribute on and off. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetFontName (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Turn the "Italic" text attribute on and off. Parameters: bFontUnderline = Text style "Underline" on/off TRUE means "Underline" is on.97 BOOL SetFontItalic (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set a font.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means vertical text direction. For radio.and check-boxes. Parameters: bOrientation = Horizontal/vertical text direction TRUE means horizontal text direction. Parameters: szText = Pointer to static text WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-67 . char* szText). Function: Set a pointer to a static text. Function: Set the direction of the text (horizontal/vertical). as well as for polygons and polylines. BOOL bOrientation).08.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetOrientation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetText (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. the element or point has to be set with the SetIndex function before calling the SetText function.

BOOL SetDirection (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Set the current point of the polygon with the SetIndex function. Parameters: lDirection 4-68 = Number value of the bar direction (up.Global Scripts 08.4. Function: Set the bar direction (up. long int lActualPointTop). long int lDirection). Function: Set the current vertical position of the corner point for a polygon or a polyline in relation to the origin of the picture. down. long int lBoxCount). left. Parameters: lActualPointLeft = X value (horizontal position) of the corner point for a polygon or polyline BOOL SetActualPointTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. left. or right) in bar objects. Set the current point of the polygon with the SetIndex function. Function: Set the number of check boxes in a check box area or option buttons in an option group. Parameters: lActualPointTop = Y value (vertical position) of the corner point for a polygon or polyline BOOL SetBoxCount (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. or right) in bar objects WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 4.24 graphics-set-geometry Functions BOOL SetActualPointLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lBoxCount = Number of check boxes in a check box area or option buttons in an option group. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the current horizontal position of the corner point for a polygon or polyline in relation to the origin of the picture. down. long int lActualPointLeft).

Function: Set the number of corners for a polygon or polyline. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. Function: Set end angle of pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and ellipse arc s. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lEndAngle). long int lLeft). Parameters: lHeight = Height of the rectangle surrounding an object Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture.08. Parameters: lLeft = X value (location on the X axis) of the left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding an object BOOL SetPointCount (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lPointCount = Number of corners WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-69 . long int lHeight). long int lPointCount). Function: Set the height of the rectangle surrounding an object.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetEndAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL SetLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lEndAngle = End angle of pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and ellipse arc s BOOL SetHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the location on the X axis of the left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding an object.

long int lReferenceRotationLeft ). long int lRadiusWidth). polygon and polyline. Parameters: lReferenceRotationLeft = X value of the rotation reference 4-70 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08. Function: Set the vertical radius of an ellipse. Function: Set the radius of a circle. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lRadius). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lRadius = Radius BOOL SetRadiusHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lRadiusHeight). an ellipse segment. Function: Set the X value of the rotation reference (the reference point around which the object is rotated). Parameters: lRadiusWidth = Horizontal radius BOOL SetReferenceRotationLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the horizontal radius of an ellipse . pie segment.97 BOOL SetRadius (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Valid for line. or an ellipse arc. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. or circular arc. Parameters: lRadiusHeight = Vertical radius BOOL SetRadiusWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. or an ellipse arc. an ellipse segment. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. polygon. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the horizontal radius of the corner of a rounded rectangle.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetReferenceRotationTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Valid for line. Valid for line. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.08. Function: Set the vertical radius of the corner of a rounded rectangle. polygon. Parameters: lReferenceRotationTop = Y value of the rotation reference BOOL SetRotationAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lRoundCornerWidth). Parameters: lRoundCornerHeight = Vertical radius BOOL SetRoundCornerWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. and polyline Function: Set the clockwise rotation angle (in degrees) of the object around the rotation point. long int lReferenceRotationTop). long int lRoundCornerHeight). Parameters: lRoundCornerWidth = Horizontal radius WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-71 . and polyline Function: Set the Y value of the rotation reference (the reference point around which the object is rotated). long int lRotationAngle). Parameters: lRotationAngle = Rotation angle BOOL SetRoundCornerHeight (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Parameters: lWidth = Width of the rectangle surrounding an object Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. Parameters: lZeroPoint = Zero point in bar objects 4-72 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Function: Set the Y axis value of the left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding an object.Global Scripts 08. long int lTop). Function: Set the zero point in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lStartAngle = Beginning angle BOOL SetTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lZeroPoint).97 BOOL SetStartAngle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. BOOL SetZeroPoint (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the beginning angle for pie and ellipse segments as well as circular and ellipse arcs. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lStartAngle). Parameters: lTop = Y axis value of the left upper corner of the rectangle surrounding an object BOOL SetWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the width of the rectangle surrounding an object. long int lWidth).

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means the system does not accept the input as soon as the field is exited. BOOL bAssumeOnExit). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 Global Scripts 4. Function: Set the relevant bit in the output value for the "bit" list type. Parameters: bAssumeOnExit = Accept the input as soon as the field is exited: yes/no. Only with I/O fields Function: Set the system to accept the input as soon as the field is exited (using the Tab or Enter key). Only with I/O fields Function: Set the system to exit the input field automatically (without Tab or Enter key) and accept the input as soon as the input has been completed (the specified number of characters was entered). BOOL bAssumeOnFull). BOOL SetAssumeOnFull (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.4. BOOL SetBitNumber(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bAssumeOnFull = Value accepted as soon as the input has been completed: yes/no TRUE means the system automatically accepts the input as soon as the input has been completed.08. FALSE means the system does not automatically accept the input as soon as the input has been completed. TRUE means the system accepts the input as soon as the field is exited.25 graphics-set-i_o Functions BOOL SetAssumeOnExit (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lBitNumber). Parameters: lBitNumber = Relevant bit in the output value WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-73 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetClearOnNew (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bHiddenInput). FALSE means the system does not delete the field entry when there is a new entry. Parameters: bClearOnError = Automatically delete the field entry in the input field when there is an invalid input: yes/no TRUE means the field entry is deleted automatically when there is an invalid input. BOOL bClearOnError). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 BOOL SetClearOnError (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. 4-74 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: bClearOnNew = Delete the field entry in the input field when there is a new entry: yes/no TRUE means the system deletes the field entry when there is a new entry. FALSE means the input is not hidden. BOOL bClearOnNew). BOOL SetHiddenInput (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. TRUE means the input is hidden. An asterisk (*) is displayed for each character. Only with I/O fields Function: Hide the input value during input. FALSE means the field entry is not deleted automatically when there is an invalid input. Parameters: bHiddenInput = Hidden input: yes/no.Global Scripts 08. Only with I/O fields Function: Set the field entry in the input field to be deleted when there is a new entry. Only with I/O fields Function: Set the field entry in the input field to be deleted automatically when there is an invalid input.

Function: Set the number of visible rows in a browser list for the "text list" object. Parameters: szOutputValueChar = Pointer to the output value BOOL SetOutputValueDouble (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetNumberLines(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. char* szOutputValueChar). Only with I/O fields Function: Set a pointer to the output value. the browser list receives a vertical scroll bar. Only with I/O fields Function: Set the output value. double dOutputValueDouble). Note: If the number of configured text is larger than the number of visible rows. long int lNumberLines).08. Parameters: lNumberLines = Number of visible rows BOOL SetOutputValueChar (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: dOutputValueDouble = Output value WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-75 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bCheckAlarmHigh). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.Global Scripts 08. Function: Set the alarm high limit in bar objects. Parameters: dAlarmHigh = Alarm high limit BOOL SetAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. 4-76 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . BOOL SetCheckAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: dAlarmLow = Alarm low limit BOOL SetCheckAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the limit value for "alarm high" is not monitored. BOOL bCheckAlarmLow). Function: Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "alarm high. Function: Set the alarm low limit in bar objects." Parameters: bCheckAlarmHigh = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means the limit value for "alarm high" is monitored. double dAlarmHigh).97 4." Parameters: bCheckAlarmLow = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means the limit value for "alarm low" is monitored. double dAlarmLow). Function: Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "alarm low. FALSE means the limit value for "alarm low" is not monitored.4.26 graphics-set-limits Functions BOOL SetAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Parameters: bCheckLimitHigh5 = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is monitored. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bCheckLimitHigh5). Function: Set the monitoring function for the high limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects. Function: Set the monitoring function for the high limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects. FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is not monitored. BOOL bCheckLimitLow4). WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-77 . FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is not monitored.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetCheckLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL SetCheckLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: bCheckLimitLow4 = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is monitored. BOOL bCheckLimitHigh4). BOOL SetCheckLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the monitoring function for the low limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects. FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is not monitored. Parameters: bCheckLimitHigh4 = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is monitored.08.

FALSE means that the limit value for "tolerance low" is not monitored. Parameters: bCheckToleranceHigh = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means that the limit value for "tolerance high" is monitored. BOOL bCheckToleranceHigh). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: bCheckToleranceLow = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means that the limit value for "tolerance low" is monitored.Global Scripts 08. Function: Set the monitoring function for the low limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetCheckToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means that the limit value for "tolerance high" is not monitored. BOOL bCheckToleranceLow). BOOL bCheckLimitLow5). 4-78 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Function: Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "tolerance high" in bar objects. FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is not monitored. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetCheckToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bCheckLimitLow5 = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is monitored. Function: Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "tolerance low" in bar objects.97 BOOL SetCheckLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

long int lColorAlarmHigh). FALSE means that the limit value for "warning high" is not monitored. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means that the limit value for "warning low" is not monitored.08. Parameters: lColorAlarmLow = Number value of the bar color WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-79 . Function: Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "warning high" in bar objects.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetCheckWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the monitoring function for the limit value for "warning low" in bar objects. BOOL bCheckWarningLow). BOOL SetCheckWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bCheckWarningHigh). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetColorAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the bar color when the limit value of "alarm high" is reached. Parameters: bCheckWarningLow = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means that the limit value for "warning low" is monitored. long int lColorAlarmLow). Parameters: bCheckWarningHigh = Monitor: yes/no TRUE means that the limit value for "warning high" is monitored. Function: Set the bar color when the limit value of "alarm low" is reached. Parameters: lColorAlarmHigh = Number value of the bar color BOOL SetColorAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Function: Set the bar color when the low limit value of "reserve 5" is reached in bar objects. Parameters: lColorLimitLow5 = Number value of the bar color 4-80 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the bar color when the low limit value of "reserve 4" is reached in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lColorLimitHigh4 = Number value of the bar color BOOL SetColorLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lColorLimitHigh5 = Number value of the bar color BOOL SetColorLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 BOOL SetColorLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lColorLimitHigh5). long int lColorLimitHigh4). Function: Set the bar color when the high limit value of "reserve 5" is reached in bar objects.Global Scripts 08. Parameters: lColorLimitLow4 = Number value of the bar color BOOL SetColorLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lColorLimitLow5). long int lColorLimitLow4). Function: Set the bar color when the high limit value of "reserve 4" is reached in bar objects.

08. Function: Set the bar color when the limit value of "tolerance high" is reached in bar objects. long int lColorWarningLow). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lColorWarningLow = Number value of the bar color WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-81 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lColorWarningHigh).97 Global Scripts BOOL SetColorToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the bar color when the limit value of "tolerance low" is reached in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lColorToleranceLow = Number value of the bar color BOOL SetColorWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lColorToleranceLow). Function: Set the bar color when the limit value of "warning low" is reached in bar objects. Parameters: lColorWarningHigh = Number value of the bar color BOOL SetColorWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the bar color when the limit value of "warning high" is reached in bar objects. long int lColorToleranceHigh). Parameters: lColorToleranceHigh = Number value of the bar color BOOL SetColorToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Function: Set the high limit value for I/O field s. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. double dLimitHigh4). Parameters: dLimitLow4 = Low limit value for "reserve 4" BOOL SetLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: dLimitLow5 = Low limit value for "reserve 5" BOOL SetLimitMax (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the low limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects.Global Scripts 08. Parameters: dLimitHigh5 = High limit value for "reserve 5" BOOL SetLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: dLimitMax 4-82 = High limit value WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 BOOL SetLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the high limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects. double dLimitMax). Function: Set the high limit value for "reserve 5" in bar objects. double dLimitLow4). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: dLimitHigh4 = High limit value for "reserve 4" BOOL SetLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. double dLimitLow5). double dLimitHigh5). Function: Set the low limit value for "reserve 4" in bar objects.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.08. Parameters: dToleranceLow = Limit value for "tolerance low" WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-83 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: dLimitMin = Low limit value BOOL SetMarker (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: dToleranceHigh = Limit value for "tolerance high" BOOL SetToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bMarker). Function: Set the low limit value for I/O fields. Function: Set the limit value for "tolerance low" in bar objects. Function: Set the display of the limit value in bar objects. double dLimitMin). Parameters: bMarker = Limit value display: on/off TRUE means the limit value is displayed as a scale value in bar objects. double dToleranceLow). BOOL SetToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the limit value for "tolerance high" in bar objects. double dToleranceHigh).97 Global Scripts BOOL SetLimitMin (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the limit value is not displayed in bar objects.

Function: Set the manner in which the limit value for "alarm low" is provided in bar objects. Parameters: bTypeLimitHigh4 = High limit value for "reserve 4" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as a percentage. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means the limit value for "alarm high" is provided as an absolute. Function: Set the manner in which the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided in bar objects. BOOL SetTypeAlarmLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bTypeAlarmHigh). Function: Set the manner in which the limit value for "alarm high" is provided in bar objects. BOOL bTypeAlarmLow). FALSE means the limit value for "alarm low" is provided as an absolute. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: bTypeAlarmLow = Limit value for "alarm low" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the limit value for "alarm low" is provided as a percentage. BOOL SetTypeLimitHigh4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.97 BOOL SetTypeAlarmHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as an absolute. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.Global Scripts 08. 4-84 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . BOOL bTypeLimitHigh4). Parameters: bTypeAlarmHigh = Limit value for "alarm high" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the limit value for "alarm high" is provided as a percentage.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-85 . BOOL SetTypeLimitLow5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as an absolute. Function: Set the manner in which the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided in bar objects.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTypeLimitHigh5 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bTypeLimitLow5). Parameters: bTypeLimitHigh5 = High limit value for "reserve 5" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as a percentage. Parameters: bTypeLimitLow4 = Low limit value for "reserve 4" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as a percentage. Function: Set the manner in which the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided in bar objects. FALSE means the low limit value for "reserve 4" is provided as an absolute. BOOL SetTypeLimitLow4 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bTypeLimitLow4). FALSE means the high limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as an absolute. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: bTypeLimitLow5 = Low limit value for "reserve 5" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided as a percentage.08. Function: Set the manner in which the low limit value for "reserve 5" is provided in bar objects. BOOL bTypeLimitHigh5).

Function: Set the manner in which the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided in bar objects. Parameters: bTypeWarningHigh = Limit value for "warning high" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the limit value for "warning high" is provided as a percentage. Parameters: bTypeToleranceLow = Limit value for "tolerance low" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided as a percentage. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the manner in which the limit value for "warning high" is provided in bar objects. FALSE means the limit value for "warning high" is provided as an absolute. BOOL SetTypeWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bTypeToleranceLow). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bTypeToleranceHigh). BOOL bTypeWarningHigh).97 BOOL SetTypeToleranceHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided as an absolute. 4-86 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . FALSE means the limit value for "tolerance low" is provided as an absolute. BOOL SetTypeToleranceLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. Function: Set the manner in which the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided in bar objects. Parameters: bTypeToleranceHigh = Limit value for "tolerance high" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the limit value for "tolerance high" is provided as a percentage.

double dWarningLow). double dWarningHigh). FALSE means the limit value for "warning low" is provided as an absolute.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTypeWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bTypeWarningLow).08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: bTypeWarningLow = Limit value for "warning low" as percentage or absolute TRUE means the limit value for "warning low" is provided as a percentage. Parameters: dWarningLow = Limit value for "warning low" WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-87 . Function: Set the limit value for "warning high" in bar objects. Parameters: dWarningHigh = Limit value for "warning high" BOOL SetWarningLow (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the manner in which the limit value for "warning low" is provided in bar objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the limit value for "warning low" in bar objects. BOOL SetWarningHigh (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

} 4-88 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 ...cwCycle = 3. LPLINKINFO() pLink). „Tag1“). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. &linkinfo).Global Scripts 08. dwCycle.4.97 4. SetLink( .27 graphics-set-link Functions BOOL SetLink(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.. LinkTyp: 1 direct tag link 2 indirect tag link dwCycle: 0 Upon change 1 250 ms 2 500 ms 3 1s 4 2s 5 5s 6 10 s 7 1 min 8 5 min 9 10 min 10 1 hr 11-15 User cycle 1 to 5 szLinkName: The tag name Example: { LINKINFO linkinfo. linkinfo.szLinkName. Parameters: lpszPropertyName = Object property pLink = Address entry of the tag link structure Structure: The tag structure consists of the LinkTyp. strcpy(linkinfo. Function: Create a tag link of object properties. and szLinkName parameters.lLinkType = 1..LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName. linkinfo.

08. FALSE means the last 15 values will not be averaged. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: bAverage = Average the values: yes/no TRUE means the last 15 values will be averaged. FALSE means a color change for the entire bar. output field. Function: Set the field type of an I/O object (input field. input/output field) BOOL SetColorChangeType(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. input/output field). BOOL bAverage).28 graphics-set-misc Functions BOOL SetAverage (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-89 . long int lBoxType). Parameters: bColorChangeType = Type of color change: total/segment TRUE means a color change for the bar segment. BOOL bColorChangeType).4.97 Global Scripts 4. output field. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetBoxType (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lBoxType = Field type of an I/O object (input field. Function: Determine if the last 15 values in a bar object are averaged. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the type of color change for bars.

Function: Set the input for I/O fields. Function: Set the cursor mode for the picture. FALSE means that the immediate input attribute is set to "no" for I/O fields. Parameters: bCursorMode = Cursor mode: tab order sequence/alpha cursor sequence TRUE means that the cursor mode for the picture is an alpha cursor sequence. without having to carry out any further action). Parameters: bCursorControl = Cursor control: on/off TRUE means that the cursor control is turned on in I/O field s (an alpha cursor jumps to the next field in the TAB sequence after exiting the current field). Parameters: bEditAtOnce = Immediate input: yes/no TRUE means that the immediate input attribute is set to "yes" for I/O field s (you can make an input immediately upon accessing the I/O field with the Tab key. BOOL SetCursorMode (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE means that the cursor control is turned off in I/O fields. FALSE means that the cursor mode for the picture is a tab order sequence. 4-90 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . BOOL SetEditAtOnce (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bEditAtOnce).97 BOOL SetCursorControl (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.Global Scripts 08. BOOL bCursorControl). Function: Set the cursor control for I/O fields. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bCursorMode).

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the extended operation for sliders. double dMax). BOOL SetHysteresis (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: dMax = Maximum value WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-91 . Function: Set the absolute value for a full value view with bar and slider objects. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the hysteresis in the bar object display (hysteresis as a percent of the display value). Function: Set the display for bar objects (with or without hysteresis). BOOL bHysteresis). BOOL bExtendedOperation). Parameters: dHysteresisRange = Hysteresis BOOL SetMax (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bExtendedOperation = Extended operation: yes/no TRUE means that the extended operation attribute is set to "yes" for sliders (the slider is set to a new appropriate minimum/maximum limit value by clicking on the area outside of the current slider setting) FALSE means that the extended operation attribute is set to "no" for sliders. FALSE means that the display occurs without hysteresis. double dHysteresisRange).08. BOOL SetHysteresisRange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetExtendedOperation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bHysteresis = Display with or without hysteresis TRUE means that the display occurs with hysteresis.

double dMin). Function: Determine whether objects can be controlled. Parameters: bOperation = Object can be controlled: yes/no TRUE means that the object can be controlled. long int lOffsetLeft). BOOL bOperation). Function: Set the vertical distance of the picture from the top edge of the window in picture windows. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 BOOL SetMin (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the absolute value for the smallest value view for bar and slider objects. long int lOffsetTop). Function: Set the horizontal distance of the picture from the left edge of the window in picture windows. FALSE means that the object cannot be controlled. Parameters: lOffsetTop = Picture offset BOOL SetOperation (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: dMin = Minium value BOOL SetOffsetLeft (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. 4-92 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Parameters: lOffsetLeft = Picture offset BOOL SetOffsetTop (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

and OLE control. Function: Determine whether the reason for operator activity in objects is reported. Parameters: bOperationReport = The reason for operator activity is reported: yes/no TRUE means that the reason for operator activity is reported. BOOL SetOperationReport (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. FALSE means that the reason for operator activity is not reported.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetOperationMessage (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. check box. BOOL bOperationReport). BOOL bOperationMessage). the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. and slider objects Function: Determine whether a message is output when an operation is successfully carried out. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-93 . FALSE means that no message is output when an operation is successfully carried out.08. Valid for the I/O field. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: bOperationMessage = A message is output when an operation is successfully carried out: yes/no TRUE means that a message is output when an operation is successfully carried out. picture windows. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Valid for all objects except application windows. option button.

Function: Set the authorization level for controlling the object. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. Parameters: dProcess = Value of the default BOOL SetSmallChange (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. For check boxes and option groups: Select the box(es). BOOL SetPictureName (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. and OLE control. check box. char* szPictureName). Function: Set a pointer to the name of a picture contained in a picture object. Parameters: lSmallChange = Number of steps set 4-94 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . long int lSmallChange). and option group objects. double dProcess). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: For sliders and bars: Set the value of the presetting for the process value to be displayed. Valid for all objects except application windows. Function: Set the number of steps the slider can be moved with a mouse click. Parameters: lPasswordLevel = Authorization level Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. long int lPasswordLevel). Parameters: szPictureName = Pointer to the name of the picture BOOL SetProcess (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. bar. Valid for the slider. picture windows.97 BOOL SetPasswordLevel (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. FALSE means that the object is not displayed. double dZeroPointValue).08. Parameters: bVisible = Object is displayed: yes/no TRUE means that the object is displayed. BOOL bVisible). Function: Set the trend display in bar objects. Function: Set the zoom factor for a picture window. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE means that the trend is not displayed in a bar object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lZoom = Zoom factor WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-95 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the absolute value for the zero point in a bar display. Function: Determine whether an object is displayed. Parameters: bTrend = Display trend: yes/no TRUE means that the trend is displayed in a bar object. BOOL bTrend). BOOL SetVisible (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lZoom).97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTrend (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. Parameters: dZeroPointValue = Absolute value for the zero point BOOL SetZoom (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetZeroPointValue (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Function: Set the minimum setting range for the OCX slider.Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the maximum setting range for the OCX slider. Parameters: lRangeMin = Minimum setting range for the OCX slider 4-96 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .29 graphics-set-ole_control Functions BOOL SetPosition(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lRangeMax = Maximum setting range for the OCX slider BOOL SetRangeMin(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lRangeMax).4. long int lRangeMin). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lPosition = Slider position of the OCX slider BOOL SetRangeMax(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Function: Set the slider position for the OCX slider. long int lPosition).

*. Function: Set the picture name for the "off/not pressed" status of a round button. char* szPictureUp).wmf) can be linked.wmf) can be linked. Parameters: szPictureDown = Picture name for the "on/pressed" status BOOL SetPictureUp(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. *. Function: Set the picture name for the "deactivated" state of a round button. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.bmp.30 graphics-set-pictures Functions BOOL SetPictureDeactivated(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: szPictureUp = Picture name for the "off/not pressed" status BOOL SetPicDeactTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.emf. char* szPictureDeactivated).emf. Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics.4.dib) as well as metafiles (*. *. Function: Set the picture name for the "on/pressed" status of a round button. Bitmap files (*.bmp. long int lPicDeactTransparent). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.emf. Parameters: szPictureDeactivated = Picture name for the "deactivated" state BOOL SetPictureDown(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.bmp. Bitmap files (*. Function: Set the transparent color for the "deactivated" status of a round button. Bitmap files (*. *. Parameters: lPicDeactTransparent = Transparent color for the "deactivated" status WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-97 .wmf) can be linked.08.dib) as well as metafiles (*. *.97 Global Scripts 4.dib) as well as metafiles (*. *. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. char* szPictureDown).

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. FALSE Do not use transparent color for the "on/pressed" sta tus.97 BOOL SetPicDeactUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bPicDeactUseTransColor). BOOL SetPicDownTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lPicDownTransparent).Global Scripts 08. 4-98 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . FALSE Do not use transparent color for the "deactivated" status. Parameters: bPicDownUseTransColor = Transparent color yes/no TRUE Use transparent color for the "on/pressed" status. Function: Control the transparent color for the "deactivated" status of a round button Parameters: bPicDeactUseTransColor = Transparent color yes/no TRUE Use transparent color for the "deactivated" status. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bPicDownUseTransColor). Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. Function: Control the transparent color for the "on/pressed" status of a round button. Function: Set the transparent color for the "on/pressed" status of a round button. Parameters: lPicDownTransparent = Transparent color for the "on/pressed" status BOOL SetPicDownUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lPicUpTransparent). Parameters: lPicUpTransparent = Transparent color "off/not pressed" WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-99 . Function: Set the transparent color of the background picture of a graphic object. Function: Set the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status of a round button.08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetPicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. long int lPicTransColor). Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. Parameters: lPicTransColor = Transparent color of the background picture BOOL SetPicUpTransparent(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

97 BOOL SetPicUpUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: bPicUseTransColor = Transparent color yes/no TRUE Use transparent color for the background picture. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Control the transparent color of the background picture of a graphic object. FALSE Do not use the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status. BOOL bPicUseTransColor). 4-100 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . FALSE Do not use transparent color fro the background picture. Function: Control the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status of a round button. BOOL bPicUpUseTransColor). Parameters: bPicUpUseTransColor = Transparent color yes/no TRUE Use the transparent color for the "off/not pressed" status.Global Scripts 08. BOOL SetPicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

//ReturnType BOOL The self-defined attribute of the OLE-Automation-Name “Visible1” of the customized object “CustomizedObject1” in the picture “Picture1” is set to FALSE. Parameters: lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute bValue = Value (TRUE.31 graphics-set-property-Funktionen BOOL SetPropBOOL(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName."CustomizedObject1". LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName. Parameters: lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute szValue = Zeiger on the value WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-101 ."Visible1".FALSE).4. BOOL SetPropChar(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.08. FALSE) Example: SetPropBOOL("Picture1". LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 Global Scripts 4. char* szValue) Function: Sets the attribute value to which the pointer szValue is pointing. BOOL bValue) Function: Sets the attribute with the value bValue.

Global Scripts 08. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute dValue = Value BOOL SetPropWord(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long lValue) Function: Sets the attribute with the value lValue.97 BOOL SetPropDouble(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lpszPropertyName = OLE-Automation-Name of the attribute lValue = Value 4-102 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . LPCTSTR lpszPropertyName. double dValue) Function: Sets the attribute with the value dValue.

32 graphics-set-state Functions BOOL SetBasePicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.08. BOOL SetFlashFlashPicture(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lBasePicTransColor). Function: Set the transparent color of the base picture of a status display. Parameters: lBasePicTransColor = Transparent color of the base picture BOOL SetBasePicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. Parameters: bBasePicUseTransColor = Transparent color yes/no TRUE Use the transparent color in the base picture . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bBasePicUseTransColor). Parameters: bFlashFlashPicture = Transparent color yes/no TRUE Flash picture dynamic FALSE Flash picture static WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-103 .4. BOOL bFlashFlashPicture). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Control the transparent color of the base picture of a status display. FALSE Do not use the transparent color in the base picture . Function: Control the flashing of the flash picture in a status display.97 Global Scripts 4.

Parameters: bFlashPicUseTransColor = Transparent color yes/no TRUE Use transparent color in the flash picture . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.Global Scripts 08. FALSE Do not use transparent color in the flash picture. Parameters: lFlashPicTransColor = Transparent color in the flash picture BOOL SetFlashPicUseTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. BOOL bFlashPicUseTransColor). Function: Control the transparent color of the flash picture in a status display. Function: Set the transparent color of the flash picture for a status display. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. 4-104 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 BOOL SetFlashPicTransColor(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Note: This function only applies to bitmap graphics. long int lFlashPicTransColor).

Parameters: lFlashRateFlashPic 0: 1: 2: 3: = Flash picture flash frequency No flash frequency Flash frequency slow (approximately 0. Parameters: lIndex = Index value WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-105 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. etc. memory. processor. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long int lFlashRateFlashPic).5 Hz) Flash frequency medium (approximately 2 Hz) Flash frequency fast (approximately 8 Hz) Note: Since flashing is a software implementation.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetFlashRateFlashPic(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. and therefore the current point of the object. long int lIndex). BOOL SetIndex(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. the frequency depends on the system and the hardware (number of objects. update time.). Function: Set the flash frequency of the flash picture in a status display.08. Function: Sets the index of a polygon or polyline.

Parameters: lBorderStyle = Number value of the line or border style BOOL SetBorderWidth (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lBackBorderWidth). long int lBorderStyle). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the weight of the border for 3D borders and slider objects.4.97 4. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lBorderEndStyle = Number value of the line end style BOOL SetBorderStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.33 graphics-set-style Functions BOOL SetBackBorderWidth(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Parameters: lBackBorderWidth = Border weight BOOL SetBorderEndStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. Parameters: lBorderWidth = Number value of the weight of the line or border 4-106 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Function: Set the line or border weight. Function: Set the line or border style. Function: Set the line end style. long int lBorderWidth).Global Scripts 08. long int lBorderEndStyle). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.

long int lFillStyle2). long int lBoxAlignment). Parameters: lFillStyle = Number value of the type of the fill pattern Note: If the call of the function relates to the entire picture. Function: Set the fill pattern. Parameters: lFillStyle2 = Number value of the fill pattern of a bar in a bar display BOOL SetItem BorderStyle(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Function: Set the fill pattern of a bar in a bar display.08. the lpszObjectName parameter must be = NULL. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL SetFillStyle2 (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetBoxAlignment (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long int lFillStyle). Function: Align the control elements in check boxes or option buttons to the left or right. Function: Set the separate line type for the "text list" object. Parameters: lItemBorderStyle = Number value of the separate line WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-107 . LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. long ind lItemBorderStyle). Parameters: lBoxAlignment = Number value of the alignment of the control elements in check boxes or option buttons to the left or right BOOL SetFillStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

4-108 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Parameters: lItemBorderWidth = Number value of the separate line weight BOOL SetPressed(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. long ind lItemBorderWidth). Parameters: bPressed = Switch setting of a round button TRUE Switch setting "on/pressed" FALSE Switch setting "off/not pressed". LPCTSTR lpszObjectName.Global Scripts 08. Valid only for round buttons Function: Control the switch setting of a round button. Function: Set the separate line weight for the "text list" object. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bPressed).97 BOOL SetItem BorderWidth(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName.

Parameters: bWindowStyle = "Windows Style" on/off TRUE corresponds to "Windows Style" which means that the button is displayed as is standard for Windows (gray buttons without borders)." which means you can set the look of the button yourself. Parameters: bToggle = Switch function latched or not latched TRUE Switch function not latched FALSE Switch function latched BOOL SetWindowsStyle (LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. BOOL bToggle). BOOL bWindowStyle). LPCTSTR lpszObjectName. Valid only for buttons Function: Turn the "Windows Style" on or off. Valid only for round buttons Function: Control the switch function latched or not latched.08.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetToggle(LPCTSTR lpszPictureName. FALSE corresponds to "not Windows Style. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-109 .

The return value of the set functions is the error code TRUE: no errors FALSE: an error occurred 4-110 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .97 4. You can reduce the communication network load significantly by implementing the appropriate get-wait or get-state-wait functions instead of the get or get-state functions because the tags are then no longer scanned cyclically for changes in this case.Global Scripts 08. The tags are not logged into the Control Center.5 Tag The Tag function category is divided into the following functions: get functions General get functions get state functions get wait functions get state wait functions set Functions General set functions set state functions set wait functions set state wait functions The wait functions differ from the other functions in that the tag values are accessed directly at the process. the processes can be better synchronized. Since the system waits until the wait functions are eectured.

97 Global Scripts 4.08.5. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "double" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag DWORD GetTagDWord (Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "short int" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag BYTE GetTagByte (Tag Tag_Name).1 tag-get-Functions short int GetTagBit (Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "DWORD" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-111 . Return Value: Pointer to the value of the process tag in the "char" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag double GetTagDouble (Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "BYTE" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag char* GetTagChar (Tag Tag_Name).

DWORD size). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "float" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag BOOL GetTagRaw (Tag Tag_Name. Return Value: Error code TRUE = no errors FALSE = an error occurred Function: Gets a value from the raw data type. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "signed char" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag long GetTagSDWord(Tag Tag_Name). BYTE* pValue. Parameters: Tag_Name pValue size = Name of the process tag = Byte pointer to a byte box that contains raw data = Size of the box in bytes signed char GetTagSByte(Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "long" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag 4-112 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08.97 float GetTagFloat (Tag Tag_Name).

LPDM_VAR_UPDATE_STRUCT lpdmresult.97 Global Scripts short GetTagSWord(Tag Tag_Name).08. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "short" data type. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "WORD" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-113 . Return Value: Error code TRUE = no errors FALSE = an error occurred Function: Enables the transfer of a value in the form of a variant. Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag BOOL GetTagValue (LPDM_VARKEY lpdmVarKey. Gets a pointer to the result structure that contains the value. LPCMN_ERROR lpdmError). Parameters: lpdmVarKey lpdmresult lpdmError = Pointer to the DM_VARKEY structure = Pointer to the value of the "variant" data type = Pointer to the structure that cont ains the error description WORD GetTagWord (Tag Tag_Name).

Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "double" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag 4-114 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Return Value: Pointer to the value of the process tag in the "char" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag double GetTagDoubleState (Tag Tag_Name. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "short int" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag BYTE GetTagByteState (Tag Tag_Name. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "BYTE" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag char* GetTagCharState (Tag Tag_Name. PDWORD lp_dwstate). PDWORD lp_dwstate). PDWORD lp_dwstate).5. PDWORD lp_dwstate).Global Scripts 08.2 tag-get-state Functions short int GetTagBitState (Tag Tag_Name.97 4.

Return Value: Error code TRUE = no errors FALSE = an error occurred Function: Value of the process tags in the raw data type. BYTE* pValue. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "float" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag BOOL GetTagRawState (Tag Tag_Name. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "signed char" data type. DWORD size. PDWORD lp_dwstate).08. PDWORD lp_dwstate).97 Global Scripts DWORD GetTagDWordState (Tag Tag_Name. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "DWORD" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag float GetTagFloatState (Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: Tag_Name pValue size lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Byte pointer to a byte box that contains raw data = Size of the box in bytes = Status of the tag signed char GetTagSByteState(Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-115 .

PDWORD lp_dwstate).97 long GetTagSDWordState(Tag Tag_Name.Global Scripts 08. Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag short GetTagSWordState(Tag Tag_Name. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "WORD" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag 4-116 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . PDWORD lp_dwstate). PDWORD lp_dwstate). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "long" data type. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "short" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag WORD GetTagWordState (Tag Tag_Name.

08. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "double" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag DWORD GetTagDWordWait(Tag Tag_Name). Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag BYTE GetTagByteWait(Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Pointer to the value of the process tag in the "char" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag double GetTagDoubleWait(Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "VARIANT_BOOL" data type.97 Global Scripts 4. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "BYTE" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag char* GetTagCharWait(Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "DWORD" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-117 .3 tag-get-wait Functions VARIANT_BOOL GetTagBitWait(Tag Tag_Name).5.

Followed by the tag name and the address of the value.97 float GetTagFloatWait(Tag Tag_Name)... Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "float" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag BOOL GetTagMultiWait(const char* pFormat. Example: DWORD dwTag1Value. "Tag2". Return Value: TRUE = no errors FALSE = an error occurred Function: Get a value from the raw data type. DWORD size). ok=GetTagMultiWait ("%d %s. Parameters: pFormat = Format description like at the function printfs. //Storage for the tag value is created by the function with SysMalloc BOOL ok. "Tag1".Global Scripts 08.. BOOL GetTagRawWait(Tag Tag_Name . Parameters: Tag_Name pValue size = Name of the process tag = Byte pointer to a byte box that contains raw data = Size of the box in bytes 4-118 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .) Return Value: TRUE = no error occurred FALSE = an error occurred Function: The values of multiple tags are determined and stored at the corresponding addresses in the indicated format. &dwTag1Value. &szTag2Value). char* szTag2Value. BYTE pValue[].

08. LPDM_VAR_UPDATE_STRUCT lpdmresult. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "signed char" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag long GetTagSDWordWait(Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "long" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag short GetTagSWordWait(Tag Tag_Name). Get the pointer to the result structure that contains the value. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "short" data type. Return Value: TRUE = no errors FALSE = an error occurred Function: Allow the transmission of a value in the form of a variant.97 Global Scripts signed char GetTagSByteWait(Tag Tag_Name). Parameters: lpdmVarKey lpdmresult lpdmError = Pointer to the DM_VARKEY structure = Pointer to the value of the "Variant" data type = Pointer to the structure that contains the error description WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-119 . LPCMN_ERROR lpdmError). Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag BOOL GetTagValueWait(LPDM_VARKEY lpdmVarKey.

97 WORD GetTagWordWait(Tag Tag_Name). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "WORD" data type Parameters: Tag_Name = Name of the process tag 4-120 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08.

Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "VARIANT_BOOL" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag BYTE GetTagByteStateWait(Tag Tag_Name.4 tag-get-state-wait Functions VARIANT_BOOL GetTagBitStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. PDWORD lp_dwstate). PDWORD lp_dwstate). Return Value: Pointer to the value of the process tag in the "char" data type. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "BYTE" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag char* GetTagCharStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "double" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-121 .97 Global Scripts 4.08. Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of process tag = Status of the tag double GetTagDoubleStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. PDWORD lp_dwstate).5. PDWORD lp_dwstate).

Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "float" data type. char* szTag2Value. Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag BOOL GetTagMultiStateWait(DWORD* pdwState. Example: DWORD dwSate[2]. PDWORD lp_dwstate). &dwSate. const char* pFormat) Return Value: TRUE = no error occurred FALSE = an error occurred Function: The values and states of multiple tags are determined and stored at the corresponding addresses in the indicated format. Parameters: pdwState = Field.97 DWORD GetTagDWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "DWORD" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag float GetTagFloatStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. PDWORD lp_dwstate). "Tag1". "Tag2". ok=GetTagMultiStateWait ("%d %s. Followed by the tag name and the address of the value. in which the tag states are stored pFormat = Format description like at the function printfs. 4-122 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . &szTag2Value).Global Scripts 08. //Storage for the tag value is created by the function with SysMalloc BOOL ok. &dwTag1Value. DWORD dwTag1Value.

Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "signed char" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag long GetTagSDWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name.08. Parameters: Tag_Name pValue size lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Byte pointer to a byte box that contains raw data = Size of the box in bytes = Status of the tag signed char GetTagSByteStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. DWORD size. Return Value: TRUE = no errors FALSE = an error occurred Function: Determines a value of the raw data type. PDWORD lp_dwstate). BYTE pValue[].97 Global Scripts BOOL GetTagRawStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "long" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-123 . PDWORD lp_dwstate).

Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "WORD" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag 4-124 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . PDWORD lp_dwstate). PDWORD lp_dwstate).97 short GetTagSWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. Return Value: Value of the process tag in the "short" data type Parameters: Tag_Name lp_dwstate = Name of the process tag = Status of the tag WORD GetTagWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name.Global Scripts 08.

Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "char" data type. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "BYTE" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagChar (Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "double" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagByte (Tag Tag_Name.5 Tag-set Functions BOOL SetTagBit (Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Pointer to the value of the tag BOOL SetTagDouble (Tag Tag_Name. LPSTR value).5. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-125 . double value).97 Global Scripts 4. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short int" data type. BYTE value).08. short int value).

97 BOOL SetTagDWord (Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "DWORD" data type." data type. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagRaw (Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "signed char. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value that is addressed by the pointer pValue and has a length of "size. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagFloat (Tag Tag_Name.Global Scripts 08. signed char value)." Parameters: Tag_Name pValue size = Name of the tag = Pointer to a byte box that contains the value of the raw data tag = Size of the box BOOL SetTagSByte(Tag Tag_Name. BYTE* pValue. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "float" data type. DWORD value). Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag 4-126 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . DWORD size). float value).

The status is returned after the function is executed. LPCMN_ERROR lpdmError).08. long value). Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagValue (LPDM_VARKEY lpdmVarKey. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short" data type. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "WORD" data type. Parameters: lpdmVarKey lpdmValue dwState lpdmError = Pointer to the "DM_VARKEY" structure = Pointer to the value of the "variant" data type = Status of the tag. LPVARIANT lpdmValue.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTagSDWord(Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "long" data type. short value). WORD value). Function: Enable the transfer of a value in the form of a variant. Set the pointer to the value of the "variant" data type. PDWORD dwState. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagSWord(Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-127 . = Pointer to the structure that contains the error description BOOL SetTagWord (Tag Tag_Name.

"lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "char" data type. BYTE value. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short int" data type. PDWORD lp_dwstate).5. LPSTR value.Global Scripts 08. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "BYTE" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed 4-128 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . PDWORD lp_dwstate). PDWORD lp_dwstate). Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagByteState (Tag Tag_Name. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed.6 tag-set-state Functions BOOL SetTagBitState (Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagCharState (Tag Tag_Name.97 4. short int value.

PDWORD lp_dwstate). double value. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagFloatState (Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "DWORD" data type.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTagDoubleState (Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "float" data type. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "double" data type.08. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-129 . PDWORD lp_dwstate). float value. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagDWordState (Tag Tag_Name. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. DWORD value.

" Parameters: Tag_Name pValue size lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Pointer to the value = Length of the value = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagSByteState(Tag Tag_Name. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "signed char" data type.97 BOOL SetTagRawState (Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed 4-130 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08. PDWORD lp_dwstate). "lp_dwstate" contains the tag status after the function is executed. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "long" data type. signed char value. DWORD size. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagSDWordState(Tag Tag_Name. BYTE* pValue. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. PDWORD lp_dwstate). long value. Function: Set the value of the process tag to a value that is addressed by the "pValue" pointer and has a length of "size.

WORD value. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. short value. PDWORD lp_dwstate). "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short" data type.08.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTagSWordState(Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-131 . Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagWordState (Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "WORD" data type. PDWORD lp_dwstate).

Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "LPSTR" data type.Global Scripts 08. LPSTR value). Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "BYTE" data type. double value). Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Pointer to the the tag value BOOL SetTagDoubleWait(Tag Tag_Name. BYTE value). Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag 4-132 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagByteWait(Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short" data type. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "double" data type.7 tag-set-wait Functions BOOL SetTagBitWait(Tag Tag_Name.5. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagCharWait(Tag Tag_Name. short value).97 4.

97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTagDWordWait(Tag Tag_Name. ok=SetTagMultiWait ("%d %s. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagFloatWait(Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: pFormat = Format description like at the function printfs. DWORD value). 34. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "float" data type. float value). WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-133 . "Tag1".. "Tag2". Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "DWORD" data type.08. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagMultiWait(const char* pFormat. "newValue")... Followed by the tag name and the corresponding value. Example: BOOL ok.) Return Value: TRUE = no error occurred FALSE = an error occurred Function: The values of multiple tags will be set in the indicated format.

Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short" data type.97 BOOL SetTagRawWait(Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value that is addressed by the "pValue" pointer and has the "size" length. long value). Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "signed char" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag 4-134 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagSDWordWait(Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "long" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name pValue size = Name of the tag = Pointer to a byte box that contains the value of the raw data tag = Size of the box BOOL SetTagSByteWait(Tag Tag_Name. DWORD size). Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag BOOL SetTagSWordWait(Tag Tag_Name. signed char value). short value). BYTE pValue[].Global Scripts 08.

Function: Allows the transmission of a value in the form of a variant. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "WORD" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name value = Name of the tag = Value of the tag WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-135 . LPVARIANT lpdmValue. LPCMN_ERROR lpdmError). WORD value).97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTagValueWait(LPDM_VARKEY lpdmVarKey. Sets the pointer to the value of the "Variant" data type.08. PDWORD dwState. Parameters: lpdmVarKey lpdmValue dwState lpdmError = Pointer to the DM_VARKEY structure = Pointer to the value of the "variant" data type = Status of the tag that is returned after the function is executed = Pointer to the structure that contains the error description BOOL SetTagWordWait(Tag Tag_Name.

LPSTR value. short value.5.Global Scripts 08.8 tag-set-state-wait Functions BOOL SetTagBitStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. BYTE value. PDWORD lp_dwstate). PDWORD lp_dwstate). "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Pointer to the tag value = Status of the tag after the function is executed 4-136 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "BYTE" data type. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "LPSTR" data type.97 4. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagCharStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short" data type. "lp_dwstate" contains the tag status after the function is executed. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagByteStateWait(Tag Tag_Name.

Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagDWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name.08. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. PDWORD lp_dwstate). "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "float" data type.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTagDoubleStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagFloatStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. DWORD value. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "DWORD" data type. float value. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. double value. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "double" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-137 .

DWORD size. "Tag3". PDWORD lp_dwstate). &dwState[0].97 BOOL SetTagMultiStateWait(DWORD* pdwState. BOOL SetTagRawStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: pdwState = Field. Followed by the tag name and the value." Parameters: Tag_Name pValue size lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Pointer to the value = Length of the value = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagSByteStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed 4-138 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . BYTE pValue[]. "Tag1". ok=SetTagMultiStateWait ("%d %s %f. in which the tag states are stored pFormat = Format description like at the function printfs. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value that is addressed by the "pValue" pointer and has a length of "size.67). PDWORD lp_dwstate).Global Scripts 08.. BOOL ok..) Return Value: TRUE = no error occurred FALSE = an error occurred Function: The values and states of multiple tags will be stored in the indicated format. const char* pFormat. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "signed char" data type. 34. 4. Example: DWORD dwState[3]. "newValue".. signed char value. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. "Tag2".

WORD value.97 Global Scripts BOOL SetTagSDWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "short" data type. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-139 . long value. PDWORD lp_dwstate). Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagSWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. short value.08. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "WORD" data type. "lp_dwstate" contains the status of the tag after the function is executed. Parameters: Tag_Name value lp_dwstate = Name of the tag = Value of the tag = Status of the tag after the function is executed BOOL SetTagWordStateWait(Tag Tag_Name. Function: Set the value of the process tag with a value of the "long" data type. PDWORD lp_dwstate). PDWORD lp_dwstate).

FALSE: An error occurred. BOOL ExitWinCC (). Return Value: Language identifier for the language set at run time.6.Global Scripts 08. The following assignments apply (Language identifier hexadecimal): German (Germany) = 0x407 English (USA) = 0x409 French (France) = 0x40C For additional language identifier s see section 6. Function: Exit WinCC. DWORD GetLanguage().6 wincc The "WinCC" function category is divided into the following functions: system The return value of the functions is one of the following error codes: TRUE: The function was executed without errors.1 wincc system BOOL DeactivateRTProject ().1. Function: Transmits the language that is set. Function: Deactivate the currently running project.97 4. 4. 4-140 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

1.97 Global Scripts DWORD* InquireLanguage(DWORD* dwCount). Function: Sets the language that is current for the run time by means of the language identifier provided. Return Value: Pointer to a box that contains the transmitted language identifier s. Parameters: dwLocaleID = Language identifier WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 4-141 . Function: Transmits all languages that are configured in the text library for run time. Parameters: dwCount = Pointer to the number of transmitted language identifier s BOOL SetLanguage(DWORD dwLocaleID). The following assignments apply (language identifier hexadecimal): German (Germany) = 0x407 English (USA) = 0x409 French (France) = 0x40C For additional language identifiers see section 6. Use dwCount to specify where the number of transmitted language identifiers should be stored.1.08. The following assignments apply (language identifier hexadecimal): German (Germany) = 0x407 English (USA) = 0x409 French (France) = 0x40C For additional language identifier s see section 6.

97 4-142 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08.

Set the trigger(s) as the starting events. if necessary. In the case of multi-user system. They are only valid in the actual project in which they were created. These are active on any computer. 5. This makes the standard and project functions available in the actions. Global Script actions can be exported and imported. the header file apdefap.\<Projectname>\LIBRARY. An imported action completely replaces the action in the active window. This means that local actions are only active on the corresponding computer.... Create a Global Script action with the Global Script editor.. Global actions are loaded in the project folder independently of the computer (. 3. If a new action is created.. Expand the function information (see Section 2). Local actions are loaded according to their computer in the project directory (.h is integrated automatically by the project folder . Now you have created your Global Script action. You can assign a level of authorization to your action. rename it (see Section 2). there is a difference between global and local actions.08. 4. Set the operator authorization.. the header file from the folder . Use the following steps to create a Global Script action: 1. They are executed by means of a trigger..\APLIB is integrated. Save the action and. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 5-1 . If there is no project function available.. Start this editor in the Control Center. Formulate the function (see Section 2).97 Global Scripts 5 Actions Global Script actions are actions you can create and change yourself.\<Projectname>\PAS).\<Projectname>\<Computername>\PAS). Use Global Script actions at run time to control the process. Compile the action (see Section 2). 6. 2.

You can select from the following trigger types: • Acyclic: The action is only triggered once at a defined point in time. Switch to the "Trigger" tab. Click on the button to open the "Description" dialog box.97 • How to Set the Trigger: 1. This selection makes the window active.Global Scripts 08. 2. 3. 5-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . • Cyclic: The action is continuously triggered in a set time frame. If you have more than one editing window open at the same time. • Tag: The action is triggered when the value of a certain tag changes. select the window in which the desired action is located.

2.97 Global Scripts • How to Select a Trigger Type: 1. Click on "OK" to close the "Add Trigger" dialog box. Tag: a. Cyclic: From the "Cycle" list box. Click on the "Apply" button to transfer the tag to the tag list. If you do not enter a trigger name. open the "Timer" folder. Enter an optional trigger name. 3. select the desired cycle time. WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 5-3 . or Click on the button to open the "Select a Tag" dialog in which you can select a tag. which is the time that passes between two action triggers. It has a contents specific to the type of trigger selected. The "Add Trigger" dialog box opens. Enter an optional trigger name. Once you have set the trigger(s) click on the "OK" button to close the "Description" dialog box. the date and time you created the trigger appears with the icon.08. or Click the right mouse button on the trigger type and select "Add" in the pop-up menu). Make the following additional selections: Acyclic: Set the date and time for the trigger . The trigger name appears in the "Description" dialog box as the label for the icon in the trigger browser. enter the name of the tag you want to use as a trigger when the value changes. Mark the desired trigger type in the "Description" dialog box and click the "Add…" button. b. If necessary. If you do not enter a trigger name. the cycle time you set appears with the icon. In the "Tag Name" text line. The trigger name appears in the "Description" dialog box as the label for the icon in the trigger browser.

Each of these triggers starts the action itself. Change one of your entered triggers by marking it in the trigger browser and clicking the "Change" button (or use the "Change" menu item in the pop -up menu). 5-4 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . If several trigger events are concurrent. Once you have set the trigger. • In the "Cyclic" trigger type. • How to Set the Operator Authorization: 1. select the desired authorization level. 3. you entered multiple cyclic triggers. This selection makes the window active. the interaction of the individual triggers and the run time of the action can lead to undesirable effects. the action starts as many times as there are trigger events at that point in time. Delete an entered trigger by marking it in the trigger browser and clicking the "Delete" button (or use the "Delete" menu item in the pop-up menu). 2. close the "Description" box by clicking on the "OK" button.97 All of the triggers entered in the trigger browser are effective. The action starts as soon as the value of one of these tags changes.Global Scripts 08. If you have more than one editing window open at the same time. Click the "OK" button to close the dialog box. Click on the button to open the "Authorization Levels" dialog box. 4. You should take this into consideration when assigning triggers. select the window that contains the action to which you want to assign the authorization level. You have now set the operator authorization for your action. you entered multiple tags as the trigger. From the list of authorization levels. Note: Since you can assign multiple trigger events to an action. Examples: • In the "Tag" trigger type. Each single trigger event will start the action.

WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 6-1 .97 Global Scripts 6 Value Definitions of the Attributes Values are defined and symbolic names are assigned for the following attributes: • • • • • • • • • • Language identifiers Colors Line end styles Line styles Flash frequencies Text orientation Bar orientation I/O-field. data type of the field content Element orientation in check.and radio-boxes Use the symbolic names or the corresponding number values as parameters in the C functions that you write yourself.08. field type I/O-field.

Global Scripts 08.97 6. Symbolic description LANG_ARABIC LANG_AFRIKAANS LANG_ALBANIAN LANG_BASQUE LANG_BULGARIAN LANG_BYELORUSSIAN LANG_CATALAN LANG_CHINESE LANG_CROATIAN LANG_CZECH LANG_DANISH LANG_DUTCH LANG_ENGLISH LANG_ESTONIAN LANG_FAEROESE LANG_FARSI LANG_FINNISH LANG_FRENCH LANG_GERMAN LANG_GREEK LANG_HEBREW LANG_HUNGARIAN LANG_ICELANDIC LANG_INDONESIAN LANG_ITALIAN LANG_JAPANESE LANG_KOREAN LANG_LATVIAN LANG_LITHUANIAN LANG_NORWEGIAN LANG_POLISH LANG_PORTUGUESE LANG_ROMANIAN LANG_RUSSIAN LANG_SLOVAK LANG_SLOVENIAN LANG_SORBIAN LANG_SPANISH LANG_SWEDISH LANG_THAI LANG_TURKISH LANG_UKRAINIAN Value (hexadecimal) 0x0401 0x0436 0x041C 0x042D 0x0402 0x0423 0x0403 0x0404 0x041A 0x0405 0x0406 0x0413 0x0409 0x0425 0x0438 0x0429 0x040B 0x040C 0x0407 0x0408 0x040D 0x040E 0x040F 0x0421 0x0410 0x0411 0x0412 0x0426 0x0427 0x0414 0x0415 0x0416 0x0418 0x0419 0x041B 0x0424 0x042E 0x040A 0x041D 0x041E 0x041F 0x0422 6-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .1 Language Identifiers WinCC only supports the SUBLANG_DEFAULT languages of Windows.

2 Colors Color black white red dark red green dark green blue dark blue yellow dark yellow cyan dark cyan magenta dark magenta light gray dark gray Symbolic Name CO_BLACK CO_WHITE CO_RED CO_DKRED CO_GREEN CO_DKGREEN CO_BLUE CO_DKBLUE CO_YELLOW CO_DKYELLOW CO_CYAN CO_DKCYAN CO_MAGENTA CO_DKMAGENTA CO_LTGRAY CO_DKGRAY Value (hexadecimal) 00000000 00FFFFFF 000000FF 00000080 0000FF00 00008000 00FF0000 00800000 0000FFFF 00008080 00FFFF00 00808000 00FF00FF 00800080 00C0C0C0 00808080 6.08.97 Global Scripts 6. value = LE_HOLLOW_ARROW.3 Line End Styles Line End rounded Symbolic Name LE_NO LE_HOLLOW_ARROW LE_FULL_ARROW LE_CFULL_ARROW LE_LINE LE_HOLLOW_CIRCLE LE_FULL_CIRCLE Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Example: long value. value += LE_HOLLOW_CIRCLE. //left end is an empty arrow //right end is an empty circle WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 6-3 . value <<= 16.

5 Flash Frequencies Number value 0 1 2 3 Flash frequency Flashing off 0. update cycles. etc.97 6.5 Hz 2 Hz 8 Hz Since flashing is realized software-technologically. Field Type Type Output Input Output and input Number value 0 1 2 6-4 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .7 Bar Orientation Bar orientation top bottom left right Number value 0 1 2 3 6. the frequency is systemand hardware-dependent (number of objects.6 Text Orientation Orientation left centered right Number value 0 1 2 6.). The values in the above table are therefore only for reference. CPU. 6.Global Scripts 08. memory.8 I/O-Field.4 Line Styles Line Style Symbolic Name LS_SOLID LS_DASH LS_DOT LS_DASHDOT hidden LS_DASHDOTDOT LS_INVISIBLE Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6.

08.10 Element Orientation in Check.and Radio Boxes Orientation left right Number value 0 1 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 6-5 .97 Global Scripts 6.9 I/O-Field. Data Type of the Field Content Data type binary decimal string hexadecimal Number value 0 1 2 3 6.

97 6-6 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .Global Scripts 08.

4-94. 4-69. 4-56. 4-49. 4-8. 4-57. 4-22. 4-68 bar scale 4-7. 4-106 C C standard library 4-1 c_bib 4-1. 4-20. 4-57 BorderStyle 4-107 BorderWidth 4-108 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 Index-1 . 4-8. 5-3 Alarm 3-3. 4-72 D DASH 6-4 DASHDOT 6-4 DASHDOTDOT 6-4 DeactivateRTProject 4-140 DKBLUE 6-3 DKCYAN 6-3 DKGRAY 6-3 DKGREEN 6-3 DKMAGENTA 6-3 DKRED 6-3 DKYELLOW 6-3 DLLs 1-1 DM_VARKEY structure 4-113. 4-15. 4-52. 4-62. 4-16. 4-63. 4-53. 4-59. 4-103 BLACK 6-3 BLUE 6-3 border 4-10. 5-4 A AcknowledgeAllPicture 3-25 Activate/deactivate 4-61 Acyclic 5-2. 4-135 DOT 6-4 B Background 4-15. 4-56. 4-51. 4-64. 4-63 bar direction 4-19. 5-3. 4-20. 4-19. 4-90 cursor control 4-36. 4-11. 4-26. 5-4 AXC_OnBtnArcLong 3-3 AXC_OnBtnArcShort 3-3 AXC_OnBtnHornAckn 3-4 AXC_OnBtnLoop 3-5 AXC_OnBtnMsgFirst 3-5 AXC_OnBtnMsgNext 3-6 AXC_OnBtnMsgPrev 3-6 AXC_OnBtnMsgWin 3-7 AXC_OnBtnPrint 3-7 AXC_OnBtnScroll 3-7 AXC_OnBtnVisibleAckn 3-8 axis 4-7. 4-35. 6-3 current horizontal position 4-68 current messages 3-7 current project 2-1 current tag connection 4-34 current vertical position 4-68 Cursor 2-2. 4-90 CYAN 6-3 cycle 3-20. 4-106 border color 4-10. 4-15. 4-41. 4-14. 4-16. 5-3 cyclic 5-2.97 Global Scripts Index 3 3D border 4-11. 4-4 circle 4-14. 4-53 bar segment 4-36. 4-89 Base 4-47 base picture 4-47. 4-119. 4-52. 3-5.08. 4-57. 4-90 cursor location 2-3 cursor mode 4-36. 4-76 Align 4-107 authorization level 3-23. 4-60. 4-56. 4-49. 4-70 color 6-1.

4-19. 3-29. 3-32. 4-105 flash picture 4-47. 6-4 font 4-5. 4-58. 3-42. 4-70. 4-48. 4-21. 4-70. 4-105 flashing 4-15. 4-62. 4-103. 4-65. 3-27. 3-47. 4-21. 3-46. 4-19. 3-35. 4-2. 4-72 empty arrow 6-3 error 3-20. 4-107 fill pattern color 4-58 filling index 4-61 FILTER 4-2 flash frequency 4-16. 4-115. 3-45. 3-31. 4-69. 3-39. 4-43.97 E ellipse 4-14. 4-63. 4-17. 4-48. 4-50. 3-38. 3-36. 3-43. 4-63. 4-118. 4-119 GetActualPointLeft 4-19 GetActualPointTop 4-19 GetAdaptBorder 4-35 GetAdaptPicture 4-35 GetAdaptSize 4-35 GetAlarmHigh 4-26 GetAlarmLow 4-26 GetAlignment 4-7 GetAlignmentLeft 4-17 GetAlignmentTop 4-17 GetAssignments 4-23 GetAssumeOnExit 4-23 GetAssumeOnFull 4-23 GetASVarIndex 3-25 GetAverage 4-35 GetAxisSection 4-7 Index-2 GetBackBorderWidth 4-49 GetBackColor 4-10 GetBackColor2 4-10 GetBackColor3 4-10 GetBackColorBottom 4-10 GetBackColorTop 4-10 GetBackFlashColorOff 4-15 GetBackFlashColorOn 4-15 GetBasePicReferenced 4-47 GetBasePicTransColor 4-47 GetBasePicture 4-47 GetBasePicUseTransColor 4-47 GetBitNumber 4-23 GetBorderBackColor 4-10 GetBorderColor 4-10 GetBorderColorBottom 4-11 GetBorderColorTop 4-11 GetBorderEndStyle 4-49 GetBorderFlashColorOff 4-15 GetBorderFlashColorOn 4-15 GetBorderStyle 4-49 GetBorderWidth 4-49 GetBoxAlignment 4-49 GetBoxCount 4-19 GetBoxType 4-35 GetButtonColor 4-11 GetCaption 4-35 GetCheckAlarmHigh 4-26 GetCheckAlarmLow 4-26 GetCheckLimitHigh4 4-26 GetCheckLimitHigh5 4-26 GetCheckLimitLow4 4-27 GetCheckLimitLow5 4-27 GetCheckToleranceHigh 4-27 GetCheckToleranceLow 4-27 GetCheckWarningHigh 4-27 GetCheckWarningLow 4-28 GetClearOnError 4-23 GetClearOnNew 4-24 GetCloseButton 4-36 GetColorAlarmHigh 4-28 GetColorAlarmLow 4-28 GetColorBottom 4-11 GetColorChangeType 4-36 GetColorLimitHigh4 4-28 GetColorLimitHigh5 4-28 GetColorLimitLow4 4-28 GetColorLimitLow5 4-29 GetColorToleranceHigh 4-29 GetColorToleranceLow 4-29 GetColorTop 4-11 GetColorWarningHigh 4-29 GetColorWarningLow 4-29 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 3-33. 3-23. 4-22. 4-64. 3-30. 4-69. 4-12. 4-105. 4-119. 4-22. 4-42. 4-72 ellipse segment 4-14. 4-66 font color 4-12 font size 4-18. 4-72 ellipse arc 4-21. 4-18. 4-17. 3-44. 3-37. 3-26. 4-22. 4-49. 4-112. 4-127. 3-22. 4-6. 4-64. 4-69. 4-104. 4-40. 3-21. 4-48. 4-135 error message 4-2 ExitWinCC 4-140 extended 4-91 F FieldName 3-39 fill pattern 4-11. 3-34. 3-41. 4-113.Global Scripts 08. 3-40. 3-28. 3-25. 4-66 foreground 4-38 FULL 6-3 G Get 3-25. 4-16. 4-70. 4-103.

97 Global Scripts GetCountPicture 3-25 GetCSigPicture 3-22 GetCursorControl 4-36 GetCursorMode 4-36 GetDataFormat 4-24 GetDirection 4-19 GetEditAtOnce 4-36 GetEndAngle 4-19 GetExponent 4-7 GetExtendedOperation 4-37 GetFillColor 4-11 GetFilling 4-14 GetFillingIndex 4-14 GetFillStyle 4-49 GetFillStyle2 4-50 GetFlashBackColor 4-15 GetFlashBorderColor 4-15 GetFlashFlashPicture 4-47 GetFlashForeColor 4-16 GetFlashPicReferenced 4-48 GetFlashPicTransColor 4-48 GetFlashPicture 4-47 GetFlashPicUseTransColor 4-48 GetFlashRateBackColor 4-16 GetFlashRateBorderColor 4-16 GetFlashRateFlashPic 4-48 GetFlashRateForeColor 4-16 GetFontBold 4-17 GetFontItalic 4-17 GetFontName 4-17 GetFontSize 4-18 GetFontUnderline 4-18 GetForeColor 4-11 GetForeFlashColorOff 4-16 GetForeFlashColorOn 4-16 GetGrid 4-20 GetGridColor 4-12 GetGridHeight 4-20 GetGridWidth 4-20 GetHeight 4-20 GetHiddenInput 4-24 GetHotkey 4-37 GetHysteresis 4-37 GetHysteresisRange 4-37 GetIndexFromMask 3-25 GetInputValueChar 4-24 GetInputValueDouble 4-24 GetItemBorderBackColor 4-12 GetItemBorderColor 4-12 GetItemBorderStyle 4-50 GetItemBorderWidth 4-50 GetLanguage 4-140 GetLanguageSwitch 4-37 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 GetLastChange 4-37 GetLayer 4-19 GetLeft 4-20 GetLeftComma 4-7 GetLimitHigh4 4-29 GetLimitHigh5 4-29 GetLimitLow4 4-30 GetLimitLow5 4-30 GetLimitMax 4-30 GetLimitMin 4-30 GetLink 4-34 GetListType 4-24 GetLongStrokesBold 4-7 GetLongStrokesOnly 4-8 GetLongStrokesSize 4-8 GetLongStrokesTextEach 4-8 GetMarker 4-30 GetMax 4-38 GetMaximizeButton 4-38 GetMessageClassFromVar 3-25 GetMin 4-38 GetMoveable 4-38 GetNumberLines 4-25 GetOffsetLeft 4-38 GetOffsetTop 4-38 GetOnTop 4-38 GetOperation 4-39 GetOperationMessage 4-39 GetOperationReport 4-39 GetOrientation 4-18 GetOutputFormat 4-25 GetOutputValueChar 4-25 GetOutputValueDouble 4-25 GetPasswordLevel 4-39 GetPicDeactReferenced 4-43 GetPicDeactTransparent 4-43 GetPicDeactUseTransColor 4-43 GetPicDownReferenced 4-44 GetPicDownTransparent 4-44 GetPicDownUseTransColor 4-44 GetPicReferenced 4-44 GetPicTransColor 4-44 GetPictureDeactivated 4-43 GetPictureDown 4-43 GetPictureName 4-40 GetPictureUp 4-43 GetPicUpReferenced 4-44 GetPicUpTransparent 4-45 GetPicUpUseTransColor 4-45 GetPicUseTransColor 4-45 GetPointCount 4-20 GetPosition 4-42 GetPressed 4-50 Index-3 .08.

Global Scripts 08.97 GetProcess 4-40 GetPropBOOL 4-46 GetPropChar 4-46 GetPropDouble 4-46 GetPropWord 4-46 GetRadius 4-20 GetRadiusHeight 4-21 GetRadiusWidth 4-21 GetRangeMax 4-42 GetRangeMin 4-42 GetReferenceRotationLeft 4-21 GetReferenceRotationTop 4-21 GetRightComma 4-8 GetRotationAngle 4-21 GetRoundCornerHeight 4-21 GetScaleColor 4-12 GetScaleTicks 4-8 GetScaling 4-8 GetScalingType 4-9 GetScrollBars 4-40 GetSelBGColor 4-12 GetSelTextColor 4-12 GetServerName 4-40 GetSignificantMask 3-22 GetSizeable 4-40 GetSmallChange 4-40 GetStartAngle 4-22 GetTagBit 4-111 GetTagBitState 4-114 GetTagBitStateWait 4-121 GetTagBitWait 4-117 GetTagByte 4-111 GetTagByteState 4-114 GetTagByteStateWait 4-121 GetTagByteWait 4-117 GetTagChar 4-111 GetTagCharState 4-114 GetTagCharStateWait 4-121 GetTagCharWait 4-117 GetTagDouble 4-111 GetTagDoubleState 4-114 GetTagDoubleStateWait 4-121 GetTagDoubleWait 4-117 GetTagDWord 4-111 GetTagDWordState 4-115 GetTagDWordStateWait 4-122 GetTagDWordWait 4-117 GetTagFloat 4-112 GetTagFloatState 4-115 GetTagFloatStateWait 4-122 GetTagFloatWait 4-118 GetTagMultiStateWait 4-122 GetTagMultiWait 4-118 Index-4 GetTagRaw 4-112 GetTagRawState 4-115 GetTagRawStateWait 4-123 GetTagRawWait 4-118 GetTagSByte 4-112 GetTagSByteState 4-115 GetTagSByteStateWait 4-123 GetTagSByteWait 4-119 GetTagSDWord 4-112 GetTagSDWordState 4-116 GetTagSDWordStateWait 4-123 GetTagSDWordWait 4-119 GetTagSWord 4-113 GetTagSWordState 4-116 GetTagSWordStateWait 4-124 GetTagSWordWait 4-119 GetTagValue 4-113 GetTagValueWait 4-119 GetTagWord 4-113 GetTagWordState 4-116 GetTagWordStateWait 4-124 GetTagWordWait 4-120 GetText 4-18 GetToggle 4-50 GetToleranceHigh 4-30 GetToleranceLow 4-30 GetTop 4-22 GetTrend 4-41 GetTrendColor 4-12 GetTypeAlarmHigh 4-31 GetTypeAlarmLow 4-31 GetTypeLimitHigh4 4-31 GetTypeLimitHigh5 4-31 GetTypeLimitLow4 4-31 GetTypeLimitLow5 4-32 GetTypeToleranceHigh 4-32 GetTypeToleranceLow 4-32 GetTypeWarningHigh 4-32 GetTypeWarningLow 4-33 GetUnselBGColor 4-13 GetUnselTextColor 4-13 GetUpdateCycle 4-41 GetVisible 4-41 GetWarningHigh 4-33 GetWarningLow 4-33 GetWidth 4-22 GetWindowBorder 4-41 GetWindowsStyle 4-50 GetZeroPoint 4-22 GetZeroPointValue 4-41 GetZoom 4-41 GMsgFunction 3-3 GREEN 6-3 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .

4-40. 4-36. 4-138 Library 1-1. 2-1.97 Global Scripts H header 2-6 header file ap_glob 2-1 header file ap_plib 2-1 header file apdefap 2-1 height 3-38. 4-74. 4-23. 3-7.08. 6-1. 4-73. 4-93 InquireLanguage 4-141 INVISIBLE 6-4 L language identifier 4-140. 4-20. 2-5. 6-4 Link 1-1 LINKINFO 4-34. 3-2 process control 1-1 process message window 3-7 ProgramExecute 3-22 project function 1-1. 4-96 OLE 3-3. 4-25. 3-6. 2-3. 4-35. 4-46. 4-75. 3-37. 3-39. 3-5. 4-91 O OCX 4-42. 4-82. 6-5 I I/O field 4-14. 3-43. 4-102 OnBtnArcLong 3-3 OnBtnArcShort 3-3 OnBtnComment 3-4 OnBtnEmergAckn 3-4 OnBtnHornAckn 3-4 OnBtnInfo 3-4 OnBtnLanguage 3-5 OnBtnLock 3-5 OnBtnLoop 3-5 OnBtnMsgFirst 3-5 OnBtnMsgLast 3-6 OnBtnMsgNext 3-6 OnBtnMsgPrev 3-6 OnBtnMsgWin 3-7 OnBtnPrint 3-7 OnBtnScroll 3-7 OnBtnSelect 3-8 OnBtnSinglAckn 3-8 OnBtnVisibleAckn 3-8 OnErrorExecute 3-20 OpenPicture 3-9 operator authorization 5-1. 5-1 line 4-16. 5-4 Orientation 6-4. 4-94. 4-49. 3-46. 4-30. 4-101. 4-93. 6-4 line end style 4-49. 4-83. 2-2. 4-53. 3-4. 4-39. 3-41. 4-88 LinkTyp 4-34. 3-44. 4-24. 4-106 line style 4-49. 4-39. 4-90. 4-130. 4-69 hidden 4-74 hide 4-74 HOLLOW 6-3 horizontal alignment 4-17. 4-65 hysteresis 4-37. 2-5. 1-2. 3-1 PTMUnload 3-26 M MAGENTA 6-3 MSRTSetMsgFilter 4-2 MSRTStartMsgService 4-2 MSRTStopMsgService 4-2 N new header files 2-6 new standard function 1-1 notification 4-2 NOTIFY 4-2 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 Index-5 . 3-47. 4-141 Length 3-36. 4-64. 4-88 LoopInAlarm 3-25 LTGRAY 6-3 P PASSCheckAreaLevelPermission 3-23 PASSCheckAreaPermission 3-22 PASSLoginDialog 3-23 password 2-4 Process 1-1. 3-8. 6-3.

Global Scripts 08. 4-118. 3-36 ReturnRootContainer 3-36 RPTJobPreview 3-24 RPTJobPrint 3-24 S SetActualPointLeft 4-68 SetActualPointTop 4-68 SetAlarmHigh 4-76 SetAlarmLow 4-76 SetAlignment 4-51 SetAlignmentLeft 4-65 SetAlignmentTop 4-65 SetAssumeOnExit 4-73 SetAssumeOnFull 4-73 SetASVarIndex 3-26 SetAverage 4-89 SetAxisSection 4-51 SetBackBorderWidth 4-106 SetBackColor 4-55 SetBackColor2 4-55 SetBackColor3 4-55 SetBackColorBottom 4-55 SetBackColorTop 4-56 SetBackFlashColorOff 4-62 SetBackFlashColorOn 4-62 SetBasePicTransColor 4-103 SetBasePicUseTransColor 4-103 SetBitNumber 4-73 SetBorderBackColor 4-56 SetBorderColor 4-56 SetBorderColorBottom 4-56 SetBorderColorTop 4-57 SetBorderEndStyle 4-106 SetBorderFlashColorOff 4-62 SetBorderFlashColorOn 4-62 SetBorderStyle 4-106 SetBorderWidth 4-106 SetBoxAlignment 4-107 SetBoxCount 4-68 SetBoxType 4-89 Index-6 SetButtonColor 4-57 SetCheckAlarmHigh 4-76 SetCheckAlarmLow 4-76 SetCheckLimitHigh4 4-77 SetCheckLimitHigh5 4-77 SetCheckLimitLow4 4-77 SetCheckLimitLow5 4-78 SetCheckToleranceHigh 4-78 SetCheckToleranceLow 4-78 SetCheckWarningHigh 4-79 SetCheckWarningLow 4-79 SetClearOnError 4-74 SetClearOnNew 4-74 SetColorAlarmHigh 4-79 SetColorAlarmLow 4-79 SetColorBottom 4-57 SetColorChangeType 4-89 SetColorLimitHigh4 4-80 SetColorLimitHigh5 4-80 SetColorLimitLow4 4-80 SetColorLimitLow5 4-80 SetColorToleranceHigh 4-81 SetColorToleranceLow 4-81 SetColorTop 4-57 SetColorWarningHigh 4-81 SetColorWarningLow 4-81 SetCursorControl 4-90 SetCursorMode 4-90 SetDirection 4-68 SetEditAtOnce 4-90 SetEndAngle 4-69 SetExponent 4-51 SetExtendedOperation 4-91 SetFillColor 4-58 SetFilling 4-61 SetFillingIndex 4-61 SetFillStyle 4-107 SetFillStyle2 4-107 SetFlashBackColor 4-63 SetFlashBorderColor 4-63 SetFlashFlashPicture 4-103 SetFlashForeColor 4-63 SetFlashPicTransColor 4-104 SetFlashPicUseTransColor 4-104 SetFlashRateBackColor 4-63 SetFlashRateBorderColor 4-64 SetFlashRateFlashPic 4-105 SetFlashRateForeColor 4-64 SetFontBold 4-65 SetFontItalic 4-66 SetFontName 4-66 SetFontSize 4-66 SetFontUnderline 4-66 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 4-70 raw data type 4-112. 3-9. 4-110. 3-24 ReportJob 3-24 return value 3-3. 3-7. 4-115. 4-3. 4-140 ReturnBaseName 3-37 ReturnContainer 3-34 ReturnName 3-35 ReturnPictureName 3-35. 4-6. 4-123 RED 6-3 Report 3-2.97 R Radius 4-20.

4-19. 4-68.97 Global Scripts SetForeColor 4-58 SetForeFlashColorOff 4-64 SetForeFlashColorOn 4-64 SetHeight 4-69 SetHiddenInput 4-74 SetHysteresis 4-91 SetHysteresisRange 4-91 SetIndex 4-18. 4-108 SetItemBorderBackColor 4-58 SetItemBorderColor 4-58 SetLanguage 4-141 SetLeft 4-69 SetLeftComma 4-52 SetLimitHigh4 4-82 SetLimitHigh5 4-82 SetLimitLow4 4-82 SetLimitLow5 4-82 SetLimitMax 4-82 SetLimitMin 4-83 SetLink 4-88 SetLongStrokesBold 4-52 SetLongStrokesOnly 4-52 SetLongStrokesSize 4-53 SetMarker 4-83 SetMax 4-91 SetMessageClassToVar 3-26 SetMin 4-92 SetNumberLines 4-75 SetOffsetLeft 4-92 SetOffsetTop 4-92 SetOperation 4-92 SetOperationMessage 4-93 SetOperationReport 4-93 SetOrientation 4-67 SetOutputValueChar 4-75 SetOutputValueDouble 4-75 SetPasswordLevel 4-94 SetPicDeactTransparent 4-97 SetPicDeactUseTransColor 4-98 SetPicDownTransparent 4-98 SetPicDownUseTransColor 4-98 SetPicTransColor 4-99 SetPictureDeactivated 4-97 SetPictureDown 4-97 SetPictureName 4-94 SetPictureUp 4-97 SetPicUpTransparent 4-99 SetPicUpUseTransColor 4-100 SetPicUseTransColor 4-100 SetPointCount 4-69 SetPosition 4-96 SetPressed 4-108 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 SetProcess 4-94 SetPropBOOL 4-101 SetPropChar 4-101 SetPropDouble 4-102 SetPropWord 4-102 SetRadius 4-70 SetRadiusHeight 4-70 SetRadiusWidth 4-70 SetRangeMax 4-96 SetRangeMin 4-96 SetReferenceRotationLeft 4-70 SetReferenceRotationTop 4-71 SetRightComma 4-53 SetRotationAngle 4-71 SetRoundCornerHeight 4-71 SetRoundCornerWidth 4-71 SetScaleColor 4-59 SetScaleTicks 4-53 SetScaling 4-53 SetScalingType 4-54 SetSelBGColor 4-59 SetSelTextColor 4-59 SetSmallChange 4-94 SetStartAngle 4-72 SetTagBit 4-125 SetTagBitState 4-128 SetTagBitStateWait 4-136 SetTagBitWait 4-132 SetTagByte 4-125 SetTagByteState 4-128 SetTagByteStateWait 4-136 SetTagByteWait 4-132 SetTagChar 4-125 SetTagCharState 4-128 SetTagCharStateWait 4-136 SetTagCharWait 4-132 SetTagDouble 4-125 SetTagDoubleState 4-129 SetTagDoubleStateWait 4-137 SetTagDoubleWait 4-132 SetTagDWord 4-126 SetTagDWordState 4-129 SetTagDWordStateWait 4-137 SetTagDWordWait 4-133 SetTagFloat 4-126 SetTagFloatState 4-129 SetTagFloatStateWait 4-137 SetTagFloatWait 4-133 SetTagMultiStateWait 4-138 SetTagMultiWait 4-133 SetTagRaw 4-126 SetTagRawState 4-130 SetTagRawStateWait 4-138 Index-7 . 4-67.08. 4-105 SetItem 4-107.

4-94. 4-55. 4-57. 4-91. 4-37. 4-93. 4-42. 4-122 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 . 3-32 SSMChgWorkFieldDown 3-30 SSMChgWorkFieldLeft 3-31 SSMDeleteUserSettings 3-32 SSMGetAreaFromPath 3-33 SSMGetAreaFromPicturePath 3-28 SSMGetAreaFromWorkField 3-33 SSMGetAutoLoadSettings 3-34 SSMGetContainer 3-35 SSMGetContainerToPicture 3-34 SSMGetContPict 3-35 SSMGetRootToPicture 3-36 SSMGetScreen 3-36 SSMGetWorkFieldCoordinates 3-37 SSMGetWorkFieldPath 3-37 SSMGetWorkFieldPicture 3-36 SSMLoadCurrentFields 3-38 SSMLoadSettings 3-39 SSMOpenSpecField 3-39 SSMOpenTopField 3-40 SSMOpenTopFieldFixedSize 3-40 SSMPictureMemoryInquire 3-43 SSMPictureMemoryNum 3-43 SSMPictureMemoryRestore 3-44 SSMPictureMemoryStore 3-44 SSMPictureStoreGet 3-41 SSMPictureStoreNum 3-41 SSMPictureStoreSet 3-42 SSMProgramExecute 3-42 SSMRTSetAreaToPicturePath 3-28 SSMSetAreaNameToPicture 3-45 SSMSetLanguage 3-45 SSMStoreCurrentFields 3-46 SSMStoreSettings 3-47 SSMUnload 3-47 style 4-50. 3-31 SSMCheckWorkFieldUp 3-30. 4-11. 4-106 SOLID 6-4 SSMChangeButtonField 3-27 SSMChangeOverviewField 3-27 Index-8 SSMChangeWorkField 3-28 SSMCheckWorkFieldDown 3-28 SSMCheckWorkFieldLeft 3-29 SSMCheckWorkFieldRight 3-29. 4-38.97 SetTagRawWait 4-134 SetTagSByte 4-126 SetTagSByteState 4-130 SetTagSByteStateWait 4-138 SetTagSByteWait 4-134 SetTagSDWord 4-127 SetTagSDWordState 4-130 SetTagSDWordStateWait 4-139 SetTagSDWordWait 4-134 SetTagSWord 4-127 SetTagSWordState 4-131 SetTagSWordStateWait 4-139 SetTagSWordWait 4-134 SetTagValue 4-127 SetTagValueWait 4-135 SetTagWord 4-127 SetTagWordState 4-131 SetTagWordStateWait 4-139 SetTagWordWait 4-135 SetText 4-67 SetToggle 4-109 SetToleranceHigh 4-83 SetToleranceLow 4-83 SetTop 4-72 SetTrend 4-95 SetTrendColor 4-59 SetTypeAlarmHigh 4-84 SetTypeAlarmLow 4-84 SetTypeLimitHigh4 4-84 SetTypeLimitHigh5 4-85 SetTypeLimitLow4 4-85 SetTypeLimitLow5 4-85 SetTypeToleranceHigh 4-86 SetTypeToleranceLow 4-86 SetTypeWarningHigh 4-86 SetTypeWarningLow 4-87 SetUnselBGColor 4-60 SetUnselTextColor 4-60 SetVisible 4-95 SetWarningHigh 4-87 SetWarningLow 4-87 SetWidth 4-72 SetWindowsStyle 4-109 SetZeroPoint 4-72 SetZeroPointValue 4-95 SetZoom 4-95 SFCLoopInAlarm 3-26 slider 4-10. 4-109. 4-96. 4-118. 6-4 SysFree 4-3 SysMalloc 4-3.Global Scripts 08. 6-3. 4-39. 4-56. 4-49. 4-92. 4-40.

4-72 X X axis 4-19. 5-2. 4-72 Y value 4-21. 4-22. 4-20.08. 4-68. 3-47. 4-71 W weight 4-50 WHITE 6-3 width 3-38. 3-39. 4-20. 5-4 U update cycle 4-41. 5-1. 4-72. 3-19 trigger 3-3. 3-46. 4-70. 4-69 X value of 4-21. 4-95 Index-9 . 4-65 vertical distance 4-92 vertical radius 4-21. 4-71 YELLOW 6-3 Z zero point 4-41. 6-4 V vertical alignment 4-17.97 Global Scripts T Tag function category 4-110 TagInfo 3-26 TAGLOG 3-9 TagName 3-25 TEMPLATE 3-9 Timer 5-3 TlgGetColumnPosition 3-9 TlgGetNumberOfColumns 3-10 TlgGetNumberOfRows 3-10 TlgGetNumberOfTrends 3-10 TlgGetRowPosition 3-11 TlgGetRulerArchivNameTrend 3-11 TlgGetRulerTimeTrend 3-11 TlgGetRulerValueTrend 3-12 TlgGetRulerVariableNameTrend 3-12 TlgGetTextAtPos 3-12 TlgTableWindowPressEditRecordButton 3-13 TlgTableWindowPressFirstButton 3-13 TlgTableWindowPressHelpButton 3-13 TlgTableWindowPressInsertRecordButton 3-13 TlgTableWindowPressLastButton 3-13 TlgTableWindowPressNextButton 3-14 TlgTableWindowPressNextItemButton 3-14 TlgTableWindowPressOpenArchiveVariable SelectionDlgButton 3-14 TlgTableWindowPressOpenDlgButton 3-14 TlgTableWindowPressOpenItemSelectDlg Button 3-15 TlgTableWindowPressOpenTimeSelectDlg Button 3-15 TlgTableWindowPressPrevButton 3-15 TlgTableWindowPressPrevItemButton 3-15 TlgTableWindowPressRemoveRecordButton 3-16 TlgTableWindowPressStartStopButton 3-16 TlgTrendWindowPressFirstButton 3-16 TlgTrendWindowPressHelpButton 3-16 TlgTrendWindowPressLastButton 3-16 TlgTrendWindowPressLinealButton 3-17 TlgTrendWindowPressNextButton 3-17 TlgTrendWindowPressNextItemButton 3-17 TlgTrendWindowPressOneToOneButton 3-17 TlgTrendWindowPressOpenDlgButton 3-18 TlgTrendWindowPressOpenItemSelectDlg Button 3-18 TlgTrendWindowPressOpenTimeSelectDlg Button 3-18 TlgTrendWindowPressPrevButton 3-19 TlgTrendWindowPressPrevItemButton 3-19 TlgTrendWindowPressStartStopButton 3-19 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 TlgTrendWindowPressZoomInButton 3-17. 4-22. 4-70 Y Y axis 4-19. 5-3.

Global Scripts 08.97 Index-10 WinCC Manual C79000-G8276-C107-01 .